C8051F85x/86x Low-Cost 8-bit MCU Family with up to 8 kB of Flash Memory High-Speed CIP-51 µC Core - Up to 8 kB flash - Efficient, pipelined instruction architecture - Flash is in-system programmable in 512-Byte sectors - Up to 25 MIPS throughput with 25 MHz clock - Up to 512 Bytes RAM (256 + 256) - Uses standard 8051 instruction set - Expanded interrupt handler On-Chip Debug - On-chip debug circuitry facilitates full speed, non-intrusive in- Communication Peripherals system debug (no emulator required) - UART - Provides breakpoints, single stepping, inspect/modify memory - I2C / SMBus™ and registers - SPI™ 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter Timer/Counters and PWM - Up to 16 input channels - 4 General-Purpose 16-bit Timer/Counters - Up to 200 ksps 12-bit mode or 800 ksps 10-bit mode - 16-bit Programmable Counter Array (PCA) with three channels - Internal VREF or external VREF supported of PWM, capture/compare, or frequency output capability, and Internal Low-Power Oscillator hardware kill/safe state capability - Calibrated to 24.5 MHz Additional Support Peripherals - Low supply current - Independent watchdog timer clocked from LFO - ±2% accuracy over supply and temperature - 16-bit CRC engine Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator Unique Identifier - 80 kHz nominal operation - 32-bit unique key for each device - Low supply current Supply Voltage - Independent clock source for watchdog timer - 2.2 to 3.6 V 2 Analog Comparators Package Options - Programmable hysteresis and response time - Configurable as interrupt or reset source - 16-pin SOIC - Low current - 20-pin QFN, 3 x 3 mm - 24-pin QSOP General-Purpose I/O - Available in die form - Up to 18 pins - Qualified to AEC-Q100 Standards - 5 V-Tolerant Temperature Ranges: - Crossbar-enabled - –40 to +125 °C (-Ix) and –40 to +85 °C (-Gx) Core / Memory / Support Digital Peripherals r 2-8 kB Flash Core LDO UART sba s 256-512 B RAM (2C5I PM-5H1z) Supply Monitor I2C /S SPMIBus rity CrosEncoder nt I/O Pin Watchdog 16-bit CRC 4 x 16-bit Timers Prio era C2 Serial Debug / Programming 3-Channel PCA ol T V- 5 n o Clocking / Oscillators Analog Peripherals g cti on xin Fun 820E4 k.x5Ht eMzr nLHaozlw CL oFlowrce kqP u(oCewMnecOry O SOs Iscnciplillaulatto)torr Clock Selecti (122 -xb Lit oV2w0o 0lCt aSkugsArerpRe sRn ,A1te 0DCfe-Cobremitn p8ca0er0a ktosrpss) exible Pin Mu 18 Multi- Fl Rev. 1.1 11/18 Copyright © 2018 by Silicon Laboratories C8051F85x/86x

C8051F85x-86x Table of Contents 1. Electrical Specifications............................................................................................ 8 1.1. Electrical Characteristics..................................................................................... 8 1.2. Typical Performance Curves............................................................................. 19 1.2.1. Operating Supply Current......................................................................... 19 1.2.2. ADC Supply Current.................................................................................. 20 1.2.3. Port I/O Output Drive................................................................................. 21 1.3. Thermal Conditions........................................................................................... 21 1.4. Absolute Maximum Ratings............................................................................... 22 2. System Overview..................................................................................................... 23 2.1. Power ............................................................................................................ 25 2.1.1. LDO ....................................................................................................... 25 2.1.2. Voltage Supply Monitor (VMON0)............................................................. 25 2.1.3. Device Power Modes................................................................................ 25 2.2. I/O ............................................................................................................ 26 2.2.1. General Features...................................................................................... 26 2.2.2. Crossbar.................................................................................................... 26 2.3. Clocking ............................................................................................................ 27 2.4. Counters/Timers and PWM............................................................................... 27 2.4.1. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0)...................................................... 27 2.4.2. Timers (Timer 0, Timer 1, Timer 2 and Timer 3)....................................... 27 2.4.3. Watchdog Timer (WDT0).......................................................................... 27 2.5. Communications and other Digital Peripherals................................................. 28 2.5.1. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0).......................... 28 2.5.2. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)............................................................. 28 2.5.3. System Management Bus / I2C (SMBus0)............................................... 28 2.5.4. 16/32-bit CRC (CRC0).............................................................................. 28 2.6. Analog Peripherals............................................................................................ 30 2.6.1. 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0)............................................... 30 2.6.2. Low Current Comparators (CMP0, CMP1)............................................... 30 2.7. Reset Sources................................................................................................... 31 2.8. On-Chip Debugging........................................................................................... 31 3. Pin Definitions.......................................................................................................... 32 3.1. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QSOP24 Pin Definitions................................................. 32 3.2. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QFN20 Pin Definitions.................................................... 36 3.3. C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5 SOIC16 Pin Definitions................................................... 39 4. Ordering Information............................................................................................... 42 5. QSOP-24 Package Specifications.......................................................................... 45 6. QFN-20 Package Specifications............................................................................. 47 7. SOIC-16 Package Specifications............................................................................ 50 8. Memory Organization.............................................................................................. 52 8.1. Program Memory............................................................................................... 53 8.1.1. MOVX Instruction and Program Memory.................................................. 53 8.2. Data Memory..................................................................................................... 53 2 Rev. 1. 1

C8051F85x-86x 8.2.1. Internal RAM............................................................................................. 53 8.2.2. External RAM............................................................................................ 54 8.2.3. Special Function Registers....................................................................... 55 9. Special Function Register Memory Map................................................................ 56 10. Flash Memory......................................................................................................... 61 10.1. Security Options.............................................................................................. 61 10.2. Programming the Flash Memory..................................................................... 63 10.2.1. Flash Lock and Key Functions................................................................ 63 10.2.2. Flash Erase Procedure........................................................................... 63 10.2.3. Flash Write Procedure............................................................................ 63 10.3. Non-Volatile Data Storage............................................................................... 64 10.4. Flash Write and Erase Guidelines................................................................... 64 10.4.1. Voltage Supply Maintenance and the Supply Monitor............................ 64 10.4.2. PSWE Maintenance................................................................................ 65 10.4.3. System Clock.......................................................................................... 65 10.5. Flash Control Registers................................................................................... 66 11. Device Identification and Unique Identifier......................................................... 68 11.1. Device Identification Registers........................................................................ 69 12. Interrupts................................................................................................................ 72 12.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors................................................................ 72 12.1.1. Interrupt Priorities.................................................................................... 72 12.1.2. Interrupt Latency..................................................................................... 72 12.2. Interrupt Control Registers.............................................................................. 75 13. Power Management and Internal Regulator........................................................ 82 13.1. Power Modes................................................................................................... 82 13.1.1. Idle Mode................................................................................................ 82 13.1.2. Stop Mode............................................................................................... 83 13.2. LDO Regulator................................................................................................. 83 13.3. Power Control Registers.................................................................................. 83 13.4. LDO Control Registers.................................................................................... 84 14. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0)..................................................................... 85 14.1. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer................................................................................ 86 14.2. ADC Operation................................................................................................ 88 14.2.1. Starting a Conversion.............................................................................. 88 14.2.2. Tracking Modes....................................................................................... 88 14.2.3. Burst Mode.............................................................................................. 89 14.2.4. Settling Time Requirements.................................................................... 90 14.2.5. Gain Setting............................................................................................ 91 14.3. 8-Bit Mode....................................................................................................... 91 14.4. 12-Bit Mode..................................................................................................... 91 14.5. Power Considerations..................................................................................... 92 14.6. Output Code Formatting.................................................................................. 94 14.7. Programmable Window Detector..................................................................... 95 14.7.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode................................................ 95 14.8. Voltage and Ground Reference Options......................................................... 97 Rev. 1. 1 3

C8051F85x-86x 14.8.1. External Voltage Reference.................................................................... 97 14.8.2. Internal Voltage Reference..................................................................... 97 14.8.3. Analog Ground Reference...................................................................... 97 14.9. Temperature Sensor........................................................................................ 98 14.9.1. Calibration............................................................................................... 98 14.10. ADC Control Registers.................................................................................. 99 15. CIP-51 Microcontroller Core............................................................................... 113 15.1. Performance.................................................................................................. 113 15.2. Programming and Debugging Support.......................................................... 114 15.3. Instruction Set................................................................................................ 114 15.3.1. Instruction and CPU Timing.................................................................. 114 15.4. CPU Core Registers...................................................................................... 119 16. Clock Sources and Selection (HFOSC0, LFOSC0, and EXTCLK).................... 125 16.1. Programmable High-Frequency Oscillator.................................................... 125 16.2. Programmable Low-Frequency Oscillator..................................................... 125 16.2.1. Calibrating the Internal L-F Oscillator.................................................... 125 16.3. External Clock............................................................................................... 126 16.4. Clock Selection.............................................................................................. 126 16.5. High Frequency Oscillator Control Registers................................................ 127 16.6. Low Frequency Oscillator Control Registers................................................. 128 16.7. Clock Selection Control Registers................................................................. 129 17. Comparators (CMP0 and CMP1)......................................................................... 130 17.1. System Connectivity...................................................................................... 130 17.2. Functional Description................................................................................... 133 17.3. Comparator Control Registers....................................................................... 134 18. Cyclic Redundancy Check Unit (CRC0)............................................................. 140 18.1. CRC Algorithm............................................................................................... 140 18.2. Preparing for a CRC Calculation................................................................... 142 18.3. Performing a CRC Calculation...................................................................... 142 18.4. Accessing the CRC0 Result.......................................................................... 142 18.5. CRC0 Bit Reverse Feature............................................................................ 142 18.6. CRC Control Registers.................................................................................. 143 19. External Interrupts (INT0 and INT1).................................................................... 149 19.1. External Interrupt Control Registers.............................................................. 150 20. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0)................................................................ 152 20.1. PCA Counter/Timer....................................................................................... 153 20.2. PCA0 Interrupt Sources................................................................................. 153 20.3. Capture/Compare Modules........................................................................... 154 20.3.1. Output Polarity...................................................................................... 154 20.3.2. Edge-Triggered Capture Mode............................................................. 155 20.3.3. Software Timer (Compare) Mode.......................................................... 156 20.3.4. High-Speed Output Mode..................................................................... 157 20.3.5. Frequency Output Mode....................................................................... 158 20.4. PWM Waveform Generation.......................................................................... 159 20.4.1. Edge Aligned PWM............................................................................... 159 4 Rev. 1. 1

C8051F85x-86x 20.4.2. Center Aligned PWM............................................................................. 161 20.4.3. 8 to11-bit Pulse Width Modulator Modes............................................. 163 20.4.4. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode..................................................... 164 20.5. Comparator Clear Function........................................................................... 165 20.6. PCA Control Registers.................................................................................. 167 21. Port I/O (Port 0, Port 1, Port 2, Crossbar, and Port Match).............................. 184 21.1. General Port I/O Initialization......................................................................... 185 21.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog and Digital Functions............................... 186 21.2.1. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog Functions........................................ 186 21.2.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Digital Functions.......................................... 186 21.2.3. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Fixed Digital Functions................................ 187 21.3. Priority Crossbar Decoder............................................................................. 188 21.4. Port I/O Modes of Operation.......................................................................... 191 21.4.1. Configuring Port Pins For Analog Modes.............................................. 191 21.4.2. Configuring Port Pins For Digital Modes............................................... 191 21.4.3. Port Drive Strength................................................................................ 192 21.5. Port Match..................................................................................................... 192 21.6. Direct Read/Write Access to Port I/O Pins.................................................... 192 21.7. Port I/O and Pin Configuration Control Registers.......................................... 193 22. Reset Sources and Supply Monitor................................................................... 211 22.1. Power-On Reset............................................................................................ 212 22.2. Power-Fail Reset / Supply Monitor................................................................ 213 22.3. Enabling the VDD Monitor............................................................................. 213 22.4. External Reset............................................................................................... 214 22.5. Missing Clock Detector Reset....................................................................... 214 22.6. Comparator0 Reset....................................................................................... 214 22.7. Watchdog Timer Reset.................................................................................. 214 22.8. Flash Error Reset.......................................................................................... 214 22.9. Software Reset.............................................................................................. 214 22.10. Reset Sources Control Registers................................................................ 215 22.11. Supply Monitor Control Registers................................................................ 216 23. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)....................................................................... 217 23.1. Signal Descriptions........................................................................................ 218 23.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI)................................................................. 218 23.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO)................................................................. 218 23.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK)................................................................................ 218 23.1.4. Slave Select (NSS)............................................................................... 218 23.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation........................................................................ 219 23.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation.......................................................................... 221 23.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources.................................................................................. 221 23.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity.................................................................... 221 23.6. SPI Special Function Registers..................................................................... 223 23.7. SPI Control Registers.................................................................................... 227 24. System Management Bus / I2C (SMBus0)......................................................... 233 24.1. Supporting Documents.................................................................................. 234 Rev. 1. 1 5

C8051F85x-86x 24.2. SMBus Configuration..................................................................................... 234 24.3. SMBus Operation.......................................................................................... 234 24.3.1. Transmitter vs. Receiver....................................................................... 235 24.3.2. Arbitration.............................................................................................. 235 24.3.3. Clock Low Extension............................................................................. 235 24.3.4. SCL Low Timeout.................................................................................. 235 24.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout......................................................... 236 24.4. Using the SMBus........................................................................................... 236 24.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register.............................................................. 236 24.4.2. SMBus Pin Swap.................................................................................. 238 24.4.3. SMBus Timing Control.......................................................................... 238 24.4.4. SMB0CN Control Register.................................................................... 238 24.4.5. Hardware Slave Address Recognition.................................................. 240 24.4.6. Data Register........................................................................................ 241 24.5. SMBus Transfer Modes................................................................................. 242 24.5.1. Write Sequence (Master)...................................................................... 242 24.5.2. Read Sequence (Master)...................................................................... 243 24.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave)........................................................................ 244 24.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave)........................................................................ 245 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding................................................................................ 245 24.7. I2C / SMBus Control Registers...................................................................... 251 25. Timers (Timer0, Timer1, Timer2 and Timer3).................................................... 259 25.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1...................................................................................... 261 25.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer............................................................... 262 25.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer............................................................... 263 25.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload..................................... 264 25.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)................................ 265 25.2. Timer 2 and Timer 3...................................................................................... 266 25.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 266 25.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................... 267 25.2.3. Capture Mode....................................................................................... 268 25.3. Timer Control Registers................................................................................. 269 26. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0)................................ 289 26.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation.................................................................. 289 26.2. Operational Modes........................................................................................ 291 26.2.1. 8-Bit UART............................................................................................ 291 26.2.2. 9-Bit UART............................................................................................ 292 26.3. Multiprocessor Communications................................................................... 293 26.4. UART Control Registers................................................................................ 295 27. Watchdog Timer (WDT0)..................................................................................... 298 27.1. Features........................................................................................................ 298 27.2. Enabling / Resetting the WDT....................................................................... 299 27.3. Disabling the WDT......................................................................................... 299 27.4. Disabling the WDT Lockout........................................................................... 299 27.5. Setting the WDT Interval............................................................................... 299 6 Rev. 1. 1

C8051F85x-86x 27.6. Synchronization............................................................................................. 300 27.7. Watchdog Timer Control Registers............................................................... 301 28. Revision-Specific Behavior................................................................................. 303 28.1. Revision Identification.................................................................................... 303 28.2. Temperature Sensor Offset and Slope.......................................................... 305 28.3. Flash Endurance........................................................................................... 305 28.4. Latch-Up Performance.................................................................................. 305 28.5. Unique Identifier............................................................................................ 305 29. C2 Interface.......................................................................................................... 306 29.1. C2 Pin Sharing.............................................................................................. 306 29.2. C2 Interface Registers................................................................................... 307 Document Change List.............................................................................................. 312 Rev. 1. 1 7

C8051F85x/86x 1. Electrical Specifications 1.1. Electrical Characteristics All electrical parameters in all tables are specified under the conditions listed in Table 1.1, unless stated otherwise. Table 1.1. Recommended Operating Conditions Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Operating Supply Voltage on VDD V 2.2 — 3.6 V DD System Clock Frequency f 0 — 25 MHz SYSCLK Operating Ambient Temperature T Commercial Grade Devices –40 — 85 °C A (-GM, -GS, -GU) Industrial Grade Devices –40 — 125 °C (-IM, -IS, -IU) Note: All voltages with respect to GND Table 1.2. Power Consumption Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Digital Core Supply Current (–Gx Devices, -40°C to +85°C) Normal Mode—Full speed I F = 24.5 MHz2 — 4.45 4.85 mA DD SYSCLK with code executing from flash F = 1.53 MHz2 — 915 1150 A SYSCLK F = 80 kHz3, T = 25 °C — 250 290 A SYSCLK A F = 80 kHz3 — 250 380 A SYSCLK Idle Mode—Core halted with I F = 24.5 MHz2 — 2.05 2.3 mA DD SYSCLK peripherals running F = 1.53 MHz2 — 550 700 A SYSCLK F = 80 kHz3, T = 25 °C — 125 130 A SYSCLK A F = 80 kHz3 — 125 200 A SYSCLK Stop Mode—Core halted and I Internal LDO ON, T = 25 °C — 105 120 A DD A all clocks stopped, Supply Internal LDO ON — 105 170 A monitor off. Internal LDO OFF — 0.2 — A Notes: 1. Currents are additive. For example, where I is specified and the mode is not mutually exclusive, enabling the DD functions increases supply current by the specified amount. 2. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and High Frequency Oscillator. 3. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and Low Frequency Oscillator. 4. ADC0 always-on power excludes internal reference supply current. 5. The internal reference is enabled as-needed when operating the ADC in burst mode to save power. 8 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.2. Power Consumption (Continued) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Digital Core Supply Current (–Ix Devices, -40°C to +125°C) Normal Mode—Full speed I F = 24.5 MHz2 — 4.45 5.25 mA DD SYSCLK with code executing from flash F = 1.53 MHz2 — 915 1600 A SYSCLK F = 80 kHz3, T = 25 °C — 250 290 A SYSCLK A F = 80 kHz3 — 250 725 A SYSCLK Idle Mode—Core halted with I F = 24.5 MHz2 — 2.05 2.6 mA DD SYSCLK peripherals running F = 1.53 MHz2 — 550 1000 A SYSCLK F = 80 kHz3, T = 25 °C — 125 130 A SYSCLK A F = 80 kHz3 — 125 550 A SYSCLK Stop Mode—Core halted and I Internal LDO ON, T = 25 °C — 105 120 A DD A all clocks stopped, Supply Internal LDO ON — 105 270 A monitor off. Internal LDO OFF — 0.2 — A Analog Peripheral Supply Currents (Both –Gx and –Ix Devices) High-Frequency Oscillator I Operating at 24.5 MHz, — 155 — µA HFOSC T = 25 °C A Low-Frequency Oscillator I Operating at 80 kHz, — 3.5 — µA LFOSC T = 25 °C A ADC0 Always-on4 I 800 ksps, 10-bit conversions or — 845 1200 µA ADC 200 ksps, 12-bit conversions Normal bias settings V = 3.0 V DD 250 ksps, 10-bit conversions or — 425 580 µA 62.5 ksps 12-bit conversions Low power bias settings V = 3.0 V DD ADC0 Burst Mode, 10-bit sin- I 200 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 370 — µA ADC DD gle conversions, external ref- 100 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 185 — µA erence DD 10 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 19 — µA DD Notes: 1. Currents are additive. For example, where I is specified and the mode is not mutually exclusive, enabling the DD functions increases supply current by the specified amount. 2. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and High Frequency Oscillator. 3. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and Low Frequency Oscillator. 4. ADC0 always-on power excludes internal reference supply current. 5. The internal reference is enabled as-needed when operating the ADC in burst mode to save power. Rev. 1.1 9

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.2. Power Consumption (Continued) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit ADC0 Burst Mode, 10-bit sin- I 200 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 490 — µA ADC DD gle conversions, internal ref- 100 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 245 — µA erence, Low power bias DD settings 10 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 23 — µA DD ADC0 Burst Mode, 12-bit sin- I 100 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 530 — µA ADC DD gle conversions, external ref- 50 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 265 — µA erence DD 10 ksps, V = 3.0 V — 53 — µA DD ADC0 Burst Mode, 12-bit sin- I 100 ksps, V = 3.0 V, — 950 — µA ADC DD gle conversions, internal ref- Normal bias erence 50 ksps, V = 3.0 V, — 420 — µA DD Low power bias 10 ksps, V = 3.0 V, — 85 — µA DD Low power bias Internal ADC0 Reference, I Normal Power Mode — 680 790 µA IREF Always-on5 Low Power Mode — 160 210 µA Temperature Sensor I — 75 120 µA TSENSE Comparator 0 (CMP0), I CPnMD = 11 — 0.5 — µA CMP Comparator 1 (CMP1) CPnMD = 10 — 3 — µA CPnMD = 01 — 10 — µA CPnMD = 00 — 25 — µA Voltage Supply Monitor I — 15 20 µA VMON (VMON0) Notes: 1. Currents are additive. For example, where I is specified and the mode is not mutually exclusive, enabling the DD functions increases supply current by the specified amount. 2. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and High Frequency Oscillator. 3. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and Low Frequency Oscillator. 4. ADC0 always-on power excludes internal reference supply current. 5. The internal reference is enabled as-needed when operating the ADC in burst mode to save power. 10 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.3. Reset and Supply Monitor Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit V Supply Monitor Threshold V 1.85 1.95 2.1 V DD VDDM Power-On Reset (POR) Threshold V Rising Voltage on V — 1.4 — V POR DD Falling Voltage on V 0.75 — 1.36 V DD V Ramp Time t Time to V > 2.2 V 10 — — µs DD RMP DD Reset Delay from POR t Relative to V > 3 10 31 ms POR DD V POR Reset Delay from non-POR source t Time between release — 39 — µs RST of reset source and code execution RST Low Time to Generate Reset t 15 — — µs RSTL Missing Clock Detector Response t F > 1 MHz — 0.625 1.2 ms MCD SYSCLK Time (final rising edge to reset) Missing Clock Detector Trigger  F — 7.5 13.5 kHz MCD Frequency V Supply Monitor Turn-On Time t — 2 — µs DD MON Table 1.4. Flash Memory Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Units Write Time1,2 t One Byte, 19 20 21 µs WRITE F = 24.5 MHz SYSCLK Erase Time1,2 t One Page, 5.2 5.35 5.5 ms ERASE F = 24.5 MHz SYSCLK V Voltage During Programming3 V 2.2 — 3.6 V DD PROG Endurance (Write/Erase Cycles) N 20k 100k — Cycles WE Notes: 1. Does not include sequencing time before and after the write/erase operation, which may be multiple SYSCLK cycles. 2. The internal High-Frequency Oscillator has a programmable output frequency using the OSCICL register, which is factory programmed to 24.5 MHz. If user firmware adjusts the oscillator speed, it must be between 22 and 25 MHz during any flash write or erase operation. It is recommended to write the OSCICL register back to its reset value when writing or erasing flash. 3. Flash can be safely programmed at any voltage above the supply monitor threshold (V ). VDDM 4. Data Retention Information is published in the Quarterly Quality and Reliability Report. Rev. 1.1 11

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.5. Internal Oscillators Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit High Frequency Oscillator (24.5 MHz) Oscillator Frequency f Full Temperature and 24 24.5 25 MHz HFOSC Supply Range Power Supply Sensitivity PSS T = 25 °C — 0.5 — %/V HFOSC A Temperature Sensitivity TS V = 3.0 V — 40 — ppm/°C HFOSC DD Low Frequency Oscillator (80 kHz) Oscillator Frequency f Full Temperature and 75 80 85 kHz LFOSC Supply Range Power Supply Sensitivity PSS T = 25 °C — 0.05 — %/V LFOSC A Temperature Sensitivity TS V = 3.0 V — 65 — ppm/°C LFOSC DD Table 1.6. External Clock Input Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit External Input CMOS Clock f 0 — 25 MHz CMOS Frequency (at EXTCLK pin) External Input CMOS Clock High Time t 18 — — ns CMOSH External Input CMOS Clock Low Time t 18 — — ns CMOSL 12 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.7. ADC Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Resolution N 12 Bit Mode 12 Bits bits 10 Bit Mode 10 Bits Throughput Rate f 12 Bit Mode — — 200 ksps S (High Speed Mode) 10 Bit Mode — — 800 ksps Throughput Rate f 12 Bit Mode — — 62.5 ksps S (Low Power Mode) 10 Bit Mode — — 250 ksps Tracking Time t High Speed Mode 230 — — ns TRK Low Power Mode 450 — — ns Power-On Time t 1.2 — — µs PWR SAR Clock Frequency f High Speed Mode, — — 6.25 MHz SAR Reference is 2.4 V internal High Speed Mode, — — 12.5 MHz Reference is not 2.4 V internal Low Power Mode — — 4 MHz Conversion Time t 10-Bit Conversion, 1.1 µs CNV SAR Clock = 12.25 MHz, System Clock = 24.5 MHz. Sample/Hold Capacitor C Gain = 1 — 5 — pF SAR Gain = 0.5 — 2.5 — pF Input Pin Capacitance C — 20 — pF IN Input Mux Impedance R — 550 —  MUX Voltage Reference Range V 1 — V V REF DD Input Voltage Range* V Gain = 1 0 — V V IN REF Gain = 0.5 0 — 2xV V REF Power Supply Rejection PSRR — 70 — dB ADC Ratio DC Performance Integral Nonlinearity INL 12 Bit Mode — ±1 ±2.3 LSB 10 Bit Mode — ±0.2 ±0.6 LSB Differential Nonlinearity  DNL 12 Bit Mode –1 ±0.7 1.9 LSB (Guaranteed Monotonic) 10 Bit Mode — ±0.2 ±0.6 LSB *Note: Absolute input pin voltage is limited by the V supply. DD Rev. 1.1 13

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.7. ADC (Continued) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Offset Error E 12 Bit Mode, VREF = 1.65 V –3 0 3 LSB OFF 10 Bit Mode, VREF = 1.65 V –2 0 2 LSB Offset Temperature Coeffi- TC — 0.004 — LSB/°C OFF cient Slope Error E 12 Bit Mode — ±0.02 ±0.1 % M 10 Bit Mode — ±0.06 ±0.24 % Dynamic Performance 10 kHz Sine Wave Input 1dB below full scale, Max throughput, using AGND pin Signal-to-Noise SNR 12 Bit Mode 61 66 — dB 10 Bit Mode 53 60 — dB Signal-to-Noise Plus Distor- SNDR 12 Bit Mode 61 66 — dB tion 10 Bit Mode 53 60 — dB Total Harmonic Distortion THD 12 Bit Mode — 71 — dB (Up to 5th Harmonic) 10 Bit Mode — 70 — dB Spurious-Free Dynamic SFDR 12 Bit Mode — –79 — dB Range 10 Bit Mode — –74 — dB *Note: Absolute input pin voltage is limited by the V supply. DD 14 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.8. Voltage Reference Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Internal Fast Settling Reference Output Voltage V 1.65 V Setting 1.62 1.65 1.68 V REFFS (Full Temperature and Supply 2.4 V Setting, V > 2.6 V 2.35 2.4 2.45 V Range) DD Temperature Coefficient TC — 50 — ppm/°C REFFS Turn-on Time t — — 1.5 µs REFFS Power Supply Rejection PSRR — 400 — ppm/V REFFS External Reference Input Current I Sample Rate = 800 ksps; — 5 — µA EXTREF VREF = 3.0 V Table 1.9. Temperature Sensor Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Offset V T = 0 °C — 757 — mV OFF A Offset Error* E T = 0 °C — 17 — mV OFF A Slope M — 2.85 — mV/°C Slope Error* E — 70 — µV/°C M Linearity — 0.5 — °C Turn-on Time — 1.8 — µs *Note: Represents one standard deviation from the mean. Rev. 1.1 15

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.10. Comparators Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Response Time, CPnMD = 00 t +100 mV Differential — 100 — ns RESP0 (Highest Speed) –100 mV Differential — 150 — ns Response Time, CPnMD = 11 t +100 mV Differential — 1.5 — µs RESP3 (Lowest Power) –100 mV Differential — 3.5 — µs Positive Hysterisis HYS CPnHYP = 00 — 0.4 — mV CP+ Mode 0 (CPnMD = 00) CPnHYP = 01 — 8 — mV CPnHYP = 10 — 16 — mV CPnHYP = 11 — 32 — mV Negative Hysterisis HYS CPnHYN = 00 — -0.4 — mV CP- Mode 0 (CPnMD = 00) CPnHYN = 01 — –8 — mV CPnHYN = 10 — –16 — mV CPnHYN = 11 — –32 — mV Positive Hysterisis HYS CPnHYP = 00 — 0.5 — mV CP+ Mode 1 (CPnMD = 01) CPnHYP = 01 — 6 — mV CPnHYP = 10 — 12 — mV CPnHYP = 11 — 24 — mV Negative Hysterisis HYS CPnHYN = 00 — -0.5 — mV CP- Mode 1 (CPnMD = 01) CPnHYN = 01 — –6 — mV CPnHYN = 10 — –12 — mV CPnHYN = 11 — –24 — mV Positive Hysterisis HYS CPnHYP = 00 — 0.7 — mV CP+ Mode 2 (CPnMD = 10) CPnHYP = 01 — 4.5 — mV CPnHYP = 10 — 9 — mV CPnHYP = 11 — 18 — mV Negative Hysterisis HYS CPnHYN = 00 — -0.6 — mV CP- Mode 2 (CPnMD = 10) CPnHYN = 01 — –4.5 — mV CPnHYN = 10 — –9 — mV CPnHYN = 11 — –18 — mV 16 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.10. Comparators Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Positive Hysteresis HYS CPnHYP = 00 — 1.5 — mV CP+ Mode 3 (CPnMD = 11) CPnHYP = 01 — 4 — mV CPnHYP = 10 — 8 — mV CPnHYP = 11 — 16 — mV Negative Hysteresis HYS CPnHYN = 00 — -1.5 — mV CP- Mode 3 (CPnMD = 11) CPnHYN = 01 — –4 — mV CPnHYN = 10 — –8 — mV CPnHYN = 11 — –16 — mV Input Range (CP+ or CP–) V -0.25 — V +0.25 V IN DD Input Pin Capacitance C — 7.5 — pF CP Common-Mode Rejection Ratio CMRR — 70 — dB CP Power Supply Rejection Ratio PSRR — 72 — dB CP Input Offset Voltage V T = 25 °C -10 0 10 mV OFF A Input Offset Tempco TC — 3.5 — µV/°C OFF Rev. 1.1 17

C8051F85x/86x Table 1.11. Port I/O Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Output High Voltage (High Drive) V I = –3 mA V – 0.7 — — V OH OH DD Output Low Voltage (High Drive) V I = 8.5 mA — — 0.6 V OL OL Output High Voltage (Low Drive) V I = –1 mA V – 0.7 — — V OH OH DD Output Low Voltage (Low Drive) V I = 1.4 mA — — 0.6 V OL OL Input High Voltage V V – 0.6 — — V IH DD Input Low Voltage V — — 0.6 V IL Pin Capacitance C — 7 — pF IO Weak Pull-Up Current I V = 3.6 –30 –20 –10 µA PU DD (V = 0 V) IN Input Leakage  I GND < V < V –1.1 — 1.1 µA LK IN DD (Pullups off or Analog) Input Leakage Current with V I V < V < V +2.0 V 0 5 150 µA IN LK DD IN DD above V DD 18 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 1.2. Typical Performance Curves 1.2.1. Operating Supply Current 5 Normal(cid:3)Mode 4.5 Idle(cid:3)Mode 4 3.5 A) m t((cid:3) 3 n e r2.5 r u C y(cid:3) 2 pl p u S1.5 1 0.5 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 Operating(cid:3)Frequency(cid:3)(MHz) Figure 1.1. Typical Operating Current Running From 24.5 MHz Internal Oscillator 260 Normal(cid:3)Mode 240 Idle(cid:3)Mode 220 A) μ200 t((cid:3) n e rr180 u C y(cid:3) pl160 p u S 140 120 100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Operating(cid:3)Frequency(cid:3)(kHz) Figure 1.2. Typical Operating Current Running From 80 kHz Internal Oscillator Rev. 1.1 19

C8051F85x/86x 1.2.2. ADC Supply Current 10(cid:882)bit(cid:3)Burst(cid:3)Mode,(cid:3)Single(cid:3)Conversions 12(cid:882)bit(cid:3)Burst(cid:3)Mode,(cid:3)Single(cid:3)Conversions 1200 1200 1100 Internal(cid:3)Reference,(cid:3)Normal(cid:3)Bias 1100 Internal(cid:3)Reference,(cid:3)Normal(cid:3)Bias Internal(cid:3)Reference,(cid:3)LP(cid:3)Bias Internal(cid:3)Reference,(cid:3)LP(cid:3)Bias 1000 1000 Other(cid:3)Reference Other(cid:3)Reference 900 900 A) 800 A) 800 μ μ nt((cid:3) 700 nt((cid:3) 700 e e urr 600 urr 600 C C y(cid:3) 500 y(cid:3) 500 pl pl p 400 p 400 u u S 300 S 300 200 200 100 100 0 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Sample(cid:3)Rate(cid:3)(ksps) Sample(cid:3)Rate(cid:3)(ksps) Figure 1.3. Typical ADC and Internal Reference Power Consumption in Burst Mode 10(cid:882)bit(cid:3)Conversions,(cid:3)Normal(cid:3)Bias 10(cid:882)bit(cid:3)Conversions,(cid:3)Low(cid:3)Power(cid:3)Bias 950 450 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V 440 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V 900 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.0(cid:3)V Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.0(cid:3)V 430 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V A)850 A)420 μ μ nt((cid:3) nt((cid:3)410 e e urr800 urr400 C C y(cid:3) y(cid:3)390 pl pl p750 p u u380 S S 370 700 360 650 350 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 50 150 250 Sample(cid:3)Rate(cid:3)(ksps) Sample(cid:3)Rate(cid:3)(ksps) 12(cid:882)bit(cid:3)Conversions,(cid:3)Normal(cid:3)Bias 12(cid:882)bit(cid:3)Conversions,(cid:3)Low(cid:3)Power(cid:3)Bias 950 450 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V 440 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V 900 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.0(cid:3)V Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.0(cid:3)V 430 Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V Vdd(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V A)850 A)420 μ μ nt((cid:3) nt((cid:3)410 e e urr800 urr400 C C y(cid:3) y(cid:3)390 pl pl p750 p u u380 S S 370 700 360 650 350 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 10 20 30 40 50 60 Sample(cid:3)Rate(cid:3)(ksps) Sample(cid:3)Rate(cid:3)(ksps) Figure 1.4. Typical ADC Power Consumption in Normal (Always-On) Mode 20 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 1.2.3. Port I/O Output Drive Typical(cid:3)VOHvs.(cid:3)Source(cid:3)Current(cid:3)in(cid:3)High(cid:3)Drive(cid:3)Mode Typical(cid:3)VOHvs.(cid:3)Source(cid:3)Current(cid:3)in(cid:3)Low(cid:3)Drive(cid:3)Mode 4 4 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V 3.5 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.3(cid:3)V 3.5 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.3(cid:3)V VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.7(cid:3)V VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.7(cid:3)V 3 3 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V 2.5 2.5 V) V) (H 2 (H 2 O O V V 1.5 1.5 1 1 0.5 0.5 0 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Source(cid:3)Current(cid:3)(mA) Source(cid:3)Current(cid:3)(mA) Figure 1.5. Typical V vs. Source Current OH Typical(cid:3)VOLvs.(cid:3)Sink(cid:3)Current(cid:3)in(cid:3)High(cid:3)Drive(cid:3)Mode Typical(cid:3)VOLvs.(cid:3)Sink(cid:3)Current(cid:3)in(cid:3)Low(cid:3)Drive(cid:3)Mode 4 4 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.6(cid:3)V 3.5 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.3(cid:3)V 3.5 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)3.3(cid:3)V VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.7(cid:3)V VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.7(cid:3)V 3 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V 3 VDD(cid:3)=(cid:3)2.2(cid:3)V 2.5 2.5 V) V) (OL 2 (OL 2 V V 1.5 1.5 1 1 0.5 0.5 0 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 5 10 15 20 25 Sink(cid:3)Current(cid:3)(mA) Sink(cid:3)Current(cid:3)(mA) Figure 1.6. Typical V vs. Sink Current OL 1.3. Thermal Conditions Table 1.12. Thermal Conditions Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Thermal Resistance*  SOIC-16 Packages — 70 — °C/W JA QFN-20 Packages — 60 — °C/W QSOP-24 Packages — 65 — °C/W *Note: Thermal resistance assumes a multi-layer PCB with any exposed pad soldered to a PCB pad. Rev. 1.1 21

C8051F85x/86x 1.4. Absolute Maximum Ratings Stresses above those listed under Table 1.13 may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the devices at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. For more information on the available quality and reliability data, see the Quality and Reliability Monitor Report at http://www.silabs.com/support/quality/pages/default.aspx. Table 1.13. Absolute Maximum Ratings Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Max Unit Ambient Temperature Under T –55 125 °C BIAS Bias Storage Temperature T –65 150 °C STG Voltage on V V GND–0.3 4.2 V DD DD Voltage on I/O pins or RST V V > 3.3 V GND–0.3 5.8 V IN DD V < 3.3 V GND–0.3 V +2.5 V DD DD Total Current Sunk into Supply I — 400 mA VDD Pin Total Current Sourced out of I 400 — mA GND Ground Pin Current Sourced or Sunk by Any I -100 100 mA PIO I/O Pin or RST Operating Junction Temperature T Commercial Grade Devices –40 105 °C J (-GM, -GS, -GU) Industrial Grade Devices –40 125 °C (-IM, -IS, -IU) Note: Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. 22 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 2. System Overview The C8051F85x/86x device family are fully integrated, mixed-signal system-on-a-chip MCUs. Highlighted features are listed below. Refer to Table 4.1 for specific product feature selection and part ordering numbers. Core: Pipelined CIP-51 Core Fully compatible with standard 8051 instruction set 70% of instructions execute in 1-2 clock cycles 25 MHz maximum operating frequency Memory: 2-8 kB flash; in-system programmable in 512-byte sectors 512 bytes RAM (including 256 bytes standard 8051 RAM and 256 bytes on-chip XRAM) Power: Internal low drop-out (LDO) regulator for CPU core voltage Power-on reset circuit and brownout detectors I/O: Up to 18 total multifunction I/O pins: All pins 5 V tolerant under bias Flexible peripheral crossbar for peripheral routing 5 mA source, 12.5 mA sink allows direct drive of LEDs Clock Sources: Low-power internal oscillator: 24.5 MHz ±2% Low-frequency internal oscillator: 80 kHz External CMOS clock option Timers/Counters and PWM: 3-channel Programmable Counter Array (PCA) supporting PWM, capture/compare and frequency output modes 4x 16-bit general-purpose timers Independent watchdog timer, clocked from low frequency oscillator Communications and Other Digital Peripherals: UART SPI™ I2C / SMBus™ 16-bit CRC Unit, supporting automatic CRC of flash at 256-byte boundaries Analog: 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) 2 x Low-Current Comparators On-Chip Debugging With on-chip power-on reset, voltage supply monitor, watchdog timer, and clock oscillator, the C8051F85x/ 86x devices are truly standalone system-on-a-chip solutions. The flash memory is reprogrammable in- circuit, providing non-volatile data storage and allowing field upgrades of the firmware. The on-chip debugging interface (C2) allows non-intrusive (uses no on-chip resources), full speed, in- circuit debugging using the production MCU installed in the final application. This debug logic supports inspection and modification of memory and registers, setting breakpoints, single stepping, and run and halt commands. All analog and digital peripherals are fully functional while debugging. Each device is specified for 2.2 to 3.6 V operation, and are available in 20-pin QFN, 16-pin SOIC or 24-pin QSOP packages. All package options are lead-free and RoHS compliant. The device is available in two temperature grades: -40 to +85 °C or –40 to +125 °C. See Table 4.1 for ordering information. A block diagram is included in Figure 2.1. Rev. 1.1 23

C8051F85x/86x Power On CIP-51 8051 Port I/O Configuration Reset Controller Core P0.0/VREF Digital Peripherals P0.1/AGND Reset 8k Byte ISP Flash P0.2 C2CK/RST Debug / Program Memory UART Port 0 P0.3/EXTCLK Programming Timers 0, Drivers P0.4/TX Hardware 256 Byte SRAM 1, 2, 3 P0.5/RX 3-ch PCA Priority P0.6/CNVSTR C2D Crossbar P0.7 256 Byte XRAM I2C / Decoder P1.0 SMBus P1.1 SPI P1.2 Power Net CRC Port 1 P1.3 VDD Independent Drivers P1.4 GND Watchdog Timer SFR Crossbar Control P1.5 SYSCLK P1.6 Bus Analog Peripherals P1.7 Internal Port 2 P2.0/C2D 24.5 MHz Reference Driver P2.1 2% Oscillator VDD VREF Low-Freq. A VDD Oscillator 12/10 bit M ADC U CMOS X STeenmsopr EXTCLK Oscillator Input System Clock +-+ - Configuration 2 Comparators Figure 2.1. C8051F85x/86x Family Block Diagram (QSOP-24 Shown) 24 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 2.1. Power 2.1.1. LDO The C8051F85x/86x devices include an internal regulator to regulate the supply voltage down the core operating voltage of 1.8 V. This LDO consumes little power, but can be shut down in the power-saving Stop mode. 2.1.2. Voltage Supply Monitor (VMON0) The C8051F85x/86x devices include a voltage supply monitor which allows devices to function in known, safe operating condition without the need for external hardware. The supply monitor module includes the following features: Holds the device in reset if the main VDD supply drops below the VDD Reset threshold. 2.1.3. Device Power Modes The C8051F85x/86x devices feature three low power modes in addition to normal operating mode, allowing the designer to save power when the core is not in use. All power modes are detailed in Table 2.1. Table 2.1. C8051F85x/86x Power Modes Mode Description Mode Entrance Mode Exit Core and peripherals operating Normal at full speed Core halted Any enabled interrupt or Idle Peripherals operate at Set IDLE bit in PCON reset source full speed All clocks stopped Core LDO and Clear STOPCF in REG0MD (optionally) Stop and Device reset comparators still Set STOP bit in PCON running Pins retain state All clocks stopped Core LDO and all Set STOPCF in REG0MD Shutdown analog circuits shut and Device reset down Set STOP bit in PCON Pins retain state In addition, the user may choose to lower the clock speed in Normal and Idle modes to save power when the CPU requirements allow for lower speed. Rev. 1.1 25

C8051F85x/86x 2.1.3.1. Normal Mode Normal mode encompasses the typical full-speed operation. The power consumption of the device in this mode will vary depending on the system clock speed and any analog peripherals that are enabled. 2.1.3.2. Idle Mode Setting the IDLE bit in PCON causes the hardware to halt the CPU and enter idle mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal registers and memory maintain their original data. All analog and digital peripherals can remain active during idle mode. Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt is asserted or a reset occurs. The assertion of an enabled interrupt will cause the IDLE bit to be cleared and the CPU to resume operation. The pending interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return from interrupt (RETI) will be the instruction immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit. If Idle mode is terminated by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000. 2.1.3.3. Stop Mode (Regulator On) Setting the STOP bit in PCON when STOPCF in REG0CN is clear causes the controller core to enter stop mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. In stop mode the internal oscillator, CPU, and all digital peripherals are stopped. Each analog peripheral may be shut down individually prior to entering stop mode. Stop mode can only be terminated by an internal or external reset. 2.1.3.4. Shutdown Mode (Regulator Off) Shutdown mode is an extension of the normal stop mode operation. Setting the STOP bit in PCON when STOPCF in REG0CN is also set causes the controller core to enter shutdown mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution, and then the internal regulator is powered down. In shutdown mode, all core functions, memories and peripherals are powered off. An external pin reset or power-on reset is required to exit shutdown mode. 2.2. I/O 2.2.1. General Features The C8051F85x/86x ports have the following features: Push-pull or open-drain output modes and analog or digital modes. Port Match allows the device to recognize a change on a port pin value and wake from idle mode or generate an interrupt. Internal pull-up resistors can be globally enabled or disabled. Two external interrupts provide unique interrupt vectors for monitoring time-critical events. Above-rail tolerance allows 5 V interface when device is powered. 2.2.2. Crossbar The C8051F85x/86x devices have a digital peripheral crossbar with the following features: Flexible peripheral assignment to port pins. Pins can be individually skipped to move peripherals as needed for design or layout considerations. The crossbar has a fixed priority for each I/O function and assigns these functions to the port pins. When a digital resource is selected, the least-significant unassigned port pin is assigned to that resource. If a port pin is assigned, the crossbar skips that pin when assigning the next selected resource. Additionally, the crossbar will skip port pins whose associated bits in the PnSKIP registers are set. This provides some flexibility when designing a system: pins involved with sensitive analog measurements can be moved away from digital I/O and peripherals can be moved around the chip as needed to ease layout constraints. 26 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 2.3. Clocking The C8051F85x/86x devices have two internal oscillators and the option to use an external CMOS input at a pin as the system clock. A programmable divider allows the user to internally run the system clock at a slower rate than the selected oscillator if desired. 2.4. Counters/Timers and PWM 2.4.1. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) The C8051F85x/86x devices include a three-channel, 16-bit Programmable Counter Array with the following features: 16-bit time base. Programmable clock divisor and clock source selection. Three independently-configurable channels. 8, 9, 10, 11 and 16-bit PWM modes (center or edge-aligned operation). Output polarity control. Frequency output mode. Capture on rising, falling or any edge. Compare function for arbitrary waveform generation. Software timer (internal compare) mode. Can accept hardware “kill” signal from comparator 0. 2.4.2. Timers (Timer 0, Timer 1, Timer 2 and Timer 3) Timers include the following features: Timer 0 and Timer 1 are standard 8051 timers, supporting backwards-compatibility with firmware and hardware. Timer 2 and Timer 3 can each operate as 16-bit auto-reload or two independent 8-bit auto-reload timers, and include pin or LFO clock capture capabilities. 2.4.3. Watchdog Timer (WDT0) The watchdog timer includes a 16-bit timer with a programmable reset period. The registers are protected from inadvertent access by an independent lock and key interface. The Watchdog Timer has the following features: Programmable timeout interval. Runs from the low frequency oscillator. Lock-out feature to prevent any modification until a system reset. Rev. 1.1 27

C8051F85x/86x 2.5. Communications and other Digital Peripherals 2.5.1. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0) The UART uses two signals (TX and RX) and a predetermined fixed baud rate to provide asynchronous communications with other devices. The UART module provides the following features: Asynchronous transmissions and receptions. Baud rates up to SYSCLK / 2 (transmit) or SYSCLK / 8 (receive). 8- or 9-bit data. Automatic start and stop generation. 2.5.2. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) SPI is a 3- or 4-wire communication interface that includes a clock, input data, output data, and an optional select signal. The SPI module includes the following features: Supports 3- or 4-wire master or slave modes. Supports external clock frequencies up to SYSCLK / 2 in master mode and SYSCLK / 10 in slave mode. Support for all clock phase and polarity modes. 8-bit programmable clock rate. Support for multiple masters on the same data lines. 2.5.3. System Management Bus / I2C (SMBus0) The SMBus interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus compatible with both I2C and SMBus protocols. The two clock and data signals operate in open-drain mode with external pull-ups to support automatic bus arbitration. Reads and writes to the interface are byte-oriented with the SMBus interface autonomously controlling the serial transfer of the data. Data can be transferred at up to 1/8th of the system clock as a master or slave, which can be faster than allowed by the SMBus / I2C specification, depending on the clock source used. A method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate devices with different speed capabilities on the same bus. The SMBus interface may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple masters. The SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization, arbitration logic, and start/stop control and generation. The SMBus module includes the following features: Standard (up to 100 kbps) and Fast (400 kbps) transfer speeds. Support for master, slave, and multi-master modes. Hardware synchronization and arbitration for multi-master mode. Clock low extending (clock stretching) to interface with faster masters. Hardware support for 7-bit slave and general call address recognition. Firmware support for 10-bit slave address decoding. Ability to inhibit all slave states. Programmable data setup/hold times. 2.5.4. 16/32-bit CRC (CRC0) The CRC module is designed to provide hardware calculations for flash memory verification and communications protocols. The CRC module supports the standard CCITT-16 16-bit polynomial (0x1021), and includes the following features: Support for four CCITT-16 polynomial. 28 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Byte-level bit reversal. Automatic CRC of flash contents on one or more 256-byte blocks. Initial seed selection of 0x0000 or 0xFFFF. Rev. 1.1 29

C8051F85x/86x 2.6. Analog Peripherals 2.6.1. 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0) The ADC0 module on C8051F85x/86x devices is a Successive Approximation Register (SAR) Analog to Digital Converter (ADC). The key features of the ADC module are: Single-ended 12-bit and 10-bit modes. Supports an output update rate of 200 ksps samples per second in 12-bit mode or 800 ksps samples per second in 10-bit mode. Operation in low power modes at lower conversion speeds. Selectable asynchronous hardware conversion trigger. Output data window comparator allows automatic range checking. Support for Burst Mode, which produces one set of accumulated data per conversion-start trigger with programmable power-on settling and tracking time. Conversion complete and window compare interrupts supported. Flexible output data formatting. Includes an internal fast-settling reference with two levels (1.65 V and 2.4 V) and support for external reference and signal ground. 2.6.2. Low Current Comparators (CMP0, CMP1) The comparators take two analog input voltages and output the relationship between these voltages (less than or greater than) as a digital signal. The Low Power Comparator module includes the following features: Multiple sources for the positive and negative poles, including VDD, VREF, and I/O pins. Two outputs are available: a digital synchronous latched output and a digital asynchronous raw output. Programmable hysteresis and response time. Falling or rising edge interrupt options on the comparator output. Provide “kill” signal to PCA module. Comparator 0 can be used to reset the device. 30 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 2.7. Reset Sources Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. On entry to this reset state, the following occur: The core halts program execution. Module registers are initialized to their defined reset values unless the bits reset only with a power- on reset. External port pins are forced to a known state. Interrupts and timers are disabled. All registers are reset to the predefined values noted in the register descriptions unless the bits only reset with a power-on reset. The contents of RAM are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is preserved as long as power is not lost. The Port I/O latches are reset to 1 in open-drain mode. Weak pullups are enabled during and after the reset. For VDD Supply Monitor and power-on resets, the RST pin is driven low until the device exits the reset state. On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, and the system clock defaults to the internal low-power oscillator. The Watchdog Timer is enabled with the Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO0) as its clock source. Program execution begins at location 0x0000. 2.8. On-Chip Debugging The C8051F85x/86x devices include an on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) debug interface to allow flash programming and in-system debugging with the production part installed in the end application. The C2 interface uses a clock signal (C2CK) and a bi-directional C2 data signal (C2D) to transfer information between the device and a host system. See the C2 Interface Specification for details on the C2 protocol. Rev. 1.1 31

C8051F85x/86x 3. Pin Definitions 3.1. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QSOP24 Pin Definitions N/C 1 24 N/C P0.2 2 23 P0.3 P0.1 / AGND 3 22 P0.4 P0.0 / VREF 4 21 P0.5 GND 5 20 P0.6 24 pin QSOP VDD 6 19 P0.7 (Top View) RST / C2CK 7 18 P1.0 C2D / P2.0 8 17 P1.1 P1.7 9 16 P1.2 P1.6 10 15 P1.3 P1.5 11 14 P1.4 P2.1 12 13 N/C Figure 3.1. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU Pinout Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU s n o ti c n y u t F mbers ar Capabili nal Digital Functions u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo GND Ground 5 VDD Power 6 RST / Active-low Reset / 7 C2CK C2 Debug Clock 32 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU s n o ti c n y u t F bili al ns mbers ar Capa nal Digit Functio u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo P0.0 Standard I/O 4 Yes P0MAT.0 ADC0.0 INT0.0 CP0P.0 INT1.0 CP0N.0 VREF P0.1 Standard I/O 3 Yes P0MAT.1 ADC0.1 INT0.1 CP0P.1 INT1.1 CP0N.1 AGND P0.2 Standard I/O 2 Yes P0MAT.2 ADC0.2 INT0.2 CP0P.2 INT1.2 CP0N.2 P0.3 / Standard I/O / 23 Yes P0MAT.3 ADC0.3 EXTCLK External CMOS Clock Input EXTCLK CP0P.3 INT0.3 CP0N.3 INT1.3 P0.4 Standard I/O 22 Yes P0MAT.4 ADC0.4 INT0.4 CP0P.4 INT1.4 CP0N.4 P0.5 Standard I/O 21 Yes P0MAT.5 ADC0.5 INT0.5 CP0P.5 INT1.5 CP0N.5 P0.6 Standard I/O 20 Yes P0MAT.6 ADC0.6 CNVSTR CP0P.6 INT0.6 CP0N.6 INT1.6 P0.7 Standard I/O 19 Yes P0MAT.7 ADC0.7 INT0.7 CP0P.7 INT1.7 CP0N.7 Rev. 1.1 33

C8051F85x/86x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU s n o ti c n y u t F bili al ns mbers ar Capa nal Digit Functio u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo P1.0 Standard I/O 18 Yes P1MAT.0 ADC0.8 CP1P.0 CP1N.0 P1.1 Standard I/O 17 Yes P1MAT.1 ADC0.9 CP1P.1 CP1N.1 P1.2 Standard I/O 16 Yes P1MAT.2 ADC0.10 CP1P.2 CP1N.2 P1.3 Standard I/O 15 Yes P1MAT.3 ADC0.11 CP1P.3 CP1N.3 P1.4 Standard I/O 14 Yes P1MAT.4 ADC0.12 CP1P.4 CP1N.4 P1.5 Standard I/O 11 Yes P1MAT.5 ADC0.13 CP1P.5 CP1N.5 P1.6 Standard I/O 10 Yes P1MAT.6 ADC0.14 CP1P.6 CP1N.6 P1.7 Standard I/O 9 Yes P1MAT.7 ADC0.15 CP1P.7 CP1N.7 P2.0 / Standard I/O / 8 C2D C2 Debug Data P2.1 Standard I/O 12 34 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU s n o ti c n y u t F bili al ns mbers ar Capa nal Digit Functio u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo N/C No Connection 1 13 24 Rev. 1.1 35

C8051F85x/86x 3.2. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QFN20 Pin Definitions 2 3 4 5 0. 0. 0. 0. P P P P 1 0 9 8 7 16 P0.1 / AGND 2 1 1 1 P0.6 P0.0 / VREF 2 15 P0.7 GND 3 14 P1.0 20 pin QFN (Top View) VDD 4 13 P1.1 RST / C2CK 5 GND 12 GND C2D / P2.0 P1.2 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 5 4 3 1. 1. 1. 1. P P P P Figure 3.2. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM Pinout Table 3.2. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM s n o ti c n y u t F mbers ar Capabili nal Digital Functions u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo GND Ground Center 3 12 VDD Power 4 RST / Active-low Reset / 5 C2CK C2 Debug Clock 36 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 3.2. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM s n o ti c n y u t F bili al ns mbers ar Capa nal Digit Functio u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo P0.0 Standard I/O 2 Yes P0MAT.0 ADC0.0 INT0.0 CP0P.0 INT1.0 CP0N.0 VREF P0.1 Standard I/O 1 Yes P0MAT.1 ADC0.1 INT0.1 CP0P.1 INT1.1 CP0N.1 AGND P0.2 Standard I/O 20 Yes P0MAT.2 ADC0.2 INT0.2 CP0P.2 INT1.2 CP0N.2 P0.3 Standard I/O 19 Yes P0MAT.3 ADC0.3 EXTCLK CP0P.3 INT0.3 CP0N.3 INT1.3 P0.4 Standard I/O 18 Yes P0MAT.4 ADC0.4 INT0.4 CP0P.4 INT1.4 CP0N.4 P0.5 Standard I/O 17 Yes P0MAT.5 ADC0.5 INT0.5 CP0P.5 INT1.5 CP0N.5 P0.6 Standard I/O 16 Yes P0MAT.6 ADC0.6 CNVSTR CP0P.6 INT0.6 CP0N.6 INT1.6 P0.7 Standard I/O 15 Yes P0MAT.7 ADC0.7 INT0.7 CP0P.7 INT1.7 CP0N.7 Rev. 1.1 37

C8051F85x/86x Table 3.2. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM s n o ti c n y u t F bili al ns mbers ar Capa nal Digit Functio u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo P1.0 Standard I/O 14 Yes P1MAT.0 ADC0.8 CP1P.0 CP1N.0 P1.1 Standard I/O 13 Yes P1MAT.1 ADC0.9 CP1P.1 CP1N.1 P1.2 Standard I/O 11 Yes P1MAT.2 ADC0.10 CP1P.2 CP1N.2 P1.3 Standard I/O 10 Yes P1MAT.3 ADC0.11 CP1P.3 CP1N.3 P1.4 Standard I/O 9 Yes P1MAT.4 ADC0.12 CP1P.4 CP1N.4 P1.5 Standard I/O 8 Yes P1MAT.5 ADC0.13 CP1P.5 CP1N.5 P1.6 Standard I/O 7 Yes P1MAT.6 ADC0.14 CP1P.6 CP1N.6 P2.0 / Standard I/O / 6 C2D C2 Debug Data 38 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 3.3. C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5 SOIC16 Pin Definitions P0.2 1 16 P0.3 P0.1 / AGND 2 15 P0.4 P0.0 / VREF 3 14 P0.5 GND 4 13 P0.6 16 pin SOIC (Top View) VDD 5 12 P0.7 RST / C2CK 6 11 P1.0 C2D / P2.0 7 10 P1.1 P1.3 8 9 P1.2 Figure 3.3. C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS Pinout Table 3.3. Pin Definitions for C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS s n o ti c n y u t F mbers ar Capabili nal Digital Functions u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo GND Ground 4 VDD Power 5 RST / Active-low Reset / 6 C2CK C2 Debug Clock P0.0 Standard I/O 3 Yes P0MAT.0 ADC0.0 INT0.0 CP0P.0 INT1.0 CP0N.0 Rev. 1.1 39

C8051F85x/86x Table 3.3. Pin Definitions for C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS s n o ti c n y u t F bili al ns mbers ar Capa nal Digit Functio u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo P0.1 Standard I/O 2 Yes P0MAT.1 ADC0.1 INT0.1 CP0P.1 INT1.1 CP0N.1 P0.2 Standard I/O 1 Yes P0MAT.2 ADC0.2 INT0.2 CP0P.2 INT1.2 CP0N.2 P0.3 / Standard I/O / 16 Yes P0MAT.3 ADC0.3 EXTCLK External CMOS Clock Input EXTCLK CP0P.3 INT0.3 CP0N.3 INT1.3 P0.4 Standard I/O 15 Yes P0MAT.4 ADC0.4 INT0.4 CP0P.4 INT1.4 CP0N.4 P0.5 Standard I/O 14 Yes P0MAT.5 ADC0.5 INT0.5 CP0P.5 INT1.5 CP0N.5 P0.6 Standard I/O 13 Yes P0MAT.6 ADC0.6 CNVSTR CP1P.0 INT0.6 CP1N.0 INT1.6 P0.7 Standard I/O 12 Yes P0MAT.7 ADC0.7 INT0.7 CP1P.1 INT1.7 CP1N.1 P1.0 Standard I/O 11 Yes P1MAT.0 ADC0.8 CP1P.2 CP1N.2 40 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 3.3. Pin Definitions for C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS s n o ti c n y u t F bili al ns mbers ar Capa nal Digit Functio u b o g Pin Name Type Pin N Cross Additi Analo P1.1 Standard I/O 10 Yes P1MAT.1 ADC0.9 CP1P.3 CP1N.3 P1.2 Standard I/O 9 Yes P1MAT.2 ADC0.10 CP1P.4 CP1N.4 P1.3 Standard I/O 8 Yes P1MAT.3 ADC0.11 CP1P.5 CP1N.5 P2.0 / Standard I/O / 7 C2D C2 Debug Data Rev. 1.1 41

C8051F85x/86x 4. Ordering Information C8051 F 850 – C – G M Package Type M (QFN), U (QSOP), S (SSOP) Temperature Grade G (-40 to +85), I (-40 to +125) Revision Family and Features – 85x and 86x Memory Type – F (Flash) Silicon Labs 8051 Family Figure 4.1. C8051F85x/86x Part Numbering All C8051F85x/86x family members have the following features: CIP-51 Core running up to 25 MHz Two Internal Oscillators (24.5 MHz and 80 kHz) I2C/SMBus SPI UART 3-Channel Programmable Counter Array (PWM, Clock Generation, Capture/Compare) 4 16-bit Timers 2 Analog Comparators 16-bit CRC Unit In addition to these features, each part number in the C8051F85x/86x family has a set of features that vary across the product line. The product selection guide in Table 4.1 shows the features available on each family member. All devices in Table 4.1 are also available in an industrial version. For the industrial version, the -G in the ordering part number is replaced with -I. For example, the industrial version of the C8051F850-C-GM is the C8051F850-C-IM. 42 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 4.1. Product Selection Guide s t u s p Ordering Part Number Flash Memory (kB) RAM (Bytes) Digital Port I/Os (Total) Number of ADC0 Channel I/O with Comparator 0/1 In Pb-free (RoHS Compliant) AEC-Q100 Qualified Temperature Range Package C8051F850-C-GM 8 512 16 15 15   -40 to 85 °C QFN-20 C8051F850-C-GU 8 512 18 16 16   -40 to 85 °C QSOP-24 C8051F851-C-GM 4 512 16 15 15   -40 to 85 °C QFN-20 C8051F851-C-GU 4 512 18 16 16   -40 to 85 °C QSOP-24 C8051F852-C-GM 2 256 16 15 15   -40 to 85 °C QFN-20 C8051F852-C-GU 2 256 18 16 16   -40 to 85 °C QSOP-24 C8051F853-C-GM 8 512 16 — 15   -40 to 85 °C QFN-20 C8051F853-C-GU 8 512 18 — 16   -40 to 85 °C QSOP-24 C8051F854-C-GM 4 512 16 — 15   -40 to 85 °C QFN-20 C8051F854-C-GU 4 512 18 — 16   -40 to 85 °C QSOP-24 C8051F855-C-GM 2 256 16 — 15   -40 to 85 °C QFN-20 C8051F855-C-GU 2 256 18 — 16   -40 to 85 °C QSOP-24 C8051F860-C-GS 8 512 13 12 12   -40 to 85 °C SOIC-16 C8051F861-C-GS 4 512 13 12 12   -40 to 85 °C SOIC-16 C8051F862-C-GS 2 256 13 12 12   -40 to 85 °C SOIC-16 C8051F863-C-GS 8 512 13 — 12   -40 to 85 °C SOIC-16 C8051F864-C-GS 4 512 13 — 12   -40 to 85 °C SOIC-16 C8051F865-C-GS 2 256 13 — 12   -40 to 85 °C SOIC-16 Rev. 1.1 43

C8051F85x/86x Table 4.1. Product Selection Guide s t u s p Ordering Part Number Flash Memory (kB) RAM (Bytes) Digital Port I/Os (Total) Number of ADC0 Channel I/O with Comparator 0/1 In Pb-free (RoHS Compliant) AEC-Q100 Qualified Temperature Range Package -IM, -IU and -IS extended temperature range devices (-40 to 125 °C) are also available. 44 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 5. QSOP-24 Package Specifications Figure 5.1. QSOP-24 Package Drawing Table 5.1. QSOP-24 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Nom Max Dimension Min Nom Max A — — 1.75 e 0.635 BSC A1 0.10 — 0.25 L 0.40 — 1.27 b 0.20 — 0.30  0º — 8º c 0.10 — 0.25 aaa 0.20 D 8.65 BSC bbb 0.18 E 6.00 BSC ccc 0.10 E1 3.90 BSC ddd 0.10 Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. This drawing conforms to JEDEC outline MO-137, variation AE. 4. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. Rev. 1.1 45

C8051F85x/86x   Figure 5.2. QSOP-24 PCB Land Pattern Table 5.2. QSOP-24 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions Dimension Min Max C 5.20 5.30 E 0.635 BSC X 0.30 0.40 Y 1.50 1.60 Notes: General 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. This land pattern design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines. Solder Mask Design 3. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 µm minimum, all the way around the pad. Stencil Design 4. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 5. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 6. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all perimeter pads. Card Assembly 7. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 8. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 46 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 6. QFN-20 Package Specifications Figure 6.1. QFN-20 Package Drawing Table 6.1. QFN-20 Package Dimensions Symbol Millimeters Symbol Millimeters Min Nom Max Min Nom Max A 0.70 0.75 0.80 f 2.53 BSC A1 0.00 0.02 0.05 L 0.3 0.40 0.5 b 0.20 0.25 0.30 L1 0.00 — 0.10 c 0.25 0.30 0.35 aaa — — 0.05 D 3.00 BSC bbb — — 0.05 D2 1.6 1.70 1.8 ccc — — 0.08 e 0.50 BSC ddd — — 0.10 E 3.00 BSC eee — — 0.10 E2 1.6 1.70 1.8 Notes: 1. All dimensions are shown in millimeters unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. Rev. 1.1 47

C8051F85x/86x Figure 6.2. QFN-20 Landing Diagram 48 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 6.2. QFN-20 Landing Diagram Dimensions Symbol Millimeters Symbol Millimeters Min Max Min Max D 2.71 REF GE 2.10 — D2 1.60 1.80 W — 0.34 e 0.50 BSC X — 0.28 E 2.71 REF Y 0.61 REF E2 1.60 1.80 ZE — 3.31 f 2.53 BSC ZD — 3.31 GD 2.10 — Notes: General 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing is per the ANSI Y14.5M-1994 specification. 3. This Land Pattern Design is based on IPC-SM-782 guidelines. 4. All dimensions shown are at Maximum Material Condition (MMC). Least Material Condition (LMC) is calculated based on a Fabrication Allowance of 0.05 mm. Notes: Solder Mask Design 1. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 µm minimum, all the way around the pad. Notes: Stencil Design 1. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 2. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 3. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for the perimeter pads. 4. A 1.45 x 1.45 mm square aperture should be used for the center pad. This provides approximately 70% solder paste coverage on the pad, which is optimum to assure correct component stand-off.  Notes: Card Assembly 1. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 2. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. Rev. 1.1 49

C8051F85x/86x 7. SOIC-16 Package Specifications Figure 7.1. SOIC-16 Package Drawing Table 7.1. SOIC-16 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Nom Max Dimension Min Nom Max A — 1.75 L 0.40 1.27 A1 0.10 0.25 L2 0.25 BSC A2 1.25 — h 0.25 0.50 b 0.31 0.51  0º 8º c 0.17 0.25 aaa 0.10 D 9.90 BSC bbb 0.20 E 6.00 BSC ccc 0.10 E1 3.90 BSC ddd 0.25 e 1.27 BSC Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. This drawing conforms to the JEDEC Solid State Outline MS-012, Variation AC. 4. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 50 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Figure 7.2. SOIC-16 PCB Land Pattern Table 7.2. SOIC-16 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions Dimension Feature (mm) C1 Pad Column Spacing 5.40 E Pad Row Pitch 1.27 X1 Pad Width 0.60 Y1 Pad Length 1.55 Notes: General 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. This Land Pattern Design is based on IPC-7351 pattern SOIC127P600X165-16N for Density Level B (Median Land Protrusion). 3. All feature sizes shown are at Maximum Material Condition (MMC) and a card fabrication tolerance of 0.05 mm is assumed. Rev. 1.1 51

C8051F85x/86x 8. Memory Organization The memory organization of the CIP-51 System Controller is similar to that of a standard 8051. There are two separate memory spaces: program memory and data memory. Program and data memory share the same address space but are accessed via different instruction types. The memory organization of the C8051F85x/86x device family is shown in Figure 8.1. PROGRAM/DATA MEMORY DATA MEMORY (RAM) (FLASH) INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE 0x1FFF 0xFF Upper 128 RAM Special Function (Indirect Addressing Registers Only) (Direct Addressing Only) 0x80 0x7F (Direct and Indirect Addressing) Lower 128 RAM 0x30 (Direct and Indirect 0x2F Addressing) 32 Bit-Addressable Bytes 0x20 0x1F 32 General Purpose Registers 0x00 8 kB FLASH (In-System EXTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE Programmable in 512 Byte Sectors) 0xFFFF Same 256 bytes as 0x0000 to 0x00FF, wrapped on 256-byte boundaries 0x0100 0x00FF XRAM - 256 Bytes (accessable using MOVX instruction) 0x0000 0x0000 Figure 8.1. C8051F85x/86x Memory Map (8 kB flash version shown) 52 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 8.1. Program Memory The CIP-51 core has a 64 kB program memory space. The C8051F85x/86x family implements 8 kB, 4 kB or 2 kB of this program memory space as in-system, re-programmable flash memory. The last address in the flash block (0x1FFF on 8 kB devices, 0x0FFF on 4 kB devices and 0x07FF on 2 kB devices) serves as a security lock byte for the device, and provides read, write and erase protection. Addresses above the lock byte within the 64 kB address space are reserved. C8051F850/3 C8051F860/3 Lock Byte 0x1FFF 0x1FFE Lock Byte Page C8051F851/4 F 0x1E00 L C8051F861/4 A S 51H m Lock By te 0x0FFF 2-bem Lock Byte Page 0x0FFE C8051F852/5 yte pageory orga Flash Memory Space 0x0E00 C8L0o5c1kF B8y6 te2 /5 0x07FF sniz Lock Byte Page 0x07FE ed Flash Memory Space 0x0600 in Flash Memory Space 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 Figure 8.2. Flash Program Memory Map 8.1.1. MOVX Instruction and Program Memory The MOVX instruction in an 8051 device is typically used to access external data memory. On the C8051F85x/86x devices, the MOVX instruction is normally used to read and write on-chip XRAM, but can be re-configured to write and erase on-chip flash memory space. MOVC instructions are always used to read flash memory, while MOVX write instructions are used to erase and write flash. This flash access feature provides a mechanism for the C8051F85x/86x to update program code and use the program memory space for non-volatile data storage. Refer to Section “10. Flash Memory” on page 61 for further details. 8.2. Data Memory The C8051F85x/86x device family includes up to 512 bytes of RAM data memory. 256 bytes of this memory is mapped into the internal RAM space of the 8051. On devices with 512 bytes total RAM, 256 additional bytes of memory are available as on-chip “external” memory. The data memory map is shown in Figure 8.1 for reference. 8.2.1. Internal RAM There are 256 bytes of internal RAM mapped into the data memory space from 0x00 through 0xFF. The lower 128 bytes of data memory are used for general purpose registers and scratch pad memory. Either direct or indirect addressing may be used to access the lower 128 bytes of data memory. Locations 0x00 through 0x1F are addressable as four banks of general purpose registers, each bank consisting of eight byte-wide registers. The next 16 bytes, locations 0x20 through 0x2F, may either be addressed as bytes or as 128 bit locations accessible with the direct addressing mode. Rev. 1.1 53

C8051F85x/86x The upper 128 bytes of data memory are accessible only by indirect addressing. This region occupies the same address space as the Special Function Registers (SFR) but is physically separate from the SFR space. The addressing mode used by an instruction when accessing locations above 0x7F determines whether the CPU accesses the upper 128 bytes of data memory space or the SFRs. Instructions that use direct addressing will access the SFR space. Instructions using indirect addressing above 0x7F access the upper 128 bytes of data memory. Figure 8.1 illustrates the data memory organization of the C8051F85x/ 86x. Revision C C8051F852/5 and C8051F862/5 devices implement the upper four bytes of internal RAM as a 32-bit Unique Identifier. More information can be found in “Device Identification and Unique Identifier” on page 68. 8.2.1.1. General Purpose Registers The lower 32 bytes of data memory, locations 0x00 through 0x1F, may be addressed as four banks of general-purpose registers. Each bank consists of eight byte-wide registers designated R0 through R7. Only one of these banks may be enabled at a time. Two bits in the program status word (PSW) register, RS0 and RS1, select the active register bank. This allows fast context switching when entering subroutines and interrupt service routines. Indirect addressing modes use registers R0 and R1 as index registers. 8.2.1.2. Bit Addressable Locations In addition to direct access to data memory organized as bytes, the sixteen data memory locations at 0x20 through 0x2F are also accessible as 128 individually addressable bits. Each bit has a bit address from 0x00 to 0x7F. Bit 0 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x00 while bit7 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x07. Bit 7 of the byte at 0x2F has bit address 0x7F. A bit access is distinguished from a full byte access by the type of instruction used (bit source or destination operands as opposed to a byte source or destination). The MCS-51™ assembly language allows an alternate notation for bit addressing of the form XX.B where XX is the byte address and B is the bit position within the byte. For example, the instruction: MOV C, 22.3h moves the Boolean value at 0x13 (bit 3 of the byte at location 0x22) into the Carry flag. 8.2.1.3. Stack A programmer's stack can be located anywhere in the 256-byte data memory. The stack area is designated using the Stack Pointer (SP) SFR. The SP will point to the last location used. The next value pushed on the stack is placed at SP+1 and then SP is incremented. A reset initializes the stack pointer to location 0x07. Therefore, the first value pushed on the stack is placed at location 0x08, which is also the first register (R0) of register bank 1. Thus, if more than one register bank is to be used, the SP should be initialized to a location in the data memory not being used for data storage. The stack depth can extend up to 256 bytes. 8.2.2. External RAM On devices with 512 bytes total RAM, there are 256 bytes of on-chip RAM mapped into the external data memory space. All of these address locations may be accessed using the external move instruction (MOVX) and the data pointer (DPTR), or using MOVX indirect addressing mode. Note: The 16-bit MOVX instruction is also used for writes to the flash memory. See Section “10. Flash Memory” on page 61 for details. The MOVX instruction accesses XRAM by default. For a 16-bit MOVX operation (@DPTR), the upper 8 bits of the 16-bit external data memory address word are "don't cares". As a result, addresses 0x0000 through 0x00FF are mapped modulo style over the entire 64 k external data memory address range. For example, the XRAM byte at address 0x0000 is shadowed at addresses 0x0100, 0x0200, 0x0300, 0x0400, etc. Revision C C8051F850/1/3/4 and C8051F860/1/3/4 devices implement the upper four bytes of external RAM as a 32-bit Unique Identifier. More information can be found in “Device Identification and Unique Identifier” on page 68. 54 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 8.2.3. Special Function Registers The direct-access data memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF constitute the special function registers (SFRs). The SFRs provide control and data exchange with the CIP-51's resources and peripherals. The CIP-51 duplicates the SFRs found in a typical 8051 implementation as well as implementing additional SFRs used to configure and access the sub-systems unique to the MCU. This allows the addition of new functionality while retaining compatibility with the MCS-51™ instruction set. The SFR registers are accessed anytime the direct addressing mode is used to access memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF. SFRs with addresses ending in 0x0 or 0x8 (e.g. P0, TCON, SCON0, IE, etc.) are bit- addressable as well as byte-addressable. All other SFRs are byte-addressable only. Unoccupied addresses in the SFR space are reserved for future use. Accessing these areas will have an indeterminate effect and should be avoided. Rev. 1.1 55

C8051F85x/86x 9. Special Function Register Memory Map This section details the special function register memory map for the C8051F85x/86x devices. Table 9.1. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map F8 SPI0CN PCA0L PCA0H PCA0CPL0 PCA0CPH0 P0MAT P0MASK VDM0CN F0 B P0MDIN P1MDIN EIP1 - - PRTDRV PCA0PWM E8 ADC0CN0 PCA0CPL1 PCA0CPH1 PCA0CPL2 PCA0CPH2 P1MAT P1MASK RSTSRC E0 ACC XBR0 XBR1 XBR2 IT01CF - EIE1 - D8 PCA0CN PCA0MD PCA0CPM0 PCA0CPM1 PCA0CPM2 CRC0IN CRC0DAT ADC0PWR D0 PSW REF0CN CRC0AUTO CRC0CNT P0SKIP P1SKIP SMB0ADM SMB0ADR C8 TMR2CN REG0CN TMR2RLL TMR2RLH TMR2L TMR2H CRC0CN CRC0FLIP C0 SMB0CN SMB0CF SMB0DAT ADC0GTL ADC0GTH ADC0LTL ADC0LTH OSCICL B8 IP ADC0TK - ADC0MX ADC0CF ADC0L ADC0H CPT1CN B0 - OSCLCN ADC0CN1 ADC0AC - DEVICEID REVID FLKEY A8 IE CLKSEL CPT1MX CPT1MD SMB0TC DERIVID - - A0 P2 SPI0CFG SPI0CKR SPI0DAT P0MDOUT P1MDOUT P2MDOUT - 98 SCON0 SBUF0 - CPT0CN PCA0CLR CPT0MD PCA0CENT CPT0MX 90 P1 TMR3CN TMR3RLL TMR3RLH TMR3L TMR3H PCA0POL WDTCN 88 TCON TMOD TL0 TL1 TH0 TH1 CKCON PSCTL 80 P0 SP DPL DPH - - - PCON 0(8) 1(9) 2(A) 3(B) 4(C) 5(D) 6(E) 7(F) (bit addressable) Table 9.2. Special Function Registers Register Address Register Description Page ACC 0xE0 Accumulator 122 ADC0AC 0xB3 ADC0 Accumulator Configuration 102 ADC0CF 0xBC ADC0 Configuration 101 ADC0CN0 0xE8 ADC0 Control 0 99 ADC0CN1 0xB2 ADC0 Control 1 100 ADC0GTH 0xC4 ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte 107 ADC0GTL 0xC3 ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte 108 ADC0H 0xBE ADC0 Data Word High Byte 105 56 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) Register Address Register Description Page ADC0L 0xBD ADC0 Data Word Low Byte 106 ADC0LTH 0xC6 ADC0 Less-Than High Byte 109 ADC0LTL 0xC5 ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte 110 ADC0MX 0xBB ADC0 Multiplexer Selection 111 ADC0PWR 0xDF ADC0 Power Control 103 ADC0TK 0xB9 ADC0 Burst Mode Track Time 104 B 0xF0 B Register 123 CKCON 0x8E Clock Control 269 CLKSEL 0xA9 Clock Selection 129 CPT0CN 0x9B Comparator 0 Control 134 CPT0MD 0x9D Comparator 0 Mode 135 CPT0MX 0x9F Comparator 0 Multiplexer Selection 136 CPT1CN 0xBF Comparator 1 Control 137 CPT1MD 0xAB Comparator 1 Mode 138 CPT1MX 0xAA Comparator 1 Multiplexer Selection 139 CRC0AUTO 0xD2 CRC0 Automatic Control 146 CRC0CN 0xCE CRC0 Control 143 CRC0CNT 0xD3 CRC0 Automatic Flash Sector Count 147 CRC0DAT 0xDE CRC0 Data Output 145 CRC0FLIP 0xCF CRC0 Bit Flip 148 CRC0IN 0xDD CRC0 Data Input 144 DERIVID 0xAD Derivative Identification 70 DEVICEID 0xB5 Device Identification 69 DPH 0x83 Data Pointer Low 120 DPL 0x82 Data Pointer High 119 EIE1 0xE6 Extended Interrupt Enable 1 78 EIP1 0xF3 Extended Interrupt Priority 1 80 FLKEY 0xB7 Flash Lock and Key 67 Rev. 1.1 57

C8051F85x/86x Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) Register Address Register Description Page IE 0xA8 Interrupt Enable 75 IP 0xB8 Interrupt Priority 77 IT01CF 0xE4 INT0 / INT1 Configuration 150 OSCICL 0xC7 High Frequency Oscillator Calibration 127 OSCLCN 0xB1 Low Frequency Oscillator Control 128 P0 0x80 Port 0 Pin Latch 199 P0MASK 0xFE Port 0 Mask 197 P0MAT 0xFD Port 0 Match 198 P0MDIN 0xF1 Port 0 Input Mode 200 P0MDOUT 0xA4 Port 0 Output Mode 201 P0SKIP 0xD4 Port 0 Skip 202 P1 0x90 Port 1 Pin Latch 205 P1MASK 0xEE Port 1 Mask 203 P1MAT 0xED Port 1 Match 204 P1MDIN 0xF2 Port 1 Input Mode 206 P1MDOUT 0xA5 Port 1 Output Mode 207 P1SKIP 0xD5 Port 1 Skip 208 P2 0xA0 Port 2 Pin Latch 209 P2MDOUT 0xA6 Port 2 Output Mode 210 PCA0CENT 0x9E PCA Center Alignment Enable 177 PCA0CLR 0x9C PCA Comparator Clear Control 170 PCA0CN 0xD8 PCA Control 167 PCA0CPH0 0xFC PCA Capture Module High Byte 0 175 PCA0CPH1 0xEA PCA Capture Module High Byte 1 181 PCA0CPH2 0xEC PCA Capture Module High Byte 2 183 PCA0CPL0 0xFB PCA Capture Module Low Byte 0 174 PCA0CPL1 0xE9 PCA Capture Module Low Byte 1 180 PCA0CPL2 0xEB PCA Capture Module Low Byte 2 182 58 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) Register Address Register Description Page PCA0CPM0 0xDA PCA Capture/Compare Mode 0 171 PCA0CPM1 0xDB PCA Capture/Compare Mode 1 178 PCA0CPM2 0xDC PCA Capture/Compare Mode 1 179 PCA0H 0xFA PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte 173 PCA0L 0xF9 PCA Counter/Timer High Byte 172 PCA0MD 0xD9 PCA Mode 168 PCA0POL 0x96 PCA Output Polarity 176 PCA0PWM 0xF7 PCA PWM Configuration 169 PCON 0x87 Power Control 83 PRTDRV 0xF6 Port Drive Strength 196 PSCTL 0x8F Program Store Control 66 PSW 0xD0 Program Status Word 124 REF0CN 0xD1 Voltage Reference Control 112 REG0CN 0xC9 Voltage Regulator Control 84 REVID 0xB6 Revision Identification 71 RSTSRC 0xEF Reset Source 215 SBUF0 0x99 UART0 Serial Port Data Buffer 297 SCON0 0x98 UART0 Serial Port Control 295 SMB0ADM 0xD6 SMBus0 Slave Address Mask 257 SMB0ADR 0xD7 SMBus0 Slave Address 256 SMB0CF 0xC1 SMBus0 Configuration 251 SMB0CN 0xC0 SMBus0 Control 254 SMB0DAT 0xC2 SMBus0 Data 258 SMB0TC 0xAC SMBus0 Timing and Pin Control 253 SP 0x81 Stack Pointer 121 SPI0CFG 0xA1 SPI0 Configuration 227 SPI0CKR 0xA2 SPI0 Clock Control 231 SPI0CN 0xF8 SPI0 Control 229 Rev. 1.1 59

C8051F85x/86x Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) Register Address Register Description Page SPI0DAT 0xA3 SPI0 Data 232 TCON 0x88 Timer 0/1 Control 271 TH0 0x8C Timer 0 High Byte 275 TH1 0x8D Timer 1 High Byte 276 TL0 0x8A Timer 0 Low Byte 273 TL1 0x8B Timer 1 Low Byte 274 TMOD 0x89 Timer 0/1 Mode 272 TMR2CN 0xC8 Timer 2 Control 277 TMR2H 0xCD Timer 2 High Byte 282 TMR2L 0xCC Timer 2 Low Byte 281 TMR2RLH 0xCB Timer 2 Reload High Byte 280 TMR2RLL 0xCA Timer 2 Reload Low Byte 279 TMR3CN 0x91 Timer 3 Control 283 TMR3H 0x95 Timer 3 High Byte 288 TMR3L 0x94 Timer 3 Low Byte 287 TMR3RLH 0x93 Timer 3 Reload High Byte 286 TMR3RLL 0x92 Timer 3 Reload Low Byte 285 VDM0CN 0xFF Supply Monitor Control 216 WDTCN 0x97 Watchdog Timer Control 301 XBR0 0xE1 Port I/O Crossbar 0 193 XBR1 0xE2 Port I/O Crossbar 1 194 XBR2 0xE3 Port I/O Crossbar 2 195 60 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 10. Flash Memory On-chip, re-programmable flash memory is included for program code and non-volatile data storage. The flash memory is organized in 512-byte pages. It can be erased and written through the C2 interface or from firmware by overloading the MOVX instruction. Any individual byte in flash memory must only be written once between page erase operations. 10.1. Security Options The CIP-51 provides security options to protect the flash memory from inadvertent modification by software as well as to prevent the viewing of proprietary program code and constants. The Program Store Write Enable (bit PSWE in register PSCTL) and the Program Store Erase Enable (bit PSEE in register PSCTL) bits protect the flash memory from accidental modification by software. PSWE must be explicitly set to ‘1’ before software can modify the flash memory; both PSWE and PSEE must be set to ‘1’ before software can erase flash memory. Additional security features prevent proprietary program code and data constants from being read or altered across the C2 interface. A Security Lock Byte located in flash user space offers protection of the flash program memory from access (reads, writes, or erases) by unprotected code or the C2 interface. See Section “8. Memory Organization” on page 52 for the location of the security byte. The flash security mechanism allows the user to lock n 512-byte flash pages, starting at page 0 (addresses 0x0000 to 0x01FF), where n is the 1’s complement number represented by the Security Lock Byte. Note that the page containing the flash Security Lock Byte is unlocked when no other flash pages are locked (all bits of the Lock Byte are ‘1’) and locked when any other flash pages are locked (any bit of the Lock Byte is ‘0’). An example is shown in Figure 10.1. Security Lock Byte: 11111101b 1s Complement: 00000010b Flash pages locked: 3 (First two flash pages + Lock Byte Page) Figure 10.1. Security Byte Decoding The level of flash security depends on the flash access method. The three flash access methods that can be restricted are reads, writes, and erases from the C2 debug interface, user firmware executing on unlocked pages, and user firmware executing on locked pages. Table 10.1 summarizes the flash security features of the C8051F85x/86x devices. Table 10.1. Flash Security Summary Action C2 Debug User Firmware executing from: Interface an unlocked page a locked page Read, Write or Erase unlocked pages Permitted Permitted Permitted (except page with Lock Byte) Read, Write or Erase locked pages Not Permitted Flash Error Reset Permitted (except page with Lock Byte) Read or Write page containing Lock Byte Permitted Permitted N/A (if no pages are locked) Read or Write page containing Lock Byte Not Permitted Flash Error Reset Permitted (if any page is locked) Rev. 1.1 61

C8051F85x/86x Table 10.1. Flash Security Summary (Continued) Read contents of Lock Byte Permitted Permitted N/A (if no pages are locked) Read contents of Lock Byte Not Permitted Flash Error Reset Permitted (if any page is locked) Erase page containing Lock Byte Permitted Permitted N/A (if no pages are locked) Erase page containing Lock Byte—Unlock all C2 Device Erase Flash Error Reset Flash Error Reset pages (if any page is locked) Only Lock additional pages Not Permitted Flash Error Reset Flash Error Reset (change 1s to 0s in the Lock Byte) Unlock individual pages Not Permitted Flash Error Reset Flash Error Reset (change 0s to 1s in the Lock Byte) Read, Write or Erase Reserved Area Not Permitted Flash Error Reset Flash Error Reset  C2 Device Erase—Erases all flash pages including the page containing the Lock Byte. Flash Error Reset —Not permitted; Causes Flash Error Device Reset (FERROR bit in RSTSRC is '1' after reset). - All prohibited operations that are performed via the C2 interface are ignored (do not cause device reset). - Locking any flash page also locks the page containing the Lock Byte. - Once written to, the Lock Byte cannot be modified except by performing a C2 Device Erase. - If user code writes to the Lock Byte, the Lock does not take effect until the next device reset. 62 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 10.2. Programming the Flash Memory Writes to flash memory clear bits from logic 1 to logic 0, and can be performed on single byte locations. Flash erasures set bits back to logic 1, and occur only on full pages. The write and erase operations are automatically timed by hardware for proper execution; data polling to determine the end of the write/erase operation is not required. Code execution is stalled during a flash write/erase operation. The simplest means of programming the flash memory is through the C2 interface using programming tools provided by Silicon Labs or a third party vendor. This is the only means for programming a non- initialized device. To ensure the integrity of flash contents, it is strongly recommended that the on-chip supply monitor be enabled in any system that includes code that writes and/or erases flash memory from software. 10.2.1. Flash Lock and Key Functions Flash writes and erases by user software are protected with a lock and key function. The Flash Lock and Key Register (FLKEY) must be written with the correct key codes, in sequence, before flash operations may be performed. The key codes are: 0xA5, 0xF1. The timing does not matter, but the codes must be written in order. If the key codes are written out of order, or the wrong codes are written, flash writes and erases will be disabled until the next system reset. Flash writes and erases will also be disabled if a flash write or erase is attempted before the key codes have been written properly. The flash lock resets after each write or erase; the key codes must be written again before a following flash operation can be performed. 10.2.2. Flash Erase Procedure The flash memory can be programmed by software using the MOVX write instruction with the address and data byte to be programmed provided as normal operands. Before writing to flash memory using MOVX, flash write operations must be enabled by: (1) setting the PSWE Program Store Write Enable bit in the PSCTL register to logic 1 (this directs the MOVX writes to target flash memory); and (2) Writing the flash key codes in sequence to the Flash Lock register (FLKEY). The PSWE bit remains set until cleared by software. A write to flash memory can clear bits to logic 0 but cannot set them; only an erase operation can set bits to logic 1 in flash. A byte location to be programmed should be erased before a new value is written. Erase operation applies to an entire page (setting all bytes in the page to 0xFF). To erase an entire page, perform the following steps: 1. Disable interrupts (recommended). 2. Set the PSEE bit (register PSCTL). 3. Set the PSWE bit (register PSCTL). 4. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5. 5. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1. 6. Using the MOVX instruction, write a data byte to any location within the page to be erased. 7. Clear the PSWE and PSEE bits. 10.2.3. Flash Write Procedure Flash bytes are programmed by software with the following sequence: 1. Disable interrupts (recommended). 2. Erase the flash page containing the target location, as described in Section 10.2.2. 3. Set the PSWE bit (register PSCTL). 4. Clear the PSEE bit (register PSCTL). 5. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5. 6. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1. 7. Using the MOVX instruction, write a single data byte to the desired location within the desired Rev. 1.1 63

C8051F85x/86x page. 8. Clear the PSWE bit. Steps 5–7 must be repeated for each byte to be written. After flash writes are complete, PSWE should be cleared so that MOVX instructions do not target program memory. 10.3. Non-Volatile Data Storage The flash memory can be used for non-volatile data storage as well as program code. This allows data such as calibration coefficients to be calculated and stored at run time. Data is written using the MOVX write instruction and read using the MOVC instruction. Note: MOVX read instructions always target XRAM. 10.4. Flash Write and Erase Guidelines Any system which contains routines which write or erase flash memory from software involves some risk that the write or erase routines will execute unintentionally if the CPU is operating outside its specified operating range of supply voltage, system clock frequency or temperature. This accidental execution of flash modifying code can result in alteration of flash memory contents causing a system failure that is only recoverable by re-flashing the code in the device. To help prevent the accidental modification of flash by firmware, hardware restricts flash writes and erasures when the supply monitor is not active and selected as a reset source. As the monitor is enabled and selected as a reset source by default, it is recommended that systems writing or erasing flash simply maintain the default state. The following guidelines are recommended for any system which contains routines which write or erase flash from code. 10.4.1. Voltage Supply Maintenance and the Supply Monitor 1. If the system power supply is subject to voltage or current "spikes," add sufficient transient protection devices to the power supply to ensure that the supply voltages listed in the Absolute Maximum Ratings table are not exceeded. 2. Make certain that the minimum supply rise time specification is met. If the system cannot meet this rise time specification, then add an external supply brownout circuit to the RST pin of the device that holds the device in reset until the voltage supply reaches the lower limit, and re-asserts RST if the supply drops below the low supply limit. 3. Do not disable the supply monitor. If the supply monitor must be disabled in the system, firmware should be added to the startup routine to enable the on-chip supply monitor and enable the supply monitor as a reset source as early in code as possible. This should be the first set of instructions executed after the reset vector. For C-based systems, this may involve modifying the startup code added by the C compiler. See your compiler documentation for more details. Make certain that there are no delays in software between enabling the supply monitor and enabling the supply monitor as a reset source. Code examples showing this can be found in “AN201: Writing to Flash From Firmware", available from the Silicon Laboratories web site. Note that the supply monitor must be enabled and enabled as a reset source when writing or erasing flash memory. A flash error reset will occur if either condition is not met. 4. As an added precaution if the supply monitor is ever disabled, explicitly enable the supply monitor and enable the supply monitor as a reset source inside the functions that write and erase flash memory. The supply monitor enable instructions should be placed just after the instruction to set PSWE to a 1, but before the flash write or erase operation instruction. 5. Make certain that all writes to the RSTSRC (Reset Sources) register use direct assignment operators and explicitly DO NOT use the bit-wise operators (such as AND or OR). For example, "RSTSRC = 0x02" is correct. "RSTSRC |= 0x02" is incorrect. 6. Make certain that all writes to the RSTSRC register explicitly set the PORSF bit to a '1'. Areas to check are initialization code which enables other reset sources, such as the Missing Clock 64 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Detector or Comparator, for example, and instructions which force a Software Reset. A global search on "RSTSRC" can quickly verify this. 10.4.2. PSWE Maintenance 7. Reduce the number of places in code where the PSWE bit (in register PSCTL) is set to a 1. There should be exactly one routine in code that sets PSWE to a '1' to write flash bytes and one routine in code that sets PSWE and PSEE both to a '1' to erase flash pages. 8. Minimize the number of variable accesses while PSWE is set to a 1. Handle pointer address updates and loop variable maintenance outside the "PSWE = 1;... PSWE = 0;" area. Code examples showing this can be found in “AN201: Writing to Flash From Firmware", available from the Silicon Laboratories web site. 9. Disable interrupts prior to setting PSWE to a '1' and leave them disabled until after PSWE has been reset to 0. Any interrupts posted during the flash write or erase operation will be serviced in priority order after the flash operation has been completed and interrupts have been re-enabled by software. 10. Make certain that the flash write and erase pointer variables are not located in XRAM. See your compiler documentation for instructions regarding how to explicitly locate variables in different memory areas. 11. Add address bounds checking to the routines that write or erase flash memory to ensure that a routine called with an illegal address does not result in modification of the flash. 10.4.3. System Clock 12. If operating from an external crystal-based source, be advised that crystal performance is susceptible to electrical interference and is sensitive to layout and to changes in temperature. If the system is operating in an electrically noisy environment, use the internal oscillator or use an external CMOS clock. 13. If operating from the external oscillator, switch to the internal oscillator during flash write or erase operations. The external oscillator can continue to run, and the CPU can switch back to the external oscillator after the flash operation has completed. Additional flash recommendations and example code can be found in “AN201: Writing to Flash From Firmware", available from the Silicon Laboratories website. Rev. 1.1 65

C8051F85x/86x 10.5. Flash Control Registers Register 10.1. PSCTL: Program Store Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved PSEE PSWE Type R RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x8F Table 10.2. PSCTL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:2 Reserved Must write reset value. 1 PSEE Program Store Erase Enable. Setting this bit (in combination with PSWE) allows an entire page of flash program mem- ory to be erased. If this bit is logic 1 and flash writes are enabled (PSWE is logic 1), a write to flash memory using the MOVX instruction will erase the entire page that contains the location addressed by the MOVX instruction. The value of the data byte written does not matter. 0: Flash program memory erasure disabled. 1: Flash program memory erasure enabled. 0 PSWE Program Store Write Enable. Setting this bit allows writing a byte of data to the flash program memory using the MOVX write instruction. The flash location should be erased before writing data. 0: Writes to flash program memory disabled. 1: Writes to flash program memory enabled; the MOVX write instruction targets flash memory. 66 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 10.2. FLKEY: Flash Lock and Key Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FLKEY Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xB7 Table 10.3. FLKEY Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 FLKEY Flash Lock and Key Register. Write: This register provides a lock and key function for flash erasures and writes. Flash writes and erases are enabled by writing 0xA5 followed by 0xF1 to the FLKEY register. Flash writes and erases are automatically disabled after the next write or erase is complete. If any writes to FLKEY are performed incorrectly, or if a flash write or erase operation is attempted while these operations are disabled, the flash will be permanently locked from writes or erasures until the next device reset. If an application never writes to flash, it can intentionally lock the flash by writing a non-0xA5 value to FLKEY from software. Read: When read, bits 1-0 indicate the current flash lock state. 00: Flash is write/erase locked. 01: The first key code has been written (0xA5). 10: Flash is unlocked (writes/erases allowed). 11: Flash writes/erases are disabled until the next reset. Rev. 1.1 67

C8051F85x/86x 11. Device Identification and Unique Identifier The C8051F85x/86x has SFRs that identify the device family, derivative, and revision. These SFRs can be read by firmware at runtime to determine the capabilities of the MCU that is executing code. This allows the same firmware image to run on MCUs with different memory sizes and peripherals, and dynamically change functionality to suit the capabilities of that MCU. In addition to the device identification registers, a 32-bit unique identifier (UID) is pre-programmed into all Revision C and later devices. The UID resides in the last four bytes of XRAM (C8051F850/1/3/4 and C8051F860/1/3/4) or RAM (C8051F852/5 and C8051F862/5). For devices with the UID in RAM, the UID can be read by firmware using indirect data accesses. For devices with the UID in XRAM, the UID can be read by firmware using MOVX instructions. The UID can also be read through the debug port for all devices. Firmware can overwrite the UID during normal operation, and the bytes in memory will be automatically reinitialized with the UID value after any device reset. Firmware using this area of memory should always initialize the memory to a known value, as any previous data stored at these locations will be overwritten and not retained through a reset. Table 11.1. UID Implementation Information Device Memory Segment Addresses C8051F850 C8051F851 C8051F853 C8051F854 XRAM (MSB) 0x00FF, 0x00FE, 0x00FD, 0x00FC (LSB) C8051F860 C8051F861 C8051F863 C8051F864 C8051F852 C8051F855 RAM (indirect) (MSB) 0xFF, 0xFE, 0xFD, 0xFC (LSB) C8051F862 C8051F865 68 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 11.1. Device Identification Registers Register 11.1. DEVICEID: Device Identification Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DEVICEID Type R Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xB5 Table 11.2. DEVICEID Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 DEVICEID Device ID. This read-only register returns the 8-bit device ID: 0x30 (C8051F85x/86x). Rev. 1.1 69

C8051F85x/86x Register 11.2. DERIVID: Derivative Identification Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DERIVID Type R Reset X X X X X X X X SFR Address: 0xAD Table 11.3. DERIVID Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 DERIVID Derivative ID. This read-only register returns the 8-bit derivative ID, which can be used by firmware to identify which device in the product family the code is executing on. The ‘{R}’ tag in the part numbers below indicates the device revision letter in the ordering code. 0xD0: C8051F850-{R}-GU 0xD1: C8051F851-{R}-GU 0xD2: C8051F852-{R}-GU 0xD3: C8051F853-{R}-GU 0xD4: C8051F854-{R}-GU 0xD5: C8051F855-{R}-GU 0xE0: C8051F860-{R}-GS 0xE1: C8051F861-{R}-GS 0xE2: C8051F862-{R}-GS 0xE3: C8051F863-{R}-GS 0xE4: C8051F864-{R}-GS 0xE5: C8051F865-{R}-GS 0xF0: C8051F850-{R}-GM 0xF1: C8051F851-{R}-GM 0xF2: C8051F852-{R}-GM 0xF3: C8051F853-{R}-GM 0xF4: C8051F854-{R}-GM 0xF5: C8051F855-{R}-GM 70 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 11.3. REVID: Revision Identifcation Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name REVID Type R Reset X X X X X X X X SFR Address: 0xB6 Table 11.4. REVID Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 REVID Revision ID. This read-only register returns the 8-bit revision ID. 00000000: Revision A 00000001: Revision B 00000010: Revision C 00000011-11111111: Reserved. Rev. 1.1 71

C8051F85x/86x 12. Interrupts The C8051F85x/86x includes an extended interrupt system supporting multiple interrupt sources with two priority levels. The allocation of interrupt sources between on-chip peripherals and external input pins varies according to the specific version of the device. Each interrupt source has one or more associated interrupt-pending flag(s) located in an SFR. When a peripheral or external source meets a valid interrupt condition, the associated interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the source, an interrupt request is generated when the interrupt-pending flag is set. As soon as execution of the current instruction is complete, the CPU generates an LCALL to a predetermined address to begin execution of an interrupt service routine (ISR). Each ISR must end with an RETI instruction, which returns program execution to the next instruction that would have been executed if the interrupt request had not occurred. If interrupts are not enabled, the interrupt-pending flag is ignored by the hardware and program execution continues as normal. The interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1 regardless of the interrupt's enable/disable state. Each interrupt source can be individually enabled or disabled through the use of an associated interrupt enable bit in an SFR (IE and EIE1). However, interrupts must first be globally enabled by setting the EA bit in the IE register to logic 1 before the individual interrupt enables are recognized. Setting the EA bit to logic 0 disables all interrupt sources regardless of the individual interrupt-enable settings. Some interrupt-pending flags are automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR. However, most are not cleared by the hardware and must be cleared by software before returning from the ISR. If an interrupt-pending flag remains set after the CPU completes the return-from-interrupt (RETI) instruction, a new interrupt request will be generated immediately and the CPU will re-enter the ISR after the completion of the next instruction. 12.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors The C8051F85x/86x MCUs support interrupt sources for each peripheral on the device. Software can simulate an interrupt by setting any interrupt-pending flag to logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the flag, an interrupt request will be generated and the CPU will vector to the ISR address associated with the interrupt-pending flag. MCU interrupt sources, associated vector addresses, priority order and control bits are summarized in Table 12.1. Refer to the datasheet section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s). 12.1.1. Interrupt Priorities Each interrupt source can be individually programmed to one of two priority levels: low or high. A low priority interrupt service routine can be preempted by a high priority interrupt. A high priority interrupt cannot be preempted. Each interrupt has an associated interrupt priority bit in an SFR (IP or EIP1) used to configure its priority level. Low priority is the default. If two interrupts are recognized simultaneously, the interrupt with the higher priority is serviced first. If both interrupts have the same priority level, a fixed priority order is used to arbitrate, given in Table 12.1. 12.1.2. Interrupt Latency Interrupt response time depends on the state of the CPU when the interrupt occurs. Pending interrupts are sampled and priority decoded each system clock cycle. Therefore, the fastest possible response time is 5 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt and 4 clock cycles to complete the LCALL to the ISR. If an interrupt is pending when a RETI is executed, a single instruction is executed before an LCALL is made to service the pending interrupt. Therefore, the maximum response time for an interrupt (when no other interrupt is currently being serviced or the new interrupt is of greater priority) occurs when the CPU is performing an RETI instruction followed by a DIV as the next instruction. In this case, the response time is 18 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt, 5 clock cycles to execute the RETI, 8 clock 72 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x cycles to complete the DIV instruction and 4 clock cycles to execute the LCALL to the ISR. If the CPU is executing an ISR for an interrupt with equal or higher priority, the new interrupt will not be serviced until the current ISR completes, including the RETI and following instruction. If more than one interrupt is pending when the CPU exits an ISR, the CPU will service the next highest priority interrupt that is pending. Rev. 1.1 73

C8051F85x/86x Table 12.1. Interrupt Summary Interrupt Source Interrupt Priority Pending Flags e? ? Enable Flag Vector Order bl W a H ss y e b dr d d re a a t e Bi Cl Reset 0x0000 Top None N/A N/A Always Enabled External Interrupt 0 (INT0) 0x0003 0 IE0 (TCON.1) Y Y EX0 (IE.0) Timer 0 Overflow 0x000B 1 TF0 (TCON.5) Y Y ET0 (IE.1) External Interrupt 1 (INT1) 0x0013 2 IE1 (TCON.3) Y Y EX1 (IE.2) Timer 1 Overflow 0x001B 3 TF1 (TCON.7) Y Y ET1 (IE.3) UART0 0x0023 4 RI (SCON0.0) Y N ES0 (IE.4) TI (SCON0.1) Timer 2 Overflow 0x002B 5 TF2H (TMR2CN.7) Y N ET2 (IE.5) TF2L (TMR2CN.6) SPI0 0x0033 6 SPIF (SPI0CN.7) Y N ESPI0 (IE.6) WCOL (SPI0CN.6) MODF (SPI0CN.5) RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4) SMB0 0x003B 7 SI (SMB0CN.0) Y N ESMB0 (EIE1.0) Port Match 0x0043 8 None N/A N/A EMAT (EIE1.1) ADC0 Window Compare 0x004B 9 ADWINT (ADC0CN.3) Y N EWADC0 (EIE1.2) ADC0 Conversion Complete 0x0053 10 ADINT (ADC0CN.5) Y N EADC0 (EIE1.3) Programmable Counter 0x005B 11 CF (PCA0CN.7) Y N EPCA0 (EIE1.4) Array CCFn (PCA0CN.n) COVF (PCA0PWM.6) Comparator0 0x0063 12 CPFIF (CPT0CN.4) N N ECP0 (EIE1.5) CPRIF (CPT0CN.5) Comparator1 0x006B 13 CPFIF (CPT1CN.4) N N ECP1 (EIE1.6) CPRIF (CPT1CN.5) Timer 3 Overflow 0x0073 14 TF3H (TMR3CN.7) N N ET3 (EIE1.7) TF3L (TMR3CN.6) 74 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 12.2. Interrupt Control Registers Register 12.1. IE: Interrupt Enable Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name EA ESPI0 ET2 ES0 ET1 EX1 ET0 EX0 Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xA8 (bit-addressable) Table 12.2. IE Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 EA Enable All Interrupts. Globally enables/disables all interrupts and overrides individual interrupt mask settings. 0: Disable all interrupt sources. 1: Enable each interrupt according to its individual mask setting. 6 ESPI0 Enable SPI0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the SPI0 interrupts. 0: Disable all SPI0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by SPI0. 5 ET2 Enable Timer 2 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 2 interrupt. 0: Disable Timer 2 interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF2L or TF2H flags. 4 ES0 Enable UART0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the UART0 interrupt. 0: Disable UART0 interrupt. 1: Enable UART0 interrupt. 3 ET1 Enable Timer 1 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 1 interrupt. 0: Disable all Timer 1 interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF1 flag. 2 EX1 Enable External Interrupt 1. This bit sets the masking of External Interrupt 1. 0: Disable external interrupt 1. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the INT1 input. 1 ET0 Enable Timer 0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 0 interrupt. 0: Disable all Timer 0 interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF0 flag. Rev. 1.1 75

C8051F85x/86x Table 12.2. IE Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 EX0 Enable External Interrupt 0. This bit sets the masking of External Interrupt 0. 0: Disable external interrupt 0. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the INT0 input. 76 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 12.2. IP: Interrupt Priority Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved PSPI0 PT2 PS0 PT1 PX1 PT0 PX0 Type R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xB8 (bit-addressable) Table 12.3. IP Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 Reserved Must write reset value. 6 PSPI0 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the SPI0 interrupt. 0: SPI0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: SPI0 interrupt set to high priority level. 5 PT2 Timer 2 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 2 interrupt. 0: Timer 2 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 2 interrupt set to high priority level. 4 PS0 UART0 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the UART0 interrupt. 0: UART0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: UART0 interrupt set to high priority level. 3 PT1 Timer 1 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 1 interrupt. 0: Timer 1 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 1 interrupt set to high priority level. 2 PX1 External Interrupt 1 Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 1 interrupt. 0: External Interrupt 1 set to low priority level. 1: External Interrupt 1 set to high priority level. 1 PT0 Timer 0 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 0 interrupt. 0: Timer 0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 0 interrupt set to high priority level. 0 PX0 External Interrupt 0 Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 0 interrupt. 0: External Interrupt 0 set to low priority level. 1: External Interrupt 0 set to high priority level. Rev. 1.1 77

C8051F85x/86x Register 12.3. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ET3 ECP1 ECP0 EPCA0 EADC0 EWADC0 EMAT ESMB0 Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xE6 Table 12.4. EIE1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 ET3 Enable Timer 3 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 3 interrupt. 0: Disable Timer 3 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF3L or TF3H flags. 6 ECP1 Enable Comparator1 (CP1) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the CP1 interrupt. 0: Disable CP1 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the comparator 1 CPRIF or CPFIF flags. 5 ECP0 Enable Comparator0 (CP0) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the CP0 interrupt. 0: Disable CP0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the comparator 0 CPRIF or CPFIF flags. 4 EPCA0 Enable Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the PCA0 interrupts. 0: Disable all PCA0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by PCA0. 3 EADC0 Enable ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt. 0: Disable ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the ADINT flag. 2 EWADC0 Enable Window Comparison ADC0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt. 0: Disable ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by ADC0 Window Compare flag (ADWINT). 1 EMAT Enable Port Match Interrupts. This bit sets the masking of the Port Match Event interrupt. 0: Disable all Port Match interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by a Port Match. 78 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 12.4. EIE1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 ESMB0 Enable SMBus (SMB0) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the SMB0 interrupt. 0: Disable all SMB0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by SMB0. Rev. 1.1 79

C8051F85x/86x Register 12.4. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PT3 PCP1 PCP0 PPCA0 PADC0 PWADC0 PMAT PSMB0 Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xF3 Table 12.5. EIP1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 PT3 Timer 3 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 3 interrupt. 0: Timer 3 interrupts set to low priority level. 1: Timer 3 interrupts set to high priority level. 6 PCP1 Comparator1 (CP1) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the CP1 interrupt. 0: CP1 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: CP1 interrupt set to high priority level. 5 PCP0 Comparator0 (CP0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the CP0 interrupt. 0: CP0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: CP0 interrupt set to high priority level. 4 PPCA0 Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the PCA0 interrupt. 0: PCA0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: PCA0 interrupt set to high priority level. 3 PADC0 ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt. 0: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to low priority level. 1: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to high priority level. 2 PWADC0 ADC0 Window Comparator Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Window interrupt. 0: ADC0 Window interrupt set to low priority level. 1: ADC0 Window interrupt set to high priority level. 1 PMAT Port Match Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Port Match Event interrupt. 0: Port Match interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Port Match interrupt set to high priority level. 80 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 12.5. EIP1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 PSMB0 SMBus (SMB0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the SMB0 interrupt. 0: SMB0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: SMB0 interrupt set to high priority level. Rev. 1.1 81

C8051F85x/86x 13. Power Management and Internal Regulator All internal circuitry on the C8051F85x/86x devices draws power from the VDD supply pin. Circuits with external connections (I/O pins, analog muxes) are powered directly from the VDD supply voltage, while most of the internal circuitry is supplied by an on-chip LDO regulator. The regulator output is fully internal to the device, and is available also as an ADC input or reference source for the comparators and ADC. The devices support the standard 8051 power modes: idle and stop. For further power savings in stop mode, the internal LDO regulator may be disabled, shutting down the majority of the power nets on the device. Although the C8051F85x/86x has idle and stop modes available, more control over the device power can be achieved by enabling/disabling individual peripherals as needed. Each analog peripheral can be disabled when not in use and placed in low power mode. Digital peripherals, such as timers and serial buses, have their clocks gated off and draw little power when they are not in use. 13.1. Power Modes Idle mode halts the CPU while leaving the peripherals and clocks active. In stop mode, the CPU is halted, all interrupts and timers are inactive, and the internal oscillator is stopped (analog peripherals remain in their selected states; the external oscillator is not affected). Since clocks are running in Idle mode, power consumption is dependent upon the system clock frequency and the number of peripherals left in active mode before entering Idle. Stop mode consumes the least power because the majority of the device is shut down with no clocks active. The Power Control Register (PCON) is used to control the C8051F85x/ 86x's Stop and Idle power management modes. 13.1.1. Idle Mode Setting the Idle Mode Select bit (PCON.0) causes the hardware to halt the CPU and enter idle mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal registers and memory maintain their original data. All analog and digital peripherals can remain active during idle mode. Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt is asserted or a reset occurs. The assertion of an enabled interrupt will cause the Idle Mode Selection bit (PCON.0) to be cleared and the CPU to resume operation. The pending interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return from interrupt (RETI) will be the instruction immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit. If idle mode is terminated by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000. Note: If the instruction following the write of the IDLE bit is a single-byte instruction and an interrupt occurs during the execution phase of the instruction that sets the IDLE bit, the CPU may not wake from Idle mode when a future interrupt occurs. Therefore, instructions that set the IDLE bit should be followed by an instruction that has two or more opcode bytes, for example: // in ‘C’: PCON |= 0x01; // set IDLE bit PCON = PCON; // ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction ; in assembly: ORL PCON, #01h ; set IDLE bit MOV PCON, PCON ; ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction If enabled, the Watchdog Timer (WDT) will eventually cause an internal watchdog reset and thereby terminate the idle mode. This feature protects the system from an unintended permanent shutdown in the event of an inadvertent write to the PCON register. If this behavior is not desired, the WDT may be disabled by software prior to entering the Idle mode if the WDT was initially configured to allow this operation. This provides the opportunity for additional power savings, allowing the system to remain in the Idle mode indefinitely, waiting for an external stimulus to wake up the system. 82 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 13.1.2. Stop Mode Setting the Stop Mode Select bit (PCON.1) causes the controller core to enter stop mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. Before entering stop mode, the system clock must be sourced by the internal high-frequency oscillator. In stop mode the internal oscillator, CPU, and all digital peripherals are stopped; the state of the external oscillator circuit is not affected. Each analog peripheral (including the external oscillator circuit) may be shut down individually prior to entering stop mode. Stop mode can only be terminated by an internal or external reset. On reset, the device performs the normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000. If enabled, the Missing Clock Detector will cause an internal reset and thereby terminate the stop mode. The Missing Clock Detector should be disabled if the CPU is to be put to in STOP mode for longer than the MCD timeout. 13.2. LDO Regulator C8051F85x/86x devices include an internal regulator that regulates the internal core and logic supply. Under default conditions, the internal regulator will remain on when the device enters STOP mode. This allows any enabled reset source to generate a reset for the device and bring the device out of STOP mode. For additional power savings, the STOPCF bit can be used to shut down the regulator and the internal power network of the device when the part enters STOP mode. When STOPCF is set to 1, the RST pin and a full power cycle of the device are the only methods of generating a reset. 13.3. Power Control Registers Register 13.1. PCON: Power Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name GF STOP IDLE Type RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x87 Table 13.1. PCON Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:2 GF General Purpose Flags 5-0. These are general purpose flags for use under software control. 1 STOP Stop Mode Select. Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Stop mode. This bit will always be read as 0. 0 IDLE Idle Mode Select. Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Idle mode. This bit will always be read as 0. Rev. 1.1 83

C8051F85x/86x 13.4. LDO Control Registers Register 13.2. REG0CN: Voltage Regulator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved STOPCF Reserved Type R RW R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xC9 Table 13.2. REG0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:4 Reserved Must write reset value. 3 STOPCF Stop Mode Configuration. This bit configures the regulator's behavior when the device enters stop mode. 0: Regulator is still active in stop mode. Any enabled reset source will reset the device. 1: Regulator is shut down in stop mode. Only the RST pin or power cycle can reset the device. 2:0 Reserved Must write reset value. 84 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 14. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0) The ADC is a successive-approximation-register (SAR) ADC with 12-, 10-, and 8-bit modes, integrated track-and-hold and a programmable window detector. These different modes allow the user to trade off speed for resolution. ADC0 also has an autonomous low-power burst mode which can automatically enable ADC0, capture and accumulate samples, then place ADC0 in a low power shutdown mode without CPU intervention. It also has a 16-bit accumulator that can automatically oversample and average the ADC results. The ADC is fully configurable under software control via several registers. The ADC0 operates in single- ended mode and may be configured to measure different signals using the analog multiplexer. The voltage reference for the ADC is selectable between internal and external reference sources. ADC0 Input Selection Less Greater Control / Than Than Configuration P0 Pins (8) ADWINT Window Compare (Window Interrupt) P1 Pins (8) 0.5x – 1x SAR Analog to Accumulator ADC0 gain Digital Converter VDD GND ADINT (Interrupt Flag) Internal LDO Temp Sensor ADBUSY (On Demand) Timer 0 Overflow 1.65 V / Timer 2 Overflow 2.4 V Reference Timer 3 Overflow CNVSTR (External Pin) Internal LDO VDD Trigger VREF Reference Selection Selection Device Ground AGND Clock SAR clock SYSCLK Divider Figure 14.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram Rev. 1.1 85

C8051F85x/86x 14.1. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer ADC0 on C8051F85x/86x has an analog multiplexer capable of selecting any pin on ports P0 and P1 (up to 16 total), the on-chip temperature sensor, the internal regulated supply, the VDD supply, or GND. ADC0 input channels are selected using the ADC0MX register. Table 14.1. ADC0 Input Multiplexer Channels ADC0MX setting Signal Name QSOP24 Pin Name QFN20 Pin Name SOIC16 Pin Name 00000 ADC0.0 P0.0 P0.0 P0.0 00001 ADC0.1 P0.1 P0.1 P0.1 00010 ADC0.2 P0.2 P0.2 P0.2 00011 ADC0.3 P0.3 P0.3 P0.3 00100 ADC0.4 P0.4 P0.4 P0.4 00101 ADC0.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 00110 ADC0.6 P0.6 P0.6 P0.6 00111 ADC0.7 P0.7 P0.7 P0.7 01000 ADC0.8 P1.0 P1.0 P1.0 01001 ADC0.9 P1.1 P1.1 P1.1 01010 ADC0.10 P1.2 P1.2 P1.2 01011 ADC0.11 P1.3 P1.3 P1.3 01100 ADC0.12 P1.4 P1.4 Reserved 01101 ADC0.13 P1.5 P1.5 Reserved 01110 ADC0.14 P1.6 P1.6 Reserved 01111 ADC0.15 P1.7 Reserved Reserved 10000 Temp Sensor Internal Temperature Sensor 10001 LDO Internal 1.8 V LDO Output 10010 VDD VDD Supply Pin 10011 GND GND Supply Pin 10100-11111 None No connection 86 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Important note about ADC0 input configuration: Port pins selected as ADC0 inputs should be configured as analog inputs, and should be skipped by the crossbar. To configure a Port pin for analog input, set to 0 the corresponding bit in register PnMDIN and disable the digital driver (PnMDOUT = 0 and Port Latch = 1). To force the crossbar to skip a Port pin, set to 1 the corresponding bit in register PnSKIP. Rev. 1.1 87

C8051F85x/86x 14.2. ADC Operation The ADC is clocked by an adjustable conversion clock (SARCLK). SARCLK is a divided version of the selected system clock when burst mode is disabled (ADBMEN = 0), or a divided version of the high- frequency oscillator when burst mode is enabled (ADBMEN = 1). The clock divide value is determined by the ADSC bits in the ADC0CF register. In most applications, SARCLK should be adjusted to operate as fast as possible, without exceeding the maximum electrical specifications. The SARCLK does not directly determine sampling times or sampling rates. 14.2.1. Starting a Conversion A conversion can be initiated in many ways, depending on the programmed states of the ADC0 Start of Conversion Mode field (ADCM) in register ADC0CN0. Conversions may be initiated by one of the following: 1. Writing a 1 to the ADBUSY bit of register ADC0CN0 (software-triggered) 2. A timer overflow (see the ADC0CN0 register and the timer section for timer options) 3. A rising edge on the CNVSTR input signal (external pin-triggered) Writing a 1 to ADBUSY provides software control of ADC0 whereby conversions are performed "on- demand". All other trigger sources occur autonomous to code execution. When the conversion is complete, the ADC posts the result to its output register and sets the ADC interrupt flag (ADINT). ADINT may be used to trigger a system interrupts, if enabled, or polled by firmware. During conversion, the ADBUSY bit is set to logic 1 and reset to logic 0 when the conversion is complete. However, when polling for ADC conversion completions, the ADC0 interrupt flag (ADINT) should be used instead of the ADBUSY bit. Converted data is available in the ADC0 data registers, ADC0H:ADC0L, when the conversion is complete. Important Note About Using CNVSTR: When the CNVSTR input is used as the ADC0 conversion source, the associated port pin should be skipped in the crossbar settings. 14.2.2. Tracking Modes Each ADC0 conversion must be preceded by a minimum tracking time in order for the converted result to be accurate. The minimum tracking time is given in the electrical specifications tables. The ADTM bit in register ADC0CN0 controls the ADC0 track-and-hold mode. In its default state when Burst Mode is disabled, the ADC0 input is continuously tracked, except when a conversion is in progress. A conversion will begin immediately when the start-of-conversion trigger occurs. When the ADTM bit is logic 1, each conversion is preceded by a tracking period of 4 SAR clocks (after the start-of-conversion signal) for any internal (non-CNVSTR) conversion trigger source. When the CNVSTR signal is used to initiate conversions with ADTM set to 1, ADC0 tracks only when CNVSTR is low; conversion begins on the rising edge of CNVSTR (see Figure 14.2). Setting ADTM to 1 is primarily useful when AMUX settings are frequently changed and conversions are started using the ADBUSY bit. 88 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x A. ADC0 Timing for External Trigger Source CNVSTR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14 SAR Clocks Low Power Low Power ADTM=1 Track Convert or Convert Mode ADTM=0 Track or Convert Convert Track B. ADC0 Timing for Internal Trigger Source Write '1' to ADBUSY, Timer Overflow 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415161718 SAR Clocks Low Power ADTM=1 Track Convert Low Power Mode or Convert 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314 SAR Clocks Track or ADTM=0 Convert Track Convert Figure 14.2. 10-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing (ADBMEN = 0) 14.2.3. Burst Mode Burst Mode is a power saving feature that allows ADC0 to remain in a low power state between conversions. When Burst Mode is enabled, ADC0 wakes from a low power state, accumulates 1, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 samples using the internal low-power high-frequency oscillator, then re-enters a low power state. Since the Burst Mode clock is independent of the system clock, ADC0 can perform multiple conversions then enter a low power state within a single system clock cycle, even if the system clock is slow (e.g. 80 kHz). Burst Mode is enabled by setting ADBMEN to logic 1. When in Burst Mode, ADEN controls the ADC0 idle power state (i.e. the state ADC0 enters when not tracking or performing conversions). If ADEN is set to logic 0, ADC0 is powered down after each burst. If ADEN is set to logic 1, ADC0 remains enabled after each burst. On each convert start signal, ADC0 is awakened from its Idle Power State. If ADC0 is powered down, it will automatically power up and wait the programmable Power-Up Time controlled by the ADPWR bits. Otherwise, ADC0 will start tracking and converting immediately. Figure 14.3 shows an example of Burst Mode Operation with a slow system clock and a repeat count of 4. When Burst Mode is enabled, a single convert start will initiate a number of conversions equal to the repeat count. When Burst Mode is disabled, a convert start is required to initiate each conversion. In both modes, the ADC0 End of Conversion Interrupt Flag (ADINT) will be set after “repeat count” conversions have been accumulated. Similarly, the Window Comparator will not compare the result to the greater-than and less- than registers until “repeat count” conversions have been accumulated. Rev. 1.1 89

C8051F85x/86x In Burst Mode, tracking is determined by the settings in ADPWR and ADTK. Settling time requirements may need adjustment in some applications. Refer to “14.2.4. Settling Time Requirements” on page 90 for more details. Notes: Setting ADTM to 1 will insert an additional 4 SAR clocks of tracking before each conversion, regardless of the settings of ADPWR and ADTK. When using Burst Mode, care must be taken to issue a convert start signal no faster than once every four SYSCLK periods. This includes external convert start signals. The ADC will ignore convert start signals which arrive before a burst is finished. System Clock Convert Start ADTM = 1 Powered Power-Up T T T T Powered Power-Up C T C T C T C T C.. ADEN = 0 Down and Track 4 4 4 4 Down and Track ADTM = 0 Powered Power-Up Powered Power-Up C T C T C T C T C.. ADEN = 0 Down and Track Down and Track ADPWR ADTK T = Tracking set by ADTK T4 = Tracking set by ADTM (4 SAR clocks) C = Converting Figure 14.3. Burst Mode Tracking Example with Repeat Count Set to 4 14.2.4. Settling Time Requirements A minimum amount of tracking time is required before each conversion can be performed, to allow the sampling capacitor voltage to settle. This tracking time is determined by the AMUX0 resistance, the ADC0 sampling capacitance, any external source resistance, and the accuracy required for the conversion. Note that when ADTM is set to 1, four SAR clocks are used for tracking at the start of every conversion. Large external source impedance will increase the required tracking time. Figure 14.4 shows the equivalent ADC0 input circuit. The required ADC0 settling time for a given settling accuracy (SA) may be approximated by Equation 14.1. When measuring any internal source, R TOTAL reduces to R . See the electrical specification tables for ADC0 minimum settling time requirements as MUX well as the mux impedance and sampling capacitor values. n 2  t = ln -------  R C SA TOTAL SAMPLE Equation 14.1. ADC0 Settling Time Requirements Where: SA is the settling accuracy, given as a fraction of an LSB (for example, 0.25 to settle within 1/4 LSB) t is the required settling time in seconds R is the sum of the AMUX0 resistance and any external source resistance. TOTAL 90 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x n is the ADC resolution in bits (8/10/12). MUX Select P0.x R MUX C SAMPLE RC = R * C Input MUX SAMPLE Note: The value of CSAMPLE depends on the PGA Gain. See electrical specifications for details. Figure 14.4. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits 14.2.5. Gain Setting The ADC has gain settings of 1x and 0.5x. In 1x mode, the full scale reading of the ADC is determined directly by VREF. In 0.5x mode, the full-scale reading of the ADC occurs when the input voltage is VREF x 2. The 0.5x gain setting can be useful to obtain a higher input voltage range when using a small VREF voltage, or to measure input voltages that are between VREF and VDD. Gain settings for the ADC are controlled by the ADGN bit in register ADC0CF. Note that even with a gain setting of 0.5, voltages above the supply rail cannot be measured directly by the ADC. 14.3. 8-Bit Mode Setting the ADC08BE bit in register ADC0CF to 1 will put the ADC in 8-bit mode. In 8-bit mode, only the 8 MSBs of data are converted, allowing the conversion to be completed in fewer SAR clock cycles than a 10-bit conversion. The two LSBs of a conversion are always 00 in this mode, and the ADC0L register will always read back 0x00. 14.4. 12-Bit Mode When configured for 12-bit conversions, the ADC performs four 10-bit conversions using four different reference voltages and combines the results into a single 12-bit value. Unlike simple averaging techniques, this method provides true 12-bit resolution of AC or DC input signals without depending on noise to provide dithering. The converter also employs a hardware dynamic element matching algorithm that reconfigures the largest elements of the internal DAC for each of the four 10-bit conversions. This reconfiguration cancels any matching errors and enables the converter to achieve 12-bit linearity performance to go along with its 12-bit resolution. The 12-bit mode is enabled by setting the AD12BE bit in register ADC0AC to logic 1 and configuring the ADC in burst mode (ADBMEN = 1) for four or more conversions. The conversion can be initiated using any of the conversion start sources, and the 12-bit result will appear in the ADC0H and ADC0L registers. Since the 12-bit result is formed from a combination of four 10-bit results, the maximum output value is 4 x (1023) = 4092, rather than the max value of (2^12 – 1) = 4095 that is produced by a traditional 12-bit converter. To further increase resolution, the burst mode repeat value may be configured to any multiple of four conversions. For example, if a repeat value of 16 is selected, the ADC0 output will be a 14-bit number (sum of four 12-bit numbers) with 13 effective bits of resolution. The AD12SM bit in register ADC0TK controls when the ADC will track and sample the input signal. When AD12SM is set to 1, the selected input signal will be tracked before the first conversion of a set and held internally during all four conversions. When AD12SM is cleared to 0, the ADC will track and sample the selected input before each of the four conversions in a set. When maximum throughput (180-200 ksps) is Rev. 1.1 91

C8051F85x/86x needed, it is recommended that AD12SM be set to 1 and ADTK to 0x3F, and that the ADC be placed in always-on mode (ADEN = 1). For sample rates under 180 ksps, or when accumulating multiple samples, AD12SM should normally be cleared to 0, and ADTK should be configured to provide the appropriate settling time for the subsequent conversions. 14.5. Power Considerations The ADC has several power-saving features which can help the user optimize power consumption according to the needs of the application. The most efficient way to use the ADC for slower sample rates is by using burst mode. Burst mode dynamically controls power to the ADC and (if used) the internal voltage reference. By completely powering off these circuits when the ADC is not tracking or converting, the average supply current required for lower sampling rates is reduced significantly. The ADC also provides low power options that allow reduction in operating current when operating at low SAR clock frequencies or with longer tracking times. The internal common-mode buffer can be configured for low power mode by setting the ADLPM bit in ADC0PWR to 1. Two other fields in the ADC0PWR register (ADBIAS and ADMXLP) may be used together to adjust the power consumed by the ADC and its multiplexer and reference buffers, respectively. In general, these options are used together, when operating with a SAR conversion clock frequency of 4 MHz. Table 14.2. ADC0 Optimal Power Configuration (8- and 10-bit Mode) Required Reference Source Mode Configuration SAR Clock Speed Other Register Field Throughput Settings Always-On ADC0PWR = 0x40 12.25 MHz 325-800 ksps Any (ADEN = 1 ADC0TK = N/A (ADSC = 1) ADBMEN = 0) ADRPT = 0 Burst Mode ADC0PWR = 0x44 12.25 MHz 0-325 ksps External (ADEN = 0 ADC0TK = 0x3A (ADSC = 1) ADBMEN = 1) ADRPT = 0 Burst Mode ADC0PWR = 0x44 12.25 MHz 250-325 ksps Internal (ADEN = 0 ADC0TK = 0x3A (ADSC = 1) ADBMEN = 1) ADRPT = 0 Always-On ADC0PWR = 0xF0 4.08 MHz 200-250 ksps Internal (ADEN = 1 ADC0TK = N/A (ADSC = 5) ADBMEN = 0) ADRPT = 0 Burst Mode ADC0PWR = 0xF4 4.08 MHz 0-200 ksps Internal (ADEN = 0 ADC0TK = 0x34 (ADSC = 5) ADBMEN = 1) ADRPT = 0 Notes: 1. For always-on configuration, ADSC settings assume SYSCLK is the internal 24.5 MHz high-frequency oscillator. Adjust ADSC as needed if using a different source for SYSCLK. 2. ADRPT reflects the minimum setting for this bit field. When using the ADC in Burst Mode, up to 64 samples may be auto-accumulated per conversion start by adjusting ADRPT. 92 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 14.3. ADC0 Optimal Power Configuration (12-bit Mode) Required Reference Source Mode Configuration SAR Clock Speed Other Register Field Throughput Settings Always-On + ADC0PWR = 0x40 Burst Mode 12.25 MHz 180-200 ksps Any ADC0TK = 0xBF (ADEN = 1 (ADSC = 1) ADRPT = 1 ADBMEN = 1) Always-On + ADC0PWR = 0x40 Burst Mode 12.25 MHz 125-180 ksps Any ADC0TK = 0x3A (ADEN = 1 (ADSC = 1) ADRPT = 1 ADBMEN = 1) Burst Mode ADC0PWR = 0x44 12.25 MHz 0-125 ksps External (ADEN = 0 ADC0TK = 0x3A (ADSC = 1) ADBMEN = 1) ADRPT = 1 Burst Mode ADC0PWR = 0x44 12.25 MHz 50-125 ksps Internal (ADEN = 0 ADC0TK = 0x3A (ADSC = 1) ADBMEN = 1) ADRPT = 1 Burst Mode ADC0PWR = 0xF4 4.08 MHz 0-50 ksps Internal (ADEN = 0 ADC0TK = 0x34 (ADSC = 5) ADBMEN = 1) ADRPT = 1 Note: ADRPT reflects the minimum setting for this bit field. When using the ADC in Burst Mode, up to 64 samples may be auto-accumulated per conversion trigger by adjusting ADRPT. For applications where burst mode is used to automatically accumulate multiple results, additional supply current savings can be realized. The length of time the ADC is active during each burst contains power-up time at the beginning of the burst as well as the conversion time required for each conversion in the burst. The power-on time is only required at the beginning of each burst. When compared with single-sample bursts to collect the same number of conversions, multi-sample bursts will consume significantly less power. For example, performing an eight-cycle burst of 10-bt conversions consumes about 61% of the power required to perform those same eight samples in single-cycle bursts. For 12-bit conversions, an eight-cycle burst results in about 85% of the equivalent single-cycle bursts. Figure 14.5 shows this relationship for the different burst cycle lengths. See the Electrical Characteristics chapter for details on power consumption and the maximum clock frequencies allowed in each mode. Rev. 1.1 93

C8051F85x/86x 10(cid:882)Bit(cid:3)Burst(cid:3)Mode(cid:3)Power 12(cid:882)Bit(cid:3)Burst(cid:3)Mode(cid:3)Power 100% 100% e e ycl 95% ycl 98% C C gle(cid:882) 90% gle(cid:882) 96% n n oSi(cid:3) 85% oSi(cid:3) 94% edt(cid:3) 80% edt(cid:3) 92% ar ar mp 75% mp 90% o o C 70% C 88% nt(cid:3) nt(cid:3) urre 65% urre 86% eC(cid:3) 60% eC(cid:3) 84% g g a a er 55% er 82% v v A A 50% 80% 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 1 2 4 8 16 Number(cid:3)of(cid:3)Cycles(cid:3)Accumulated(cid:3)in(cid:3)Burst Number(cid:3)of(cid:3)Cycles(cid:3)Accumulated(cid:3)in(cid:3)Burst Figure 14.5. Burst Mode Accumulation Power Savings 14.6. Output Code Formatting The registers ADC0H and ADC0L contain the high and low bytes of the output conversion code from the ADC at the completion of each conversion. Data can be right-justified or left-justified, depending on the setting of the ADSJST field. When the repeat count is set to 1 in 10-bit mode, conversion codes are represented as 10-bit unsigned integers. Inputs are measured from 0 to VREF x 1023/1024. Example codes are shown below for both right-justified and left-justified data. Unused bits in the ADC0H and ADC0L registers are set to 0. Input Voltage Right-Justified Left-Justified ADC0H:ADC0L (ADSJST = 000) ADC0H:ADC0L (ADSJST = 100) VREF x 1023/1024 0x03FF 0xFFC0 VREF x 512/1024 0x0200 0x8000 VREF x 256/1024 0x0100 0x4000 0 0x0000 0x0000 When the repeat count is greater than 1, the output conversion code represents the accumulated result of the conversions performed and is updated after the last conversion in the series is finished. Sets of 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 consecutive samples can be accumulated and represented in unsigned integer format. The repeat count can be selected using the ADRPT bits in the ADC0AC register. When a repeat count is higher than 1, the ADC output must be right-justified (ADSJST = 0xx); unused bits in the ADC0H and ADC0L registers are set to 0. The example below shows the right-justified result for various input voltages and repeat counts. Notice that accumulating 2n samples is equivalent to left-shifting by n bit positions when all samples returned from the ADC have the same value. Input Voltage Repeat Count = 4 Repeat Count = 16 Repeat Count = 64 V x 1023/1024 0x0FFC 0x3FF0 0xFFC0 REF V x 512/1024 0x0800 0x2000 0x8000 REF V x 511/1024 0x07FC 0x1FF0 0x7FC0 REF 0 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 94 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x The ADSJST bits can be used to format the contents of the 16-bit accumulator. The accumulated result can be shifted right by 1, 2, or 3 bit positions. Based on the principles of oversampling and averaging, the effective ADC resolution increases by 1 bit each time the oversampling rate is increased by a factor of 4. The example below shows how to increase the effective ADC resolution by 1, 2, and 3 bits to obtain an effective ADC resolution of 11-bit, 12-bit, or 13-bit respectively without CPU intervention. Input Voltage Repeat Count = 4 Repeat Count = 16 Repeat Count = 64 Shift Right = 1 Shift Right = 2 Shift Right = 3 11-Bit Result 12-Bit Result 13-Bit Result V x 1023/1024 0x07F7 0x0FFC 0x1FF8 REF V x 512/1024 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 REF V x 511/1024 0x03FE 0x04FC 0x0FF8 REF 0 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 14.7. Programmable Window Detector The ADC Programmable Window Detector continuously compares the ADC0 output registers to user- programmed limits, and notifies the system when a desired condition is detected. This is especially effective in an interrupt-driven system, saving code space and CPU bandwidth while delivering faster system response times. The window detector interrupt flag (ADWINT in register ADC0CN0) can also be used in polled mode. The ADC0 Greater-Than (ADC0GTH, ADC0GTL) and Less-Than (ADC0LTH, ADC0LTL) registers hold the comparison values. The window detector flag can be programmed to indicate when measured data is inside or outside of the user-programmed limits, depending on the contents of the ADC0 Less-Than and ADC0 Greater-Than registers. 14.7.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode Figure 14.6 shows two example window comparisons for right-justified data, with ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL = 0x0080 (128d) and ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL = 0x0040 (64d). The input voltage can range from 0 to VREF x (1023/1024) with respect to GND, and is represented by a 10-bit unsigned integer value. In the left example, an ADWINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC0 conversion word (ADC0H:ADC0L) is within the range defined by ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL and ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL (if 0x0040 < ADC0H:ADC0L < 0x0080). In the right example, and ADWINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC0 conversion word is outside of the range defined by the ADC0GT and ADC0LT registers (if ADC0H:ADC0L < 0x0040 or ADC0H:ADC0L > 0x0080). Figure 14.7 shows an example using left- justified data with the same comparison values. Rev. 1.1 95

C8051F85x/86x ADC0H:ADC0L ADC0H:ADC0L Input Voltage Input Voltage (Px.x - GND) (Px.x - GND) VREF x (1023/ 0x03FF VREF x (1023/ 0x03FF 1024) 1024) ADWINT ADWINT=1 not affected 0x0081 0x0081 VREF x (128/1024) 0x0080 ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL VREF x (128/1024) 0x0080 ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL 0x007F 0x007F ADWINT ADWINT=1 not affected 0x0041 0x0041 VREF x (64/1024) 0x0040 ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL VREF x (64/1024) 0x0040 ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL 0x003F 0x003F ADWINT ADWINT=1 not affected 0 0x0000 0 0x0000 Figure 14.6. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Single-Ended Data ADC0H:ADC0L ADC0H:ADC0L Input Voltage Input Voltage (Px.x - GND) (Px.x - GND) VREF x (1023/ 0xFFC0 VREF x (1023/ 0xFFC0 1024) 1024) ADWINT ADWINT=1 not affected 0x2040 0x2040 VREF x (128/1024) 0x2000 ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL VREF x (128/1024) 0x2000 ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL 0x1FC0 0x1FC0 ADWINT ADWINT=1 not affected 0x1040 0x1040 VREF x (64/1024) 0x1000 ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL VREF x (64/1024) 0x1000 ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL 0x0FC0 0x0FC0 ADWINT ADWINT=1 not affected 0 0x0000 0 0x0000 Figure 14.7. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Single-Ended Data 96 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 14.8. Voltage and Ground Reference Options The voltage reference multiplexer is configurable to use an externally connected voltage reference, the internal voltage reference, or one of two power supply voltages. The ground reference mux allows the ground reference for ADC0 to be selected between the ground pin (GND) or a port pin dedicated to analog ground (AGND). The voltage and ground reference options are configured using the REF0CN register. Important Note About the VREF and AGND Inputs: Port pins are used as the external VREF and AGND inputs. When using an external voltage reference, VREF should be configured as an analog input and skipped by the digital crossbar. When using AGND as the ground reference to ADC0, AGND should be configured as an analog input and skipped by the Digital Crossbar. 14.8.1. External Voltage Reference To use an external voltage reference, REFSL should be set to 00. Bypass capacitors should be added as recommended by the manufacturer of the external voltage reference. If the manufacturer does not provide recommendations, a 4.7uF in parallel with a 0.1uF capacitor is recommended. 14.8.2. Internal Voltage Reference For applications requiring the maximum number of port I/O pins, or very short VREF turn-on time, the high- speed reference will be the best internal reference option to choose. The internal reference is selected by setting REFSL to 11. When selected, the internal reference will be automatically enabled/disabled on an as-needed basis by the ADC. The reference can be set to one of two voltage values: 1.65 V or 2.4 V, depending on the value of the IREFLVL bit. For applications with a non-varying power supply voltage, using the power supply as the voltage reference can provide the ADC with added dynamic range at the cost of reduced power supply noise rejection. To use the external supply pin (VDD) or the 1.8 V regulated digital supply voltage as the reference source, REFSL should be set to 01 or 10, respectively. Internal reference sources are not routed to the VREF pin, and do not require external capacitors. The electrical specifications tables detail SAR clock and throughput limitations for each reference source. 14.8.3. Analog Ground Reference To prevent ground noise generated by switching digital logic from affecting sensitive analog measurements, a separate analog ground reference option is available. When enabled, the ground reference for the ADC during both the tracking/sampling and the conversion periods is taken from the AGND pin. Any external sensors sampled by the ADC should be referenced to the AGND pin. If an external voltage reference is used, the AGND pin should be connected to the ground of the external reference and its associated decoupling capacitor. The separate analog ground reference option is enabled by setting GNDSL to 1. Note that when sampling the internal temperature sensor, the internal chip ground is always used for the sampling operation, regardless of the setting of the GNDSL bit. Similarly, whenever the internal 1.65 V high-speed reference is selected, the internal chip ground is always used during the conversion period, regardless of the setting of the GNDSL bit. Rev. 1.1 97

C8051F85x/86x 14.9. Temperature Sensor An on-chip temperature sensor is included, which can be directly accessed via the ADC multiplexer in single-ended configuration. To use the ADC to measure the temperature sensor, the ADC mux channel should select the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor transfer function is shown in Figure 14.8. The output voltage (V ) is the positive ADC input when the ADC multiplexer is set correctly. The TEMP TEMPE bit in register REF0CN enables/disables the temperature sensor. While disabled, the temperature sensor defaults to a high impedance state and any ADC measurements performed on the sensor will result in meaningless data. Refer to the electrical specification tables for the slope and offset parameters of the temperature sensor. V = (Slope x Temp ) + Offset TEMP C Temp = (V - Offset) / Slope C TEMP Slope (V / deg C) e g a t ol Offset (V at 0 Celsius) V Temperature Figure 14.8. Temperature Sensor Transfer Function 14.9.1. Calibration The uncalibrated temperature sensor output is extremely linear and suitable for relative temperature measurements. For absolute temperature measurements, offset and/or gain calibration is recommended. Typically a 1-point (offset) calibration includes the following steps: 1. Control/measure the ambient temperature (this temperature must be known). 2. Power the device, and delay for a few seconds to allow for self-heating. 3. Perform an ADC conversion with the temperature sensor selected as the ADC input. 4. Calculate the offset characteristics, and store this value in non-volatile memory for use with subsequent temperature sensor measurements. 98 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 14.10. ADC Control Registers Register 14.1. ADC0CN0: ADC0 Control 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADEN ADBMEN ADINT ADBUSY ADWINT ADCM Type RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xE8 (bit-addressable) Table 14.4. ADC0CN0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 ADEN Enable. 0: ADC0 Disabled (low-power shutdown). 1: ADC0 Enabled (active and ready for data conversions). 6 ADBMEN Burst Mode Enable. 0: ADC0 Burst Mode Disabled. 1: ADC0 Burst Mode Enabled. 5 ADINT Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag. Set by hardware upon completion of a data conversion (ADBMEN=0), or a burst of con- versions (ADBMEN=1). Can trigger an interrupt. Must be cleared by software. 4 ADBUSY ADC Busy. Writing 1 to this bit initiates an ADC conversion when ADC0CM = 000. This bit should not be polled to indicate when a conversion is complete. Instead, the ADINT bit should be used when polling for conversion completion. 3 ADWINT Window Compare Interrupt Flag. Set by hardware when the contents of ADC0H:ADC0L fall within the window specified by ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL and ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL. Can trigger an interrupt. Must be cleared by software. 2:0 ADCM Start of Conversion Mode Select. Specifies the ADC0 start of conversion source. All remaining bit combinations are reserved. 000: ADC0 conversion initiated on write of 1 to ADBUSY. 001: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 0. 010: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 2. 011: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 3. 100: ADC0 conversion initiated on rising edge of CNVSTR. 101-111: Reserved. Rev. 1.1 99

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.2. ADC0CN1: ADC0 Control 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved ADCMBE Type R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xB2 Table 14.5. ADC0CN1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:1 Reserved Must write reset value. 0 ADCMBE Common Mode Buffer Enable. 0: Disable the common mode buffer. This setting should be used only if the tracking time of the signal is greater than 1.5 us. 1: Enable the common mode buffer. This setting should be used in most cases, and will give the best dynamic ADC performance. The common mode buffer must be enabled if signal tracking time is less than or equal to 1.5 us. 100 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.3. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADSC AD8BE ADTM ADGN Type RW RW RW RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xBC Table 14.6. ADC0CF Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:3 ADSC SAR Clock Divider. This field sets the ADC clock divider value. It should be configured to be as close to the maximum SAR clock speed as the datasheet will allow. The SAR clock frequency is given by the following equation: F F = -----A----D---C---C---L---K---- CLKSAR ADSC+1 F is equal to the selected SYSCLK when ADBMEN is 0 and the high-frequency ADCCLK oscillator when ADBMEN is 1. 2 AD8BE 8-Bit Mode Enable. 0: ADC0 operates in 10-bit or 12-bit mode (normal operation). 1: ADC0 operates in 8-bit mode. 1 ADTM Track Mode. Selects between Normal or Delayed Tracking Modes. 0: Normal Track Mode. When ADC0 is enabled, conversion begins immediately following the start-of-conversion signal. 1: Delayed Track Mode. When ADC0 is enabled, conversion begins 4 SAR clock cycles following the start-of-conversion signal. The ADC is allowed to track during this time. 0 ADGN Gain Control. 0: The on-chip PGA gain is 0.5. 1: The on-chip PGA gain is 1. Rev. 1.1 101

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.4. ADC0AC: ADC0 Accumulator Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name AD12BE ADAE ADSJST ADRPT Type RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xB3 Table 14.7. ADC0AC Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 AD12BE 12-Bit Mode Enable. Enables 12-bit Mode. In 12-bit mode, the ADC throughput is reduced by a factor of 4. 0: 12-bit Mode Disabled. 1: 12-bit Mode Enabled. 6 ADAE Accumulate Enable. Enables multiple conversions to be accumulated when burst mode is disabled. 0: ADC0H:ADC0L contain the result of the latest conversion when Burst Mode is dis- abled. 1: ADC0H:ADC0L contain the accumulated conversion results when Burst Mode is dis- abled. Software must write 0x0000 to ADC0H:ADC0L to clear the accumulated result. 5:3 ADSJST Accumulator Shift and Justify. Specifies the format of data read from ADC0H:ADC0L. All remaining bit combinations are reserved. 000: Right justified. No shifting applied. 001: Right justified. Shifted right by 1 bit. 010: Right justified. Shifted right by 2 bits. 011: Right justified. Shifted right by 3 bits. 100: Left justified. No shifting applied. 101-111: Reserved. 2:0 ADRPT Repeat Count. Selects the number of conversions to perform and accumulate in Burst Mode. This bit field must be set to 000 if Burst Mode is disabled. 000: Perform and Accumulate 1 conversion (not used in 12-bit mode). 001: Perform and Accumulate 4 conversions (1 conversion in 12-bit mode). 010: Perform and Accumulate 8 conversions (2 conversions in 12-bit mode). 011: Perform and Accumulate 16 conversions (4 conversions in 12-bit mode). 100: Perform and Accumulate 32 conversions (8 conversions in 12-bit mode). 101: Perform and Accumulate 64 conversions (16 conversions in 12-bit mode). 110-111: Reserved. 102 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.5. ADC0PWR: ADC0 Power Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADBIAS ADMXLP ADLPM ADPWR Type RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xDF Table 14.8. ADC0PWR Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:6 ADBIAS Bias Power Select. This field can be used to adjust the ADC's power consumption based on the conversion speed. Higher bias currents allow for faster conversion times. 00: Select bias current mode 0. Recommended to use modes 1, 2, or 3. 01: Select bias current mode 1 (SARCLK <= 16 MHz). 10: Select bias current mode 2. 11: Select bias current mode 3 (SARCLK <= 4 MHz). 5 ADMXLP Mux and Reference Low Power Mode Enable. Enables low power mode operation for the multiplexer and voltage reference buffers. 0: Low power mode disabled. 1: Low power mode enabled (SAR clock < 4 MHz). 4 ADLPM Low Power Mode Enable. This bit can be used to reduce power to the ADC's internal common mode buffer. It can be set to 1 to reduce power when tracking times in the application are longer (slower sample rates). 0: Disable low power mode. 1: Enable low power mode (requires extended tracking time). 3:0 ADPWR Burst Mode Power Up Time. This field sets the time delay allowed for the ADC to power up from a low power state. When ADTM is set, an additional 4 SARCLKs are added to this time. 8ADPWR T = ------------------------------ PWRTIME F HFOSC Rev. 1.1 103

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.6. ADC0TK: ADC0 Burst Mode Track Time Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name AD12SM Reserved ADTK Type RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 SFR Address: 0xB9 Table 14.9. ADC0TK Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 AD12SM 12-Bit Sampling Mode. This bit controls the way that the ADC samples the input when in 12-bit mode. When the ADC is configured for multiple 12-bit conversions in burst mode, the AD12SM bit should be cleared to 0. 0: The ADC will re-track and sample the input four times during a 12-bit conversion. 1: The ADC will sample the input once at the beginning of each 12-bit conversion. The ADTK field can be set to 63 to maximize throughput. 6 Reserved Must write reset value. 5:0 ADTK Burst Mode Tracking Time. This field sets the time delay between consecutive conversions performed in Burst Mode. When ADTM is set, an additional 4 SARCLKs are added to this time. 64–ADTK T = ---------------------------- BMTK F HFOSC The Burst Mode track delay is not inserted prior to the first conversion. The required tracking time for the first conversion should be defined with the ADPWR field. 104 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.7. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0H Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xBE Table 14.10. ADC0H Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0H Data Word High Byte. When read, this register returns the most significant byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumulator formatted according to the settings in ADSJST. The register may also be written to set the upper byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumulator. Note: If accumulator shifting is enabled, the most significant bits of the value read will be zeros. This register should not be written when the SYNC bit is set to 1. Rev. 1.1 105

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.8. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0L Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xBD Table 14.11. ADC0L Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0L Data Word Low Byte. When read, this register returns the least significant byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumula- tor, formatted according to the settings in ADSJST. The register may also be written, to set the lower byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumulator. Note: If Accumulator shifting is enabled, the most significant bits of the value read will be zeros. This register should not be written when the SYNC bit is set to 1. 106 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.9. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0GTH Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xC4 Table 14.12. ADC0GTH Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0GTH Greater-Than High Byte. Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit Greater-Than window compare register. Rev. 1.1 107

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.10. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0GTL Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xC3 Table 14.13. ADC0GTL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0GTL Greater-Than Low Byte. Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit Greater-Than window compare register. Note: In 8-bit mode, this register should be set to 0x00. 108 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.11. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0LTH Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xC6 Table 14.14. ADC0LTH Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0LTH Less-Than High Byte. Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit Less-Than window compare register. Rev. 1.1 109

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.12. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0LTL Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xC5 Table 14.15. ADC0LTL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0LTL Less-Than Low Byte. Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit Less-Than window compare register. Note: In 8-bit mode, this register should be set to 0x00. 110 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.13. ADC0MX: ADC0 Multiplexer Selection Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved ADC0MX Type R RW Reset 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xBB Table 14.16. ADC0MX Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:5 Reserved Must write reset value. 4:0 ADC0MX AMUX0 Positive Input Selection. Selects the positive input channel for ADC0. For reserved bit combinations, no input is selected. 00000: ADC0.0 00001: ADC0.1 00010: ADC0.2 00011: ADC0.3 00100: ADC0.4 00101: ADC0.5 00110: ADC0.6 00111: ADC0.7 01000: ADC0.8 01001: ADC0.9 01010: ADC0.10 01011: ADC0.11 01100: ADC0.12 01101: ADC0.13 01110: ADC0.14 01111: ADC0.15 10000: Temperature sensor. 10001: Internal LDO regulator output. 10010: VDD 10011: GND 10100-11111: Reserved. Rev. 1.1 111

C8051F85x/86x Register 14.14. REF0CN: Voltage Reference Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IREFLVL Reserved GNDSL REFSL TEMPE Reserved Type RW R RW RW RW R Reset 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD1 Table 14.17. REF0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 IREFLVL Internal Voltage Reference Level. Sets the voltage level for the internal reference source. 0: The internal reference operates at 1.65 V nominal. 1: The internal reference operates at 2.4 V nominal. 6 Reserved Must write reset value. 5 GNDSL Analog Ground Reference. Selects the ADC0 ground reference. 0: The ADC0 ground reference is the GND pin. 1: The ADC0 ground reference is the AGND pin. 4:3 REFSL Voltage Reference Select. Selects the ADC0 voltage reference. 00: The ADC0 voltage reference is the VREF pin. 01: The ADC0 voltage reference is the VDD pin. 10: The ADC0 voltage reference is the internal 1.8 V digital supply voltage. 11: The ADC0 voltage reference is the internal voltage reference. 2 TEMPE Temperature Sensor Enable. Enables/Disables the internal temperature sensor. 0: Temperature Sensor Disabled. 1: Temperature Sensor Enabled. 1:0 Reserved Must write reset value. 112 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 15. CIP-51 Microcontroller Core The C8051F85x/86x uses the CIP-51 microcontroller. The CIP-51 is fully compatible with the MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop software. The MCU family has a superset of all the peripherals included with a standard 8051. The CIP-51 also includes on- chip debug hardware and interfaces directly with the analog and digital subsystems providing a complete data acquisition or control-system solution in a single integrated circuit. The CIP-51 Microcontroller core implements the standard 8051 organization and peripherals as well as additional custom peripherals and functions to extend its capability (see Figure 15.1 for a block diagram). The CIP-51 includes the following features: Fully Compatible with MCS-51 Instruction Set Reset Input 25 MIPS Peak Throughput with 25 MHz Clock Power Management Modes 0 to 25 MHz Clock Frequency On-chip Debug Logic Extended Interrupt Handler Program and Data Memory Security 15.1. Performance The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the standard 8051 architecture. The CIP-51 core executes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock cycles, with no instructions taking more than eight system clock cycles. DATA BUS D8 D8 D8 ACCUMULATOR D8 D8 B REGISTER STACK POINTER S BU TMP1 TMP2 A T A SRAM D PSW ADDRESS SRAM ALU REGISTER D8 D8 D8 D8 DATA BUS SFR_ADDRESS BUFFER D8 SFR_CONTROL SFR DATA POINTER D8 D8 INTEBRUFSACE SFR_WRITE_DATA SFR_READ_DATA PC INCREMENTER PROGRAM COUNTER (PC) US D8 MEM_ADDRESS B PRGM. ADDRESS REG. ATA A16 INMTEEMROFARCYE MEMM_EWMR_CITOEN_DTRAOTAL D MEM_READ_DATA PIPELINE D8 RESET CONTROL LOGIC SYSTEM_IRQs CLOCK INTERRUPT STOP D8 INTERFACE EMULATION_IRQ POWER CONTROL IDLE REGISTER D8 Figure 15.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. The CIP-51 has a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions that require each execution time. Clocks to Execute 1 2 2/3 3 3/4 4 4/5 5 8 Rev. 1.1 113

C8051F85x/86x Number of Instructions 26 50 5 14 7 3 1 2 1 15.2. Programming and Debugging Support In-system programming of the flash program memory and communication with on-chip debug support logic is accomplished via the Silicon Labs 2-Wire Development Interface (C2). The on-chip debug support logic facilitates full speed in-circuit debugging, allowing the setting of hardware breakpoints, starting, stopping and single stepping through program execution (including interrupt service routines), examination of the program's call stack, and reading/writing the contents of registers and memory. This method of on-chip debugging is completely non-intrusive, requiring no RAM, Stack, timers, or other on-chip resources. The CIP-51 is supported by development tools from Silicon Labs and third party vendors. Silicon Labs provides an integrated development environment (IDE) including editor, debugger and programmer. The IDE's debugger and programmer interface to the CIP-51 via the C2 interface to provide fast and efficient in-system device programming and debugging. Third party macro assemblers and C compilers are also available. 15.3. Instruction Set The instruction set of the CIP-51 System Controller is fully compatible with the standard MCS-51™ instruction set. Standard 8051 development tools can be used to develop software for the CIP-51. All CIP- 51 instructions are the binary and functional equivalent of their MCS-51™ counterparts, including opcodes, addressing modes and effect on PSW flags. However, instruction timing is different than that of the standard 8051. 15.3.1. Instruction and CPU Timing In many 8051 implementations, a distinction is made between machine cycles and clock cycles, with machine cycles varying from 2 to 12 clock cycles in length. However, the CIP-51 implementation is based solely on clock cycle timing. All instruction timings are specified in terms of clock cycles. Due to the pipelined architecture of the CIP-51, most instructions execute in the same number of clock cycles as there are program bytes in the instruction. Conditional branch instructions take one less clock cycle to complete when the branch is not taken as opposed to when the branch is taken. Table 15.1 is the CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary, which includes the mnemonic, number of bytes, and number of clock cycles for each instruction. 114 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary Mnemonic Description Bytes Clock Cycles Arithmetic Operations ADD A, Rn Add register to A 1 1 ADD A, direct Add direct byte to A 2 2 ADD A, @Ri Add indirect RAM to A 1 2 ADD A, #data Add immediate to A 2 2 ADDC A, Rn Add register to A with carry 1 1 ADDC A, direct Add direct byte to A with carry 2 2 ADDC A, @Ri Add indirect RAM to A with carry 1 2 ADDC A, #data Add immediate to A with carry 2 2 SUBB A, Rn Subtract register from A with borrow 1 1 SUBB A, direct Subtract direct byte from A with borrow 2 2 SUBB A, @Ri Subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow 1 2 SUBB A, #data Subtract immediate from A with borrow 2 2 INC A Increment A 1 1 INC Rn Increment register 1 1 INC direct Increment direct byte 2 2 INC @Ri Increment indirect RAM 1 2 DEC A Decrement A 1 1 DEC Rn Decrement register 1 1 DEC direct Decrement direct byte 2 2 DEC @Ri Decrement indirect RAM 1 2 INC DPTR Increment Data Pointer 1 1 MUL AB Multiply A and B 1 4 DIV AB Divide A by B 1 8 DA A Decimal adjust A 1 1 Logical Operations ANL A, Rn AND Register to A 1 1 ANL A, direct AND direct byte to A 2 2 ANL A, @Ri AND indirect RAM to A 1 2 ANL A, #data AND immediate to A 2 2 ANL direct, A AND A to direct byte 2 2 ANL direct, #data AND immediate to direct byte 3 3 ORL A, Rn OR Register to A 1 1 ORL A, direct OR direct byte to A 2 2 ORL A, @Ri OR indirect RAM to A 1 2 ORL A, #data OR immediate to A 2 2 ORL direct, A OR A to direct byte 2 2 ORL direct, #data OR immediate to direct byte 3 3 Rev. 1.1 115

C8051F85x/86x Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Description Bytes Clock Cycles XRL A, Rn Exclusive-OR Register to A 1 1 XRL A, direct Exclusive-OR direct byte to A 2 2 XRL A, @Ri Exclusive-OR indirect RAM to A 1 2 XRL A, #data Exclusive-OR immediate to A 2 2 XRL direct, A Exclusive-OR A to direct byte 2 2 XRL direct, #data Exclusive-OR immediate to direct byte 3 3 CLR A Clear A 1 1 CPL A Complement A 1 1 RL A Rotate A left 1 1 RLC A Rotate A left through Carry 1 1 RR A Rotate A right 1 1 RRC A Rotate A right through Carry 1 1 SWAP A Swap nibbles of A 1 1 Data Transfer MOV A, Rn Move Register to A 1 1 MOV A, direct Move direct byte to A 2 2 MOV A, @Ri Move indirect RAM to A 1 2 MOV A, #data Move immediate to A 2 2 MOV Rn, A Move A to Register 1 1 MOV Rn, direct Move direct byte to Register 2 2 MOV Rn, #data Move immediate to Register 2 2 MOV direct, A Move A to direct byte 2 2 MOV direct, Rn Move Register to direct byte 2 2 MOV direct, direct Move direct byte to direct byte 3 3 MOV direct, @Ri Move indirect RAM to direct byte 2 2 MOV direct, #data Move immediate to direct byte 3 3 MOV @Ri, A Move A to indirect RAM 1 2 MOV @Ri, direct Move direct byte to indirect RAM 2 2 MOV @Ri, #data Move immediate to indirect RAM 2 2 MOV DPTR, #data16 Load DPTR with 16-bit constant 3 3 MOVC A, @A+DPTR Move code byte relative DPTR to A 1 3 MOVC A, @A+PC Move code byte relative PC to A 1 3 MOVX A, @Ri Move external data (8-bit address) to A 1 3 MOVX @Ri, A Move A to external data (8-bit address) 1 3 MOVX A, @DPTR Move external data (16-bit address) to A 1 3 MOVX @DPTR, A Move A to external data (16-bit address) 1 3 PUSH direct Push direct byte onto stack 2 2 POP direct Pop direct byte from stack 2 2 116 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Description Bytes Clock Cycles XCH A, Rn Exchange Register with A 1 1 XCH A, direct Exchange direct byte with A 2 2 XCH A, @Ri Exchange indirect RAM with A 1 2 XCHD A, @Ri Exchange low nibble of indirect RAM with A 1 2 Boolean Manipulation CLR C Clear Carry 1 1 CLR bit Clear direct bit 2 2 SETB C Set Carry 1 1 SETB bit Set direct bit 2 2 CPL C Complement Carry 1 1 CPL bit Complement direct bit 2 2 ANL C, bit AND direct bit to Carry 2 2 ANL C, /bit AND complement of direct bit to Carry 2 2 ORL C, bit OR direct bit to carry 2 2 ORL C, /bit OR complement of direct bit to Carry 2 2 MOV C, bit Move direct bit to Carry 2 2 MOV bit, C Move Carry to direct bit 2 2 JC rel Jump if Carry is set 2 2/3 JNC rel Jump if Carry is not set 2 2/3 JB bit, rel Jump if direct bit is set 3 3/4 JNB bit, rel Jump if direct bit is not set 3 3/4 JBC bit, rel Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit 3 3/4 Program Branching ACALL addr11 Absolute subroutine call 2 3 LCALL addr16 Long subroutine call 3 4 RET Return from subroutine 1 5 RETI Return from interrupt 1 5 AJMP addr11 Absolute jump 2 3 LJMP addr16 Long jump 3 4 SJMP rel Short jump (relative address) 2 3 JMP @A+DPTR Jump indirect relative to DPTR 1 3 JZ rel Jump if A equals zero 2 2/3 JNZ rel Jump if A does not equal zero 2 2/3 CJNE A, direct, rel Compare direct byte to A and jump if not equal 3 3/4 CJNE A, #data, rel Compare immediate to A and jump if not equal 3 3/4 CJNE Rn, #data, rel Compare immediate to Register and jump if not equal 3 3/4 CJNE @Ri, #data, rel Compare immediate to indirect and jump if not equal 3 4/5 DJNZ Rn, rel Decrement Register and jump if not zero 2 2/3 Rev. 1.1 117

C8051F85x/86x Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Description Bytes Clock Cycles DJNZ direct, rel Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero 3 3/4 NOP No operation 1 1 Notes on Registers, Operands and Addressing Modes: Rn—Register R0–R7 of the currently selected register bank. @Ri—Data RAM location addressed indirectly through R0 or R1. rel—8-bit, signed (twos complement) offset relative to the first byte of the following instruction. Used by SJMP and all conditional jumps. direct—8-bit internal data location’s address. This could be a direct-access Data RAM location (0x00–0x7F) or an SFR (0x80–0xFF). #data—8-bit constant #data16—16-bit constant bit—Direct-accessed bit in Data RAM or SFR addr11—11-bit destination address used by ACALL and AJMP. The destination must be within the same 2 kB page of program memory as the first byte of the following instruction. addr16—16-bit destination address used by LCALL and LJMP. The destination may be anywhere within the 8 kB program memory space. There is one unused opcode (0xA5) that performs the same function as NOP. All mnemonics copyrighted © Intel Corporation 1980. 118 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 15.4. CPU Core Registers Register 15.1. DPL: Data Pointer Low Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DPL Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x82 Table 15.2. DPL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 DPL Data Pointer Low. The DPL register is the low byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly addressed flash memory or XRAM. Rev. 1.1 119

C8051F85x/86x Register 15.2. DPH: Data Pointer High Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DPH Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x83 Table 15.3. DPH Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 DPH Data Pointer High. The DPH register is the high byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly addressed flash memory or XRAM. 120 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 15.3. SP: Stack Pointer Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SP Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0x81 Table 15.4. SP Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 SP Stack Pointer. The Stack Pointer holds the location of the top of the stack. The stack pointer is incre- mented before every PUSH operation. The SP register defaults to 0x07 after reset. Rev. 1.1 121

C8051F85x/86x Register 15.4. ACC: Accumulator Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ACC Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xE0 (bit-addressable) Table 15.5. ACC Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 ACC Accumulator. This register is the accumulator for arithmetic operations. 122 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 15.5. B: B Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name B Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xF0 (bit-addressable) Table 15.6. B Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 B B Register. This register serves as a second accumulator for certain arithmetic operations. Rev. 1.1 123

C8051F85x/86x Register 15.6. PSW: Program Status Word Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CY AC F0 RS OV F1 PARITY Type RW RW RW RW RW RW R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD0 (bit-addressable) Table 15.7. PSW Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CY Carry Flag. This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry (addition) or a borrow (subtraction). It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations. 6 AC Auxiliary Carry Flag. This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry into (addition) or a borrow from (subtraction) the high order nibble. It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arith- metic operations. 5 F0 User Flag 0. This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control. 4:3 RS Register Bank Select. These bits select which register bank is used during register accesses. 00: Bank 0, Addresses 0x00-0x07 01: Bank 1, Addresses 0x08-0x0F 10: Bank 2, Addresses 0x10-0x17 11: Bank 3, Addresses 0x18-0x1F 2 OV Overflow Flag. This bit is set to 1 under the following circumstances: 1. An ADD, ADDC, or SUBB instruction causes a sign-change overflow. 2. A MUL instruction results in an overflow (result is greater than 255). 3. A DIV instruction causes a divide-by-zero condition. The OV bit is cleared to 0 by the ADD, ADDC, SUBB, MUL, and DIV instructions in all other cases. 1 F1 User Flag 1. This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control. 0 PARITY Parity Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 if the sum of the eight bits in the accumulator is odd and cleared if the sum is even. 124 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 16. Clock Sources and Selection (HFOSC0, LFOSC0, and EXTCLK) The C8051F85x/86x devices can be clocked from the internal low power 24.5 MHz oscillator, the internal low-frequency 80 kHz oscillator, or an external CMOS clock signal at the EXTCLK pin. An adjustable clock divider allows the selected clock source to be post-scaled by powers of 2, up to a factor of 128. By default, the system clock comes up as the 24.5 MHz oscillator divided by 8. Clock Control High Frequency 24.5 MHz Oscillator Low Frequency Programmable SYSCLK 80 kHz Divider: Oscillator 1, 2, 4...128 To core and peripherals External Clock Input (EXTCLK) Figure 16.1. Clocking Options 16.1. Programmable High-Frequency Oscillator All C8051F85x/86x devices include a programmable internal high-frequency oscillator that defaults as the system clock after a system reset. The oscillator is automatically enabled when it is requested. The internal oscillator period can be adjusted via the OSCICL register. On C8051F85x/86x devices, OSCICL is factory calibrated to obtain a 24.5 MHz base frequency. 16.2. Programmable Low-Frequency Oscillator A programmable low-frequency internal oscillator is also included. The low-frequency oscillator is calibrated to a nominal frequency of 80 kHz. A divider at the oscillator output is capable of dividing the output clock of the module by 1, 2, 4, or 8, using the OSCLD bits in the OSCLCN register. Additionally, the OSCLF bits can be used to coarsely adjust the oscillator’s output frequency. 16.2.1. Calibrating the Internal L-F Oscillator Timer 3 includes a capture function that can be used to capture the oscillator frequency, when running from a known time base. When Timer 3 is configured for L-F Oscillator Capture Mode, a rising edge of the low- frequency oscillator’s output will cause a capture event on the corresponding timer. As a capture event occurs, the current timer value (TMR3H:TMR3L) is copied into the timer reload registers (TMR3RLH:TMR3RLL). By recording the difference between two successive timer capture values, the low- frequency oscillator’s period can be calculated. The OSCLF bits can then be adjusted to produce the desired oscillator frequency. Rev. 1.1 125

C8051F85x/86x 16.3. External Clock An external CMOS clock source is also supported by the C8051F85x/86x family. The EXTCLK pin on the device serves as the external clock input when running in this mode. The EXTCLK input may also be used to clock some of the digital peripherals (e.g., Timers, PCA, etc.) while SYSCLK runs from one of the internal oscillator sources. When not selected as the SYSCLK source, the EXTCLK input is always re- synchronized to SYSCLK. 16.4. Clock Selection The CLKSEL register is used to select the clock source for the system. The CLKSL field selects which oscillator source is used as the system clock, while CLKDIV controls the programmable divider. CLKSL must be set to 01b for the system clock to run from the external oscillator; however the external oscillator may still clock certain peripherals (timers, PCA) when the internal oscillator is selected as the system clock. In these cases, the external oscillator source is synchronized to the SYSCLK source. The system clock may be switched on-the-fly between any of the oscillator sources so long as the selected clock source is enabled and has settled, and CLKDIV may be changed at any time. The internal high-frequency and low-frequency oscillators require little start-up time and may be selected as the system clock immediately following the register write which enables the oscillator. When selecting the EXTCLK pin as a clock input source, the pin should be skipped in the crossbar and configured as a digital input. Firmware should ensure that the external clock source is present or enable the missing clock detector before switching the CLKSL field. 126 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 16.5. High Frequency Oscillator Control Registers Register 16.1. OSCICL: High Frequency Oscillator Calibration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name OSCICL Type RW Reset X X X X X X X X SFR Address: 0xC7 Table 16.1. OSCICL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 OSCICL Oscillator Calibration Bits. These bits determine the internal oscillator period. When set to 00000000b, the oscillator operates at its fastest setting. When set to 11111111b, the oscillator operates at its slow- est setting. The reset value is factory calibrated to generate an internal oscillator fre- quency of 24.5 MHz. Rev. 1.1 127

C8051F85x/86x 16.6. Low Frequency Oscillator Control Registers Register 16.2. OSCLCN: Low Frequency Oscillator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name OSCLEN OSCLRDY OSCLF OSCLD Type RW R RW RW Reset 0 0 X X X X 0 0 SFR Address: 0xB1 Table 16.2. OSCLCN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 OSCLEN Internal L-F Oscillator Enable. This bit enables the internal low-frequency oscillator. Note that the low-frequency oscilla- tor is automatically enabled when the watchdog timer is active. 0: Internal L-F Oscillator Disabled. 1: Internal L-F Oscillator Enabled. 6 OSCLRDY Internal L-F Oscillator Ready. 0: Internal L-F Oscillator frequency not stabilized. 1: Internal L-F Oscillator frequency stabilized. 5:2 OSCLF Internal L-F Oscillator Frequency Control Bits. Fine-tune control bits for the Internal L-F oscillator frequency. When set to 0000b, the L-F oscillator operates at its fastest setting. When set to 1111b, the L-F oscillator operates at its slowest setting. The OSCLF bits should only be changed by firmware when the L-F oscillator is disabled (OSCLEN = 0). 1:0 OSCLD Internal L-F Oscillator Divider Select. 00: Divide by 8 selected. 01: Divide by 4 selected. 10: Divide by 2 selected. 11: Divide by 1 selected. Note: OSCLRDY is only set back to 0 in the event of a device reset or a change to the OSCLD bits. 128 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 16.7. Clock Selection Control Registers Register 16.3. CLKSEL: Clock Select Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved CLKDIV Reserved CLKSL Type R RW R RW Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xA9 Table 16.3. CLKSEL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 Reserved Must write reset value. 6:4 CLKDIV Clock Source Divider. This field controls the divider applied to the clock source selected by CLKSL. The output of this divider is the system clock (SYSCLK). 000: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 1. 001: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 2. 010: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 4. 011: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 8. 100: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 16. 101: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 32. 110: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 64. 111: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 128. 3:2 Reserved Must write reset value. 1:0 CLKSL Clock Source Select. Selects the system clock source. 00: Clock derived from the Internal High-Frequency Oscillator. 01: Clock derived from the External Oscillator circuit. 10: Clock derived from the Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator. 11: Reserved. Rev. 1.1 129

C8051F85x/86x 17. Comparators (CMP0 and CMP1) C8051F85x/86x devices include two on-chip programmable voltage comparators, CMP0 and CMP1. The two comparators are functionally identical, but have different connectivity within the device. A functional block diagram is shown in Figure 17.1. CMPn Positive Input Selection Programmable Hysteresis Port Pins (8) CPnA (asynchronous) Internal LDO CPn+ CPn (synchronous) CPn- D Q SYSCLK Port Pins (8) Q GND Programmable Negative Input Response Time Selection Figure 17.1. Comparator Functional Block Diagram 17.1. System Connectivity Comparator inputs are routed to port I/O pins or internal signals using the comparator mux registers. The comparator’s synchronous and asynchronous outputs can optionally be routed to port I/O pins through the port I/O crossbar. The output of either comparator may also be configured to generate a system interrupt. CMP0 may also be used as a reset source, or as a trigger to kill a PCA output channel. The CMP0 inputs are selected in the CPT0MX register, while CPT1MX selects the CMP1 inputs. The CMXP field selects the comparator’s positive input (CPnP.x); the CMXN field selects the comparator’s neg- ative input (CPnN.x). Table 17.1 through Table 17.4 detail the comparator input multiplexer options on the C8051F85x/86x family. See the port I/O crossbar sections for details on configuring comparator outputs via the digital crossbar. Comparator inputs can be externally driven from –0.25 V to (V ) + 0.25 V without DD damage or upset. Important Note About Comparator Inputs: The port pins selected as comparator inputs should be con- figured as analog inputs in their associated port configuration register, and configured to be skipped by the crossbar. 130 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 17.1. CMP0 Positive Input Multiplexer Channels CMXP Setting in Signal Name QSOP24 Pin Name QFN20 Pin Name SOIC16 Pin Name Register CPT0MX 0000 CP0P.0 P0.0 P0.0 P0.0 0001 CP0P.1 P0.1 P0.1 P0.1 0010 CP0P.2 P0.2 P0.2 P0.2 0011 CP0P.3 P0.3 P0.3 P0.3 0100 CP0P.4 P0.4 P0.4 P0.4 0101 CP0P.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 0110 CP0P.6 P0.6 P0.6 Reserved 0111 CP0P.7 P0.7 P0.7 Reserved 1000 LDO Internal 1.8 V LDO Output 1001-1111 None No connection Table 17.2. CMP0 Negative Input Multiplexer Channels CMXN Setting in Signal Name QSOP24 Pin Name QFN20 Pin Name SOIC16 Pin Name Register CPT0MX 0000 CP0N.0 P0.0 P0.0 P0.0 0001 CP0N.1 P0.1 P0.1 P0.1 0010 CP0N.2 P0.2 P0.2 P0.2 0011 CP0N.3 P0.3 P0.3 P0.3 0100 CP0N.4 P0.4 P0.4 P0.4 0101 CP0N.5 P0.5 P0.5 P0.5 0110 CP0N.6 P0.6 P0.6 Reserved 0111 CP0N.7 P0.7 P0.7 Reserved 1000 GND GND 1001-1111 None No connection Rev. 1.1 131

C8051F85x/86x Table 17.3. CMP1 Positive Input Multiplexer Channels CMXP Setting in Signal Name QSOP24 Pin Name QFN20 Pin Name SOIC16 Pin Name Register CPT1MX 0000 CP1P.0 P1.0 P1.0 P0.6 0001 CP1P.1 P1.1 P1.1 P0.7 0010 CP1P.2 P1.2 P1.2 P1.0 0011 CP1P.3 P1.3 P1.3 P1.1 0100 CP1P.4 P1.4 P1.4 P1.2 0101 CP1P.5 P1.5 P1.5 P1.3 0110 CP1P.6 P1.6 P1.6 Reserved 0111 CP1P.7 P1.7 Reserved Reserved 1000 LDO Internal 1.8 V LDO Output 1001-1111 None No connection Table 17.4. CMP1 Negative Input Multiplexer Channels CMXN Setting in Signal Name QSOP24 Pin Name QFN20 Pin Name SOIC16 Pin Name Register CPT1MX 0000 CP1N.0 P1.0 P1.0 P0.6 0001 CP1N.1 P1.1 P1.1 P0.7 0010 CP1N.2 P1.2 P1.2 P1.0 0011 CP1N.3 P1.3 P1.3 P1.1 0100 CP1N.4 P1.4 P1.4 P1.2 0101 CP1N.5 P1.5 P1.5 P1.3 0110 CP1N.6 P1.6 P1.6 Reserved 0111 CP1N.7 P1.7 Reserved Reserved 1000 GND GND 1001-1111 None No connection 132 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 17.2. Functional Description The comparator offers programmable response time and hysteresis, an analog input multiplexer, and two outputs that are optionally available at the port pins: a synchronous “latched” output (CPn), or an asynchronous “raw” output (CPnA). The asynchronous CPnA signal is available even when the system clock is not active. This allows the comparator to operate and generate an output with the device in STOP mode. When disabled, the comparator output (if assigned to a port I/O pin via the crossbar) defaults to the logic low state, and the power supply to the comparator is turned off. The comparator response time may be configured in software via the CPTnMD register. Selecting a longer response time reduces the comparator supply current. Positive programmable hysteresis (CPHYP) CPn- CPn+ Negative programmable hysteresis (CPHYN) CP0 (out) Figure 17.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot The comparator hysteresis is software-programmable via its Comparator Control register CPTnCN. The user can program both the amount of hysteresis voltage (referred to the input voltage) and the positive and negative-going symmetry of this hysteresis around the threshold voltage. The comparator hysteresis is programmable using the CPHYN and CPHYP fields in the Comparator Control Register CPTnCN. The amount of negative hysteresis voltage is determined by the settings of the CPHYN bits. As shown in Figure 17.2, settings of 20, 10, or 5 mV (nominal) of negative hysteresis can be programmed, or negative hysteresis can be disabled. In a similar way, the amount of positive hysteresis is determined by the setting the CPHYP bits. Comparator interrupts can be generated on both rising-edge and falling-edge output transitions. The CPFIF flag is set to logic 1 upon a comparator falling-edge occurrence, and the CPRIF flag is set to logic 1 upon the comparator rising-edge occurrence. Once set, these bits remain set until cleared by software. The comparator rising-edge interrupt mask is enabled by setting CPRIE to a logic 1. The comparator falling-edge interrupt mask is enabled by setting CPFIE to a logic 1. The output state of the comparator can be obtained at any time by reading the CPOUT bit. The comparator is enabled by setting the CPEN bit to logic 1, and is disabled by clearing this bit to logic 0. Note that false rising edges and falling edges can be detected when the comparator is first powered on or if changes are made to the hysteresis or response time control bits. Therefore, it is recommended that the rising-edge and falling-edge flags be explicitly cleared to logic 0 a short time after the comparator is enabled or its mode bits have been changed, before enabling comparator interrupts. Rev. 1.1 133

C8051F85x/86x 17.3. Comparator Control Registers Register 17.1. CPT0CN: Comparator 0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CPEN CPOUT CPRIF CPFIF CPHYP CPHYN Type RW R RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x9B Table 17.5. CPT0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CPEN Comparator 0 Enable Bit. 0: Comparator Disabled. 1: Comparator Enabled. 6 CPOUT Comparator 0 Output State Flag. 0: Voltage on CP0P < CP0N. 1: Voltage on CP0P > CP0N. 5 CPRIF Comparator 0 Rising-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator Rising Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator Rising Edge has occurred. 4 CPFIF Comparator 0 Falling-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator Falling-Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator Falling-Edge has occurred. 3:2 CPHYP Comparator 0 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV. 1:0 CPHYN Comparator 0 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV. 134 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 17.2. CPT0MD: Comparator 0 Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CPLOUT Reserved CPRIE CPFIE Reserved CPMD Type RW R RW RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 SFR Address: 0x9D Table 17.6. CPT0MD Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CPLOUT Comparator 0 Latched Output Flag. This bit represents the comparator output value at the most recent PCA counter overflow. 0: Comparator output was logic low at last PCA overflow. 1: Comparator output was logic high at last PCA overflow. 6 Reserved Must write reset value. 5 CPRIE Comparator 0 Rising-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt enabled. 4 CPFIE Comparator 0 Falling-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt enabled. 3:2 Reserved Must write reset value. 1:0 CPMD Comparator 0 Mode Select. These bits affect the response time and power consumption of the comparator. 00: Mode 0 (Fastest Response Time, Highest Power Consumption) 01: Mode 1 10: Mode 2 11: Mode 3 (Slowest Response Time, Lowest Power Consumption) Rev. 1.1 135

C8051F85x/86x Register 17.3. CPT0MX: Comparator 0 Multiplexer Selection Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CMXN CMXP Type RW RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0x9F Table 17.7. CPT0MX Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:4 CMXN Comparator 0 Negative Input MUX Selection. 0000: External pin CP0N.0 0001: External pin CP0N.1 0010: External pin CP0N.2 0011: External pin CP0N.3 0100: External pin CP0N.4 0101: External pin CP0N.5 0110: External pin CP0N.6 0111: External pin CP0N.7 1000: GND 1001-1111: Reserved. 3:0 CMXP Comparator 0 Positive Input MUX Selection. 0000: External pin CP0P.0 0001: External pin CP0P.1 0010: External pin CP0P.2 0011: External pin CP0P.3 0100: External pin CP0P.4 0101: External pin CP0P.5 0110: External pin CP0P.6 0111: External pin CP0P.7 1000: Internal LDO output 1001-1111: Reserved. 136 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 17.4. CPT1CN: Comparator 1 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CPEN CPOUT CPRIF CPFIF CPHYP CPHYN Type RW R RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xBF Table 17.8. CPT1CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CPEN Comparator 1 Enable Bit. 0: Comparator Disabled. 1: Comparator Enabled. 6 CPOUT Comparator 1 Output State Flag. 0: Voltage on CP1P < CP1N. 1: Voltage on CP1P > CP1N. 5 CPRIF Comparator 1 Rising-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator Rising Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator Rising Edge has occurred. 4 CPFIF Comparator 1 Falling-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator Falling Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator Falling Edge has occurred. 3:2 CPHYP Comparator 1 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV. 1:0 CPHYN Comparator 1 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV. Rev. 1.1 137

C8051F85x/86x Register 17.5. CPT1MD: Comparator 1 Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CPLOUT Reserved CPRIE CPFIE Reserved CPMD Type RW R RW RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 SFR Address: 0xAB Table 17.9. CPT1MD Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CPLOUT Comparator 1 Latched Output Flag. This bit represents the comparator output value at the most recent PCA counter overflow. 0: Comparator output was logic low at last PCA overflow. 1: Comparator output was logic high at last PCA overflow. 6 Reserved Must write reset value. 5 CPRIE Comparator 1 Rising-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt enabled. 4 CPFIE Comparator 1 Falling-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt enabled. 3:2 Reserved Must write reset value. 1:0 CPMD Comparator 1 Mode Select. These bits affect the response time and power consumption of the comparator. 00: Mode 0 (Fastest Response Time, Highest Power Consumption) 01: Mode 1 10: Mode 2 11: Mode 3 (Slowest Response Time, Lowest Power Consumption) 138 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 17.6. CPT1MX: Comparator 1 Multiplexer Selection Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CMXN CMXP Type RW RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xAA Table 17.10. CPT1MX Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:4 CMXN Comparator 1 Negative Input MUX Selection. 0000: External pin CP1N.0 0001: External pin CP1N.1 0010: External pin CP1N.2 0011: External pin CP1N.3 0100: External pin CP1N.4 0101: External pin CP1N.5 0110: External pin CP1N.6 0111: External pin CP1N.7 1000: GND 1001-1111: Reserved. 3:0 CMXP Comparator 1 Positive Input MUX Selection. 0000: External pin CP1P.0 0001: External pin CP1P.1 0010: External pin CP1P.2 0011: External pin CP1P.3 0100: External pin CP1P.4 0101: External pin CP1P.5 0110: External pin CP1P.6 0111: External pin CP1P.7 1000: Internal LDO output 1001-1111: Reserved. Rev. 1.1 139

C8051F85x/86x 18. Cyclic Redundancy Check Unit (CRC0) C8051F85x/86x devices include a cyclic redundancy check unit (CRC0) that can perform a CRC using a 16-bit polynomial. CRC0 accepts a stream of 8-bit data written to the CRC0IN register. CRC0 posts the 16- bit result to an internal register. The internal result register may be accessed indirectly using the CRCPNT bits and CRC0DAT register, as shown in Figure 18.1. CRC0 also has a bit reverse register for quick data manipulation. CRC0 8 CRC0IN Automatic Hardware CRC Flash 8 flash read Calculation Memory control Seed Unit (0x0000 or 0xFFFF) 8 8 8 byte-level bit 8 CRC0FLIP reversal CRC0DAT Figure 18.1. CRC0 Block Diagram 18.1. CRC Algorithm The CRC unit generates a CRC result equivalent to the following algorithm: 1. XOR the input with the most-significant bits of the current CRC result. If this is the first iteration of the CRC unit, the current CRC result will be the set initial value (0x0000 or 0xFFFF). 2a. If the MSB of the CRC result is set, shift the CRC result and XOR the result with the selected polynomial. 2b. If the MSB of the CRC result is not set, shift the CRC result. Repeat Steps 2a/2b for the number of input bits (8). The algorithm is also described in the following example. 140 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x The 16-bit CRC algorithm can be described by the following code: unsigned short UpdateCRC (unsigned short CRC_acc, unsigned char CRC_input) { unsigned char i; // loop counter #define POLY 0x1021 // Create the CRC "dividend" for polynomial arithmetic (binary arithmetic // with no carries) CRC_acc = CRC_acc ^ (CRC_input << 8); // "Divide" the poly into the dividend using CRC XOR subtraction // CRC_acc holds the "remainder" of each divide // // Only complete this division for 8 bits since input is 1 byte for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) { // Check if the MSB is set (if MSB is 1, then the POLY can "divide" // into the "dividend") if ((CRC_acc & 0x8000) == 0x8000) { // if so, shift the CRC value, and XOR "subtract" the poly CRC_acc = CRC_acc << 1; CRC_acc ^= POLY; } else { // if not, just shift the CRC value CRC_acc = CRC_acc << 1; } } // Return the final remainder (CRC value) return CRC_acc; } Table 18.1 lists several input values and the associated outputs using the 16-bit CRC algorithm: Table 18.1. Example 16-bit CRC Outputs Input Output 0x63 0xBD35 0x8C 0xB1F4 0x7D 0x4ECA 0xAA, 0xBB, 0xCC 0x6CF6 0x00, 0x00, 0xAA, 0xBB, 0xCC 0xB166 Rev. 1.1 141

C8051F85x/86x 18.2. Preparing for a CRC Calculation To prepare CRC0 for a CRC calculation, software should set the initial value of the result. The polynomial used for the CRC computation is 0x1021. The CRC0 result may be initialized to one of two values: 0x0000 or 0xFFFF. The following steps can be used to initialize CRC0. 1. Select the initial result value (Set CRCVAL to 0 for 0x0000 or 1 for 0xFFFF). 2. Set the result to its initial value (Write 1 to CRCINIT). 18.3. Performing a CRC Calculation Once CRC0 is initialized, the input data stream is sequentially written to CRC0IN, one byte at a time. The CRC0 result is automatically updated after each byte is written. The CRC engine may also be configured to automatically perform a CRC on one or more 256 byte blocks read from flash. The following steps can be used to automatically perform a CRC on flash memory. 1. Prepare CRC0 for a CRC calculation as shown above. 2. Write the index of the starting page to CRC0AUTO. 3. Set the AUTOEN bit to 1 in CRC0AUTO. 4. Write the number of 256 byte blocks to perform in the CRC calculation to CRCCNT. 5. Write any value to CRC0CN (or OR its contents with 0x00) to initiate the CRC calculation. The CPU will not execute code any additional code until the CRC operation completes. See the note in the CRC0CN register definition for more information on how to properly initiate a CRC calculation. 6. Clear the AUTOEN bit in CRC0AUTO. 7. Read the CRC result. 18.4. Accessing the CRC0 Result The internal CRC0 result is 16 bits. The CRCPNT bits select the byte that is targeted by read and write operations on CRC0DAT and increment after each read or write. The calculation result will remain in the internal CR0 result register until it is set, overwritten, or additional data is written to CRC0IN. 18.5. CRC0 Bit Reverse Feature CRC0 includes hardware to reverse the bit order of each bit in a byte as shown in Figure 18.2. Each byte of data written to CRC0FLIP is read back bit reversed. For example, if 0xC0 is written to CRC0FLIP, the data read back is 0x03. Bit reversal is a useful mathematical function used in algorithms such as the FFT. CRC0FLIP (write) CRC0FLIP (read) Figure 18.2. Bit Reversal 142 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 18.6. CRC Control Registers Register 18.1. CRC0CN: CRC0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved CRCINIT CRCVAL Reserved CRCPNT Type R RW RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xCE Table 18.2. CRC0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:4 Reserved Must write reset value. 3 CRCINIT CRC Result Initialization Bit. Writing a 1 to this bit initializes the entire CRC result based on CRCVAL. 2 CRCVAL CRC Set Value Initialization Bit. This bit selects the set value of the CRC result. 0: CRC result is set to 0x0000 on write of 1 to CRCINIT. 1: CRC result is set to 0xFFFF on write of 1 to CRCINIT. 1 Reserved Must write reset value. 0 CRCPNT CRC Result Pointer. Specifies the byte of the CRC result to be read/written on the next access to CRC0DAT. This bit will automatically toggle upon each read or write. 0: CRC0DAT accesses bits 7-0 of the 16-bit CRC result. 1: CRC0DAT accesses bits 15-8 of the 16-bit CRC result. Note: Upon initiation of an automatic CRC calculation, the three cycles following a write to CRC0CN that initiate a CRC operation must only contain instructions which execute in the same number of cycles as the number of bytes in the instruction. An example of such an instruction is a 3-byte MOV that targets the CRC0FLIP register. When programming in C, the dummy value written to CRC0FLIP should be a non-zero value to prevent the compiler from generating a 2- byte MOV instruction. Rev. 1.1 143

C8051F85x/86x Register 18.2. CRC0IN: CRC0 Data Input Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CRC0IN Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xDD Table 18.3. CRC0IN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 CRC0IN CRC Data Input. Each write to CRCIN results in the written data being computed into the existing CRC result according to the CRC algorithm. 144 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 18.3. CRC0DAT: CRC0 Data Output Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CRC0DAT Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xDE Table 18.4. CRC0DAT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 CRC0DAT CRC Data Output. Each read or write performed on CRC0DAT targets the CRC result bits pointed to by the CRC0 Result Pointer (CRC0PNT bits in CRC0CN). Note: CRC0DAT may not be valid for one cycle after setting the CRC0INIT bit in the CRC0CN register to 1. Any time CRC0INIT is written to 1 by firmware, at least one instruction should be performed before reading CRC0DAT. Rev. 1.1 145

C8051F85x/86x Register 18.4. CRC0AUTO: CRC0 Automatic Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name AUTOEN Reserved CRCST Type RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD2 Table 18.5. CRC0AUTO Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 AUTOEN Automatic CRC Calculation Enable. When AUTOEN is set to 1, any write to CRC0CN will initiate an automatic CRC starting at flash sector CRCST and continuing for CRCCNT sectors. 6 Reserved Must write reset value. 5:0 CRCST Automatic CRC Calculation Starting Block. These bits specify the flash block to start the automatic CRC calculation. The starting address of the first flash block included in the automatic CRC calculation is CRCST x block_size, where block_size is 256 bytes. 146 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 18.5. CRC0CNT: CRC0 Automatic Flash Sector Count Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CRCDN Reserved CRCCNT Type R R RW Reset 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD3 Table 18.6. CRC0CNT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CRCDN Automatic CRC Calculation Complete. Set to 0 when a CRC calculation is in progress. Code execution is stopped during a CRC calculation; therefore, reads from firmware will always return 1. 6:5 Reserved Must write reset value. 4:0 CRCCNT Automatic CRC Calculation Block Count. These bits specify the number of flash blocks to include in an automatic CRC calculation. The last address of the last flash block included in the automatic CRC calculation is (CRCST+CRCCNT) x Block Size - 1. The block size is 256 bytes. Rev. 1.1 147

C8051F85x/86x Register 18.6. CRC0FLIP: CRC0 Bit Flip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CRC0FLIP Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xCF Table 18.7. CRC0FLIP Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 CRC0FLIP CRC0 Bit Flip. Any byte written to CRC0FLIP is read back in a bit-reversed order, i.e., the written LSB becomes the MSB. For example: If 0xC0 is written to CRC0FLIP, the data read back will be 0x03. If 0x05 is written to CRC0FLIP, the data read back will be 0xA0. 148 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 19. External Interrupts (INT0 and INT1) The C8051F85x/86x device family includes two external digital interrupt sources (INT0 and INT1), with dedicated interrupt sources (up to 16 additional I/O interrupts are available through the port match function). As is the case on a standard 8051 architecture, certain controls for these two interrupt sources are available in the Timer0/1 registers. Extensions to these controls which provide additional functionality on C8051F85x/86x devices are available in the IT01CF register. INT0 and INT1 are configurable as active high or low, edge- or level-sensitive. The IN0PL and IN1PL bits in the IT01CF register select active high or active low; the IT0 and IT1 bits in TCON select level- or edge-sensitive. The table below lists the possible configurations. IT0 IN0PL INT0 Interrupt IT1 IN1PL INT1 Interrupt 1 0 Active low, edge-sensitive 1 0 Active low, edge-sensitive 1 1 Active high, edge-sensitive 1 1 Active high, edge-sensitive 0 0 Active low, level-sensitive 0 0 Active low, level-sensitive 0 1 Active high, level-sensitive 0 1 Active high, level-sensitive INT0 and INT1 are assigned to port pins as defined in the IT01CF register. Note that INT0 and INT1 port pin assignments are independent of any crossbar assignments. INT0 and INT1 will monitor their assigned port pins without disturbing the peripheral that was assigned the port pin via the crossbar. To assign a port pin only to INT0 and/or INT1, configure the crossbar to skip the selected pin(s). IE0 and IE1 in the TCON register serve as the interrupt-pending flags for the INT0 and INT1 external interrupts, respectively. If an INT0 or INT1 external interrupt is configured as edge-sensitive, the corresponding interrupt-pending flag is automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR. When configured as level sensitive, the interrupt-pending flag remains logic 1 while the input is active as defined by the corresponding polarity bit (IN0PL or IN1PL); the flag remains logic 0 while the input is inactive. The external interrupt source must hold the input active until the interrupt request is recognized. It must then deactivate the interrupt request before execution of the ISR completes or another interrupt request will be generated. Rev. 1.1 149

C8051F85x/86x 19.1. External Interrupt Control Registers Register 19.1. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IN1PL IN1SL IN0PL IN0SL Type RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 SFR Address: 0xE4 Table 19.1. IT01CF Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 IN1PL INT1 Polarity. 0: INT1 input is active low. 1: INT1 input is active high. 6:4 IN1SL INT1 Port Pin Selection Bits. These bits select which Port pin is assigned to INT1. This pin assignment is independent of the Crossbar; INT1 will monitor the assigned port pin without disturbing the peripheral that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin. 000: Select P0.0 001: Select P0.1 010: Select P0.2 011: Select P0.3 100: Select P0.4 101: Select P0.5 110: Select P0.6 111: Select P0.7 3 IN0PL INT0 Polarity. 0: INT0 input is active low. 1: INT0 input is active high. 150 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 19.1. IT01CF Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 2:0 IN0SL INT0 Port Pin Selection Bits. These bits select which Port pin is assigned to INT0. This pin assignment is independent of the Crossbar; INT0 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturbing the peripheral that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin. 000: Select P0.0 001: Select P0.1 010: Select P0.2 011: Select P0.3 100: Select P0.4 101: Select P0.5 110: Select P0.6 111: Select P0.7 Rev. 1.1 151

C8051F85x/86x 20. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) The Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) provides three channels of enhanced timer and PWM functionality while requiring less CPU intervention than standard counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer and three 16-bit capture/compare modules. The counter/timer is driven by a programmable timebase that can select between seven sources: system clock, system clock divided by four, system clock divided by twelve, the external oscillator clock source divided by 8, low frequency oscillator divided by 8, Timer 0 overflows, or an external clock signal on the ECI input pin. Each capture/ compare module may be configured to operate independently in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture, Software Timer, High-Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8 to 11-Bit PWM, or 16-Bit PWM. Additionally, all PWM modes support both center and edge-aligned operation. The external oscillator and LFO oscillator clock options allow the PCA to be clocked by an external oscillator or the LFO while the internal oscillator drives the system clock. Each capture/compare module has its own associated I/O line (CEXn) which is routed through the crossbar to port I/O when enabled. The I/O signals have programmable polarity and Comparator 0 can optionally be used to perform a cycle-by-cycle kill operation on the PCA outputs. A PCA block diagram is shown in Figure 20.1 PCA0 SYSCLK SYSCLK / 4 SYSCLK / 12 Control / Interrupt Timer 0 Overflow PCA Counter Configuration Logic EXTCLK / 8 Sync L-F Oscillator / 8 Sync ECI Sync SYSCLK Channel 2 CEX2 Output Mode Control Channel 1 Drive CEX1 Logic CaptuMroed /e C Coomnptraorle Channel 0 CEX0 CaptuMroed /e C Coomnptraorle Capture / Compare Comparator 0 Output Polarity Select Comparator Clear Enable Figure 20.1. PCA0 Block Diagram 152 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.1. PCA Counter/Timer The 16-bit PCA counter/timer consists of two 8-bit SFRs: PCA0L and PCA0H. PCA0H is the high byte of the 16-bit counter/timer and PCA0L is the low byte. Reading PCA0L automatically latches the value of PCA0H into a “snapshot” register; the following PCA0H read accesses this “snapshot” register. Reading the PCA0L Register first guarantees an accurate reading of the entire 16-bit PCA0 counter. Reading PCA0H or PCA0L does not disturb the counter operation. The CPS2–CPS0 bits in the PCA0MD register select the timebase for the counter/timer as shown in Table 20.1. When the counter/timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Counter Overflow Flag (CF) in PCA0MD is set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CF interrupts are enabled. Setting the ECF bit in PCA0MD to logic 1 enables the CF flag to generate an interrupt request. The CF bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software. Clearing the CIDL bit in the PCA0MD register allows the PCA to continue normal operation while the CPU is in Idle mode. Table 20.1. PCA Timebase Input Options CPS2 CPS1 CPS0 Timebase 0 0 0 System clock divided by 12 0 0 1 System clock divided by 4 0 1 0 Timer 0 overflow 0 1 1 High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided by 4)* 1 0 0 System clock 1 0 1 External oscillator source divided by 8* 1 1 0 Low frequency oscillator divided by 8* 1 1 1 Reserved *Note: Synchronized with the system clock. 20.2. PCA0 Interrupt Sources The PCA0 module shares one interrupt vector among all of its modules. There are are several event flags that can be used to generate a PCA0 interrupt. They are: the main PCA counter overflow flag (CF), which is set upon a 16-bit overflow of the PCA0 counter, an intermediate overflow flag (COVF), which can be set on an overflow from the 8th - 11th bit of the PCA0 counter, and the individual flags for each PCA channel (CCFn), which are set according to the operation mode of that module. These event flags are always set when the trigger condition occurs. Each of these flags can be individually selected to generate a PCA0 interrupt, using the corresponding interrupt enable flag (ECF for CF, ECOV for COVF, and ECCFn for each CCFn). PCA0 interrupts must be globally enabled before any individual interrupt sources are recognized by the processor. PCA0 interrupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit and the EPCA0 bit to logic 1. Rev. 1.1 153

C8051F85x/86x 20.3. Capture/Compare Modules Each module can be configured to operate independently in one of six operation modes: edge-triggered capture, software timer, high-speed output, frequency output, 8 to 11-bit pulse width modulator, or 16-bit pulse width modulator. Table 20.2 summarizes the bit settings in the PCA0CPMn and PCA0PWM registers used to select the PCA capture/compare module’s operating mode. Note that all modules set to use 8-, 9-, 10-, or 11-bit PWM mode must use the same cycle length (8–11 bits). Setting the ECCFn bit in a PCA0CPMn register enables the module's CCFn interrupt. Table 20.2. PCA0CPM and PCA0PWM Bit Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules Operational Mode PCA0CPMn PCA0PWM Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4–3 2–0 Capture triggered by positive edge on CEXn X X 1 0 0 0 0 A 0 X B XX XXX Capture triggered by negative edge on CEXn X X 0 1 0 0 0 A 0 X B XX XXX Capture triggered by any transition on CEXn X X 1 1 0 0 0 A 0 X B XX XXX Software Timer X C 0 0 1 0 0 A 0 X B XX XXX High Speed Output X C 0 0 1 1 0 A 0 X B XX XXX Frequency Output X C 0 0 0 1 1 A 0 X B XX XXX 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7) 0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A 0 X B XX 000 9-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7) 0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A D X B XX 001 10-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7) 0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A D X B XX 010 11-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7) 0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A D X B XX 011 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator 1 C 0 0 E 0 1 A 0 X B XX XXX Notes: 1. X = Don’t Care (no functional difference for individual module if 1 or 0). 2. A = Enable interrupts for this module (PCA interrupt triggered on CCFn set to 1). 3. B = Enable 8th - 11th bit overflow interrupt (Depends on setting of CLSEL). 4. C = When set to 0, the digital comparator is off. For high speed and frequency output modes, the associated pin will not toggle. In any of the PWM modes, this generates a 0% duty cycle (output = 0). 5. D = Selects whether the Capture/Compare register (0) or the Auto-Reload register (1) for the associated channel is accessed via addresses PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn. 6. E = When set, a match event will cause the CCFn flag for the associated channel to be set. 7. All modules set to 8, 9, 10 or 11-bit PWM mode use the same cycle length setting. 20.3.1. Output Polarity The output polarity of each PCA channel is individually selectable using the PCA0POL register. By default, all output channels are configured to drive the PCA output signals (CEXn) with their internal polarity. When the CEXnPOL bit for a specific channel is set to 1, that channel’s output signal will be inverted at the pin. All other properties of the channel are unaffected, and the inversion does not apply to PCA input signals. Note that changes in the PCA0POL register take effect immediately at the associated output pin. 154 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.3.2. Edge-Triggered Capture Mode In this mode, a valid transition on the CEXn pin causes the PCA to capture the value of the PCA counter/ timer and load it into the corresponding module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPLn and PCA0CPHn). The CAPPn and CAPNn bits in the PCA0CPMn register are used to select the type of transition that triggers the capture: low-to-high transition (positive edge), high-to-low transition (negative edge), or either transition (positive or negative edge). When a capture occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software. If both CAPPn and CAPNn bits are set to logic 1, then the state of the Port pin associated with CEXn can be read directly to determine whether a rising-edge or falling-edge caused the capture. CCFn (Interrupt Flag) CAPPn PCA0CPLn PCA0CPHn Capture CEXn CAPNn PCA Clock PCA0L PCA0H Figure 20.2. PCA Capture Mode Diagram Note: The CEXn input signal must remain high or low for at least 2 system clock cycles to be recognized by the hardware. Rev. 1.1 155

C8051F85x/86x 20.3.3. Software Timer (Compare) Mode In Software Timer mode, the PCA counter/timer value is compared to the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software. Setting the ECOMn and MATn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables Software Timer mode. Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/ Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. PCA0CPLn PCA0CPHn MATn (Match Enable) match ECOMn 16-bit Comparator CCFn (Compare Enable) (Interrupt Flag) PCA Clock PCA0L PCA0H Figure 20.3. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram 156 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.3.4. High-Speed Output Mode In High-Speed Output mode, a module’s associated CEXn pin is toggled each time a match occurs between the PCA Counter and the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software. Setting the TOGn, MATn, and ECOMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables the High-Speed Output mode. If ECOMn is cleared, the associated pin will retain its state, and not toggle on the next match event. Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/ Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. PCA0CPLn PCA0CPHn MATn (Match Enable) match ECOMn 16-bit Comparator CCFn (Compare Enable) (Interrupt Flag) Toggle CEXn PCA Clock PCA0L PCA0H TOGn (Toggle Enable) Figure 20.4. PCA High-Speed Output Mode Diagram Rev. 1.1 157

C8051F85x/86x 20.3.5. Frequency Output Mode Frequency Output Mode produces a programmable-frequency square wave on the module’s associated CEXn pin. The capture/compare module high byte holds the number of PCA clocks to count before the output is toggled. The frequency of the square wave is then defined by Equation 20.1. F F = -------------------P---C---A---------------- CEXn 2 PCA0CPHn Note: A value of 0x00 in the PCA0CPHn register is equal to 256 for this equation. Equation 20.1. Square Wave Frequency Output Where F is the frequency of the clock selected by the CPS2–0 bits in the PCA mode register, PCA PCA0MD. The lower byte of the capture/compare module is compared to the PCA counter low byte; on a match, n is toggled and the offset held in the high byte is added to the matched value in PCA0CPLn. Frequency Output Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, TOGn, and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register. Note that the MATn bit should normally be set to 0 in this mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the channel will be set when the 16-bit PCA0 counter and the 16-bit capture/compare register for the channel are equal. PCA0CPLn 8-bit Adder PCA0CPHn Adder Enable Toggle 8-bit match ECOMn CEXn Comparator (Compare Enable) TOGn (Toggle Enable) PCA Clock PCA0L Figure 20.5. PCA Frequency Output Mode 158 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.4. PWM Waveform Generation The PCA can generate edge- or center-aligned PWM waveforms with resolutions of 8, 9, 10, 11 or 16 bits. PWM resolution depends on the module setup, as specified within the individual module PCA0CPMn registers as well as the PCA0PWM register. Modules can be configured for 8-11 bit mode, or for 16-bit mode individually using the PCA0CPMn registers. All modules configured for 8-11 bit mode will have the same resolution, specified by the PCA0PWM register. When operating in one of the PWM modes, each module may be individually configured for center or edge-aligned PWM waveforms. Each channel has a single bit in the PCA0CENT register to select between the two options. 20.4.1. Edge Aligned PWM When configured for edge-aligned mode, a module will generate an edge transition at two points for every 2N PCA clock cycles, where N is the selected PWM resolution in bits. In edge-aligned mode, these two edges are referred to as the “match” and “overflow” edges. The polarity at the output pin is selectable, and can be inverted by setting the appropriate channel bit to ‘1’ in the PCA0POL register. Prior to inversion, a match edge sets the channel to logic high, and an overflow edge clears the channel to logic low. The match edge occurs when the the lowest N bits of the module’s PCA0CPn register match the corresponding bits of the main PCA0 counter register. For example, with 10-bit PWM, the match edge will occur any time bits 9-0 of the PCA0CPn register match bits 9-0 of the PCA0 counter value. The overflow edge occurs when an overflow of the PCA0 counter happens at the desired resolution. For example, with 10-bit PWM, the overflow edge will occur when bits 0-9 of the PCA0 counter transition from all 1’s to all 0’s. All modules configured for edge-aligned mode at the same resolution will align on the overflow edge of the waveforms. An example of the PWM timing in edge-aligned mode for two channels is shown in Figure 20.6. In this example, the CEX0POL and CEX1POL bits are cleared to 0. PCA Clock Counter (PCA0) 0xFFFF 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 Capture / Compare 0x0001 (PCA0CP0) Output (CEX0) match edge Capture / Compare 0x0005 (PCA0CP1) Output (CEX1) overflow edge match edge Figure 20.6. Edge-Aligned PWM Timing For a given PCA resolution, the unused high bits in the PCA0 counter and the PCA0CPn compare registers are ignored, and only the used bits of the PCA0CPn register determine the duty cycle. Equation 20.2 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is cleared to 0. Equation 20.3 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is set to 1. A 0% duty cycle for the channel (with CEXnPOL = 0) is achieved by clearing the module’s ECOM bit to 0. This will Rev. 1.1 159

C8051F85x/86x disable the comparison, and prevent the match edge from occuring. Note that although the PCA0CPn compare register determines the duty cycle, it is not always appropriate for firmware to update this register directly. See the sections on 8 to 11-bit and 16-bit PWM mode for additional details on adjusting duty cycle in the various modes. N 2 –PCA0CPn Duty Cycle = ------------------------------------------ N 2 Equation 20.2. N-bit Edge-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 0 (N = PWM resolution) PCA0CPn Duty Cycle = ------------------------- N 2 Equation 20.3. N-bit Edge-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 0 (N = PWM resolution) 160 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.4.2. Center Aligned PWM When configured for center-aligned mode, a module will generate an edge transition at two points for every 2(N+1) PCA clock cycles, where N is the selected PWM resolution in bits. In center-aligned mode, these two edges are referred to as the “up” and “down” edges. The polarity at the output pin is selectable, and can be inverted by setting the appropriate channel bit to ‘1’ in the PCA0POL register. The generated waveforms are centered about the points where the lower N bits of the PCA0 counter are zero. The (N+1)th bit in the PCA0 counter acts as a selection between up and down edges. In 16-bit mode, a special 17th bit is implemented internally for this purpose. At the center point, the (non-inverted) channel output will be low when the (N+1)th bit is ‘0’ and high when the (N+1)th bit is ‘1’, except for cases of 0% and 100% duty cycle. Prior to inversion, an up edge sets the channel to logic high, and a down edge clears the channel to logic low. Down edges occur when the (N+1)th bit in the PCA0 counter is one, and a logical inversion of the value in the module’s PCA0CPn register matches the main PCA0 counter register for the lowest N bits. For example, with 10-bit PWM, the down edge will occur when the one’s complement of bits 9-0 of the PCA0CPn register match bits 9-0 of the PCA0 counter, and bit 10 of the PCA0 counter is ‘1’. Up edges occur when the (N+1)th bit in the PCA0 counter is zero, and the lowest N bits of the module’s PCA0CPn register match the value of (PCA0 - 1). For example, with 10-bit PWM, the up edge will occur when bits 9-0 of the PCA0CPn register are one less than bits 9-0 of the PCA0 counter, and bit 10 of the PCA0 counter is ‘0’. An example of the PWM timing in center-aligned mode for two channels is shown in Figure 20.7. In this example, the CEX0POL and CEX1POL bits are cleared to 0. center PCA Clock Counter (PCA0L) 0xFB 0xFC 0xFD 0xFE 0xFF 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 Capture / Compare 0x01 (PCA0CPL0) center Output (CEX0) down edge up edge Capture / Compare 0x04 (PCA0CPL1) center Output (CEX1) down edge up edge Figure 20.7. Center-Aligned PWM Timing Rev. 1.1 161

C8051F85x/86x Equation 20.4 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is cleared to 0. Equation 20.5 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is set to 1. The equations are true only when the lowest N bits of the PCA0CPn register are not all 0’s or all 1’s. With CEXnPOL equal to zero, 100% duty cycle is produced when the lowest N bits of PCA0CPn are all 0, and 0% duty cycle is produced when the lowest N bits of PCA0CPn are all 1. For a given PCA resolution, the unused high bits in the PCA0 counter and the PCA0CPn compare registers are ignored, and only the used bits of the PCA0CPn register determine the duty cycle. Note that although the PCA0CPn compare register determines the duty cycle, it is not always appropriate for firmware to update this register directly. See the sections on 8 to 11-bit and 16-bit PWM mode for additional details on adjusting duty cycle in the various modes. N 1 2 –PCA0CPn– --- 2 Duty Cycle = --------------------------------------------------- N 2 Equation 20.4. N-bit Center-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 0 (N = PWM resolution) 1 PCA0CPn + --- 2 Duty Cycle = ---------------------------------- N 2 Equation 20.5. N-bit Center-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 1 (N = PWM resolution) 162 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.4.3. 8 to11-bit Pulse Width Modulator Modes Each module can be used independently to generate a pulse width modulated (PWM) output on its associated CEXn pin. The frequency of the output is dependent on the timebase for the PCA counter/timer, and the setting of the PWM cycle length (8 through 11-bits). For backwards-compatibility with the 8-bit PWM mode available on other devices, the 8-bit PWM mode operates slightly different than 9 through 11- bit PWM modes. It is important to note that all channels configured for 8 to 11-bit PWM mode will use the same cycle length. It is not possible to configure one channel for 8-bit PWM mode and another for 11-bit mode (for example). However, other PCA channels can be configured to Pin Capture, High-Speed Output, Software Timer, Frequency Output, or 16-bit PWM mode independently. Each channel configured for a PWM mode can be individually selected to operate in edge-aligned or center-aligned mode. 20.4.3.1. 8-bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode In 8-bit PWM mode, the duty cycle is determined by the value of the low byte of the PCA0CPn register (PCA0CPLn). To adjust the duty cycle, PCA0CPLn should not normally be written directly. Instead, it is recommended to adjust the duty cycle using the high byte of the PCA0CPn register (register PCA0CPHn). This allows seamless updating of the PWM waveform, as PCA0CPLn is reloaded automatically with the value stored in PCA0CPHn during the overflow edge (in edge-aligned mode) or the up edge (in center- aligned mode). Setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register, and setting the CLSEL bits in register PCA0PWM to 00b enables 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs. The COVF flag in PCA0PWM can be used to detect the overflow (falling edge), which will occur every 256 PCA clock cycles. 20.4.3.2. 9 to 11-bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode In 9 to 11-bit PWM mode, the duty cycle is determined by the value of the least significant N bits of the PCA0CPn register, where N is the selected PWM resolution. To adjust the duty cycle, PCA0CPn should not normally be written directly. Instead, it is recommended to adjust the duty cycle by writing to an “Auto-Reload” register, which is dual-mapped into the PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn register locations. The data written to define the duty cycle should be right-justified in the registers. The auto-reload registers are accessed (read or written) when the bit ARSEL in PCA0PWM is set to 1. The capture/compare registers are accessed when ARSEL is set to 0. This allows seamless updating of the PWM waveform, as the PCA0CPn register is reloaded automatically with the value stored in the auto-reload registers during the overflow edge (in edge-aligned mode) or the up edge (in center- aligned mode). Setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register, and setting the CLSEL bits in register PCA0PWM to 00b enables 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs. The COVF flag in PCA0PWM can be used to detect the overflow or down edge. The 9 to 11-bit PWM mode is selected by setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register, and setting the CLSEL bits in register PCA0PWM to the desired cycle length (other than 8-bits). If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs. The COVF flag in PCA0PWM can be used to detect the overflow or down edge. Important Note About PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0CPn registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. Rev. 1.1 163

C8051F85x/86x 20.4.4. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode A PCA module may also be operated in 16-Bit PWM mode. 16-bit PWM mode is independent of the other (8 through 11-bit) PWM modes. The entire PCA0CP register is used to determine the duty cycle in 16-bit PWM mode. To output a varying duty cycle, new value writes should be synchronized with the PCA CCFn match flag to ensure seamless updates. 16-Bit PWM mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, PWMn, and PWM16n bits in the PCA0CPMn register. For a varying duty cycle, the match interrupt flag should be enabled (ECCFn = 1 AND MATn = 1) to help synchronize the capture/compare register writes. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs. The CF flag in PCA0CN can be used to detect the overflow or down edge. Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/ Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. 164 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.5. Comparator Clear Function In 8/9/10/11/16-bit PWM modes, the comparator clear function utilizes the Comparator0 output synchronized to the system clock to clear CEXn to logic low for the current PWM cycle. This comparator clear function can be enabled for each PWM channel by setting the CPCEn bits to 1 in the PCA0CLR SFR. When the comparator clear function is disabled, CEXn is unaffected. The asynchronous Comparator 0 output is logic high when the voltage of CP0+ is greater than CP0- and logic low when the voltage of CP0+ is less than CP0-. The polarity of the Comparator 0 output is used to clear CEXn as follows: when CPCPOL = 0, CEXn is cleared on the falling edge of the Comparator0 output (see Figure 20.8); when CPCPOL = 1, CEXn is cleared on the rising edge of the Comparator0 output (see Figure 20.9). CEXn (CPCEn = 0) Comparator0 Output (CPCPOL = 0) CEXn (CPCEn = 1) Figure 20.8. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 0 CEXn (CPCEn = 0) Comparator0 Output (CPCPOL = 1) CEXn (CPCEn = 1) Figure 20.9. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 1 In the PWM cycle following the current cycle, should the Comparator 0 output remain logic low when CPCPOL = 0 or logic high when CPCPOL = 1, CEXn will continue to be cleared. See Figure 20.10 and Figure 20.11. CEXn (CPCEn = 0) Comparator0 Output (CPCPOL = 0) CEXn (CPCEn = 1) Figure 20.10. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 0 Rev. 1.1 165

C8051F85x/86x CEXn (CPCEn = 0) Comparator0 Output (CPCPOL = 1) CEXn (CPCEn = 1) Figure 20.11. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 1 166 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 20.6. PCA Control Registers Register 20.1. PCA0CN: PCA Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CF CR Reserved CCF2 CCF1 CCF0 Type RW RW R RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD8 (bit-addressable) Table 20.3. PCA0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CF PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the PCA Counter/Timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hard- ware and must be cleared by software. 6 CR PCA Counter/Timer Run Control. This bit enables/disables the PCA Counter/Timer. 0: PCA Counter/Timer disabled. 1: PCA Counter/Timer enabled. 5:3 Reserved Must write reset value. 2 CCF2 PCA Module 2 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF2 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 1 CCF1 PCA Module 1 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF1 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 0 CCF0 PCA Module 0 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. Rev. 1.1 167

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.2. PCA0MD: PCA Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CIDL Reserved CPS ECF Type RW R RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD9 Table 20.4. PCA0MD Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CIDL PCA Counter/Timer Idle Control. Specifies PCA behavior when CPU is in Idle Mode. 0: PCA continues to function normally while the system controller is in Idle Mode. 1: PCA operation is suspended while the system controller is in Idle Mode. 6:4 Reserved Must write reset value. 3:1 CPS PCA Counter/Timer Pulse Select. These bits select the timebase source for the PCA counter. 000: System clock divided by 12. 001: System clock divided by 4. 010: Timer 0 overflow. 011: High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided by 4). 100: System clock. 101: External clock divided by 8 (synchronized with the system clock). 110: Low frequency oscillator divided by 8. 111: Reserved. 0 ECF PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable. This bit sets the masking of the PCA Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt. 0: Disable the CF interrupt. 1: Enable a PCA Counter/Timer Overflow interrupt request when CF (PCA0CN.7) is set. 168 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.3. PCA0PWM: PCA PWM Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ARSEL ECOV COVF Reserved CLSEL Type RW RW RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xF7 Table 20.5. PCA0PWM Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 ARSEL Auto-Reload Register Select. This bit selects whether to read and write the normal PCA capture/compare registers (PCA0CPn), or the Auto-Reload registers at the same SFR addresses. This function is used to define the reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM modes. In all other modes, the Auto- Reload registers have no function. 0: Read/Write Capture/Compare Registers at PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn. 1: Read/Write Auto-Reload Registers at PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn. 6 ECOV Cycle Overflow Interrupt Enable. This bit sets the masking of the Cycle Overflow Flag (COVF) interrupt. 0: COVF will not generate PCA interrupts. 1: A PCA interrupt will be generated when COVF is set. 5 COVF Cycle Overflow Flag. This bit indicates an overflow of the 8th to 11th bit of the main PCA counter (PCA0). The specific bit used for this flag depends on the setting of the Cycle Length Select bits. The bit can be set by hardware or software, but must be cleared by software. 0: No overflow has occurred since the last time this bit was cleared. 1: An overflow has occurred since the last time this bit was cleared. 4:3 Reserved Must write reset value. 2:0 CLSEL Cycle Length Select. When 16-bit PWM mode is not selected, these bits select the length of the PWM cycle. This affects all channels configured for PWM which are not using 16-bit PWM mode. These bits are ignored for individual channels configured to16-bit PWM mode. 000: 8 bits. 001: 9 bits. 010: 10 bits. 011: 11 bits. 100-111: Reserved. Rev. 1.1 169

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.4. PCA0CLR: PCA Comparator Clear Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CPCPOL Reserved CPCE2 CPCE1 CPCE0 Type RW R RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x9C Table 20.6. PCA0CLR Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 CPCPOL Comparator Clear Polarity. Selects the polarity of the comparator result that will clear the PCA channel(s). 0: PCA channel(s) will be cleared when comparator result goes logic low. 1: PCA channel(s) will be cleared when comparator result goes logic high. 6:3 Reserved Must write reset value. 2 CPCE2 Comparator Clear Enable for CEX2. Enables the comparator clear function on PCA channel 2. 1 CPCE1 Comparator Clear Enable for CEX1. Enables the comparator clear function on PCA channel 1. 0 CPCE0 Comparator Clear Enable for CEX0. Enables the comparator clear function on PCA channel 0. 170 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.5. PCA0CPM0: PCA Capture/Compare Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PWM16 ECOM CAPP CAPN MAT TOG PWM ECCF Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xDA Table 20.7. PCA0CPM0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 PWM16 16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable. This bit enables 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled. 0: 8 to 11-bit PWM selected. 1: 16-bit PWM selected. 6 ECOM Comparator Function Enable. This bit enables the comparator function. 5 CAPP Capture Positive Function Enable. This bit enables the positive edge capture capability. 4 CAPN Capture Negative Function Enable. This bit enables the negative edge capture capability. 3 MAT Match Function Enable. This bit enables the match function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the CCF0 bit in the PCA0MD register to be set to logic 1. 2 TOG Toggle Function Enable. This bit enables the toggle function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with the capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEX0 pin to toggle. If the PWM bit is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode. 1 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable. This bit enables the PWM function. When enabled, a pulse width modulated signal is out- put on the CEX0 pin. 8 to 11-bit PWM is used if PWM16 is cleared; 16-bit mode is used if PWM16 is set to logic 1. If the TOG bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode. 0 ECCF Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable. This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCF0) interrupt. 0: Disable CCF0 interrupts. 1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCF0 is set. Rev. 1.1 171

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.6. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0L Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xF9 Table 20.8. PCA0L Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0L PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte. The PCA0L register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer. 172 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.7. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0H Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xFA Table 20.9. PCA0H Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0H PCA Counter/Timer High Byte. The PCA0H register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer. Reads of this register will read the contents of a snapshot register, whose contents are updated only when the contents of PCA0L are read. Rev. 1.1 173

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.8. PCA0CPL0: PCA Capture Module Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPL0 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xFB Table 20.10. PCA0CPL0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPL0 PCA Capture Module Low Byte. The PCA0CPL0 register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This reg- ister address also allows access to the low byte of the corresponding PCA channels auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM con- trols which register is accessed. Note: A write to this register will clear the module’s ECOM bit to a 0. 174 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.9. PCA0CPH0: PCA Capture Module High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPH0 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xFC Table 20.11. PCA0CPH0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPH0 PCA Capture Module High Byte. The PCA0CPH0 register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This register address also allows access to the high byte of the corresponding PCA channels auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM con- trols which register is accessed. Note: A write to this register will set the module’s ECOM bit to a 1. Rev. 1.1 175

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.10. PCA0POL: PCA Output Polarity Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved CEX2POL CEX1POL CEX0POL Type R RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x96 Table 20.12. PCA0POL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:3 Reserved Must write reset value. 2 CEX2POL CEX2 Output Polarity. Selects the polarity of the CEX2 output channel. When this bit is modified, the change takes effect at the pin immediately. 0: Use default polarity. 1: Invert polarity. 1 CEX1POL CEX1 Output Polarity. Selects the polarity of the CEX1 output channel. When this bit is modified, the change takes effect at the pin immediately. 0: Use default polarity. 1: Invert polarity. 0 CEX0POL CEX0 Output Polarity. Selects the polarity of the CEX0 output channel. When this bit is modified, the change takes effect at the pin immediately. 0: Use default polarity. 1: Invert polarity. 176 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.11. PCA0CENT: PCA Center Alignment Enable Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved CEX2CEN CEX1CEN CEX0CEN Type R RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x9E Table 20.13. PCA0CENT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:3 Reserved Must write reset value. 2 CEX2CEN CEX2 Center Alignment Enable. Selects the alignment properties of the CEX2 output channel when operated in any of the PWM modes. This bit does not affect the operation of non-PWM modes. 0: Edge-aligned. 1: Center-aligned. 1 CEX1CEN CEX1 Center Alignment Enable. Selects the alignment properties of the CEX1 output channel when operated in any of the PWM modes. This bit does not affect the operation of non-PWM modes. 0: Edge-aligned. 1: Center-aligned. 0 CEX0CEN CEX0 Center Alignment Enable. Selects the alignment properties of the CEX0 output channel when operated in any of the PWM modes. This bit does not affect the operation of non-PWM modes. 0: Edge-aligned. 1: Center-aligned. Rev. 1.1 177

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.12. PCA0CPM1: PCA Capture/Compare Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PWM16 ECOM CAPP CAPN MAT TOG PWM ECCF Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xDB Table 20.14. PCA0CPM1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 PWM16 16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable. This bit enables 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled. 0: 8 to 11-bit PWM selected. 1: 16-bit PWM selected. 6 ECOM Comparator Function Enable. This bit enables the comparator function. 5 CAPP Capture Positive Function Enable. This bit enables the positive edge capture capability. 4 CAPN Capture Negative Function Enable. This bit enables the negative edge capture capability. 3 MAT Match Function Enable. This bit enables the match function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the CCF1 bit in the PCA0MD register to be set to logic 1. 2 TOG Toggle Function Enable. This bit enables the toggle function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with the capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEX1 pin to toggle. If the PWM bit is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode. 1 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable. This bit enables the PWM function. When enabled, a pulse width modulated signal is out- put on the CEX1 pin. 8 to 11-bit PWM is used if PWM16 is cleared; 16-bit mode is used if PWM16 is set to logic 1. If the TOG bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode. 0 ECCF Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable. This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCF1) interrupt. 0: Disable CCF1 interrupts. 1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCF1 is set. 178 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.13. PCA0CPM2: PCA Capture/Compare Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PWM16 ECOM CAPP CAPN MAT TOG PWM ECCF Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xDC Table 20.15. PCA0CPM2 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 PWM16 16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable. This bit enables 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled. 0: 8 to 11-bit PWM selected. 1: 16-bit PWM selected. 6 ECOM Comparator Function Enable. This bit enables the comparator function. 5 CAPP Capture Positive Function Enable. This bit enables the positive edge capture capability. 4 CAPN Capture Negative Function Enable. This bit enables the negative edge capture capability. 3 MAT Match Function Enable. This bit enables the match function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the CCF2 bit in the PCA0MD register to be set to logic 1. 2 TOG Toggle Function Enable. This bit enables the toggle function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with the capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEX2 pin to toggle. If the PWM bit is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode. 1 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable. This bit enables the PWM function. When enabled, a pulse width modulated signal is out- put on the CEX2 pin. 8 to 11-bit PWM is used if PWM16 is cleared; 16-bit mode is used if PWM16 is set to logic 1. If the TOG bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode. 0 ECCF Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable. This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCF2) interrupt. 0: Disable CCF2 interrupts. 1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCF2 is set. Rev. 1.1 179

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.14. PCA0CPL1: PCA Capture Module Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPL1 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xE9 Table 20.16. PCA0CPL1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPL1 PCA Capture Module Low Byte. The PCA0CPL1 register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This reg- ister address also allows access to the low byte of the corresponding PCA channels auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM con- trols which register is accessed. Note: A write to this register will clear the modules ECOM bit to a 0. 180 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.15. PCA0CPH1: PCA Capture Module High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPH1 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xEA Table 20.17. PCA0CPH1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPH1 PCA Capture Module High Byte. The PCA0CPH1 register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This register address also allows access to the high byte of the corresponding PCA channels auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM con- trols which register is accessed. Note: A write to this register will set the modules ECOM bit to a 1. Rev. 1.1 181

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.16. PCA0CPL2: PCA Capture Module Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPL2 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xEB Table 20.18. PCA0CPL2 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPL2 PCA Capture Module Low Byte. The PCA0CPL2 register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This reg- ister address also allows access to the low byte of the corresponding PCA channels auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM con- trols which register is accessed. Note: A write to this register will clear the modules ECOM bit to a 0. 182 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 20.17. PCA0CPH2: PCA Capture Module High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPH2 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xEC Table 20.19. PCA0CPH2 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPH2 PCA Capture Module High Byte. The PCA0CPH2 register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This register address also allows access to the high byte of the corresponding PCA channels auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM con- trols which register is accessed. Note: A write to this register will set the modules ECOM bit to a 1. Rev. 1.1 183

C8051F85x/86x 21. Port I/O (Port 0, Port 1, Port 2, Crossbar, and Port Match) Digital and analog resources on the C8051F85x/86x family are externally available on the device’s multi- purpose I/O pins. Port pins P0.0-P1.7 can be defined as general-purpose I/O (GPIO), assigned to one of the internal digital resources through the crossbar, or assigned to an analog function. Port pins P2.0 and P2.1 can be used as GPIO. Port pin P2.0 is shared with the C2 Interface Data signal (C2D). The designer has complete control over which functions are assigned, limited only by the number of physical I/O pins. This resource assignment flexibility is achieved through the use of a priority crossbar decoder. Note that the state of a port I/O pin can always be read in the corresponding port latch, regardless of the crossbar settings. The crossbar assigns the selected internal digital resources to the I/O pins based on the Priority Decoder (Figure 21.2 and Figure 21.3). The registers XBR0, XBR1 and XBR2 are used to select internal digital functions. The port I/O cells are configured as either push-pull or open-drain in the Port Output Mode registers (PnMDOUT, where n = 0,1). Additionally, each bank of port pins (P0, P1, and P2) has two selectable drive strength settings. 2 P0.0 / VREF UART0 Priority Crossbar P0.1 / AGND Port 0 4 Decoder P0.2 SPI0 Control P0.3 / EXTCLK & P0.4 2 P0.5 SMBus0 Config P0.6 / CNVSTR 2 P0.7 CMP0 Out 2 P1.0 CMP1 Out Port 1 P1.1 P1.2 1 Control P1.3 SYSCLK & P1.4 3 Config P1.5 PCA (CEXn) ADC0 In P1.6 P1.7 1 PCA (ECI) CMP0/1 In 1 Port 2 Timer 0 Port Match Control P2.0 / C2D 1 & P2.1 Timer 1 INT0 / INT1 Config 1 Timer 2 Figure 21.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram 184 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 21.1. General Port I/O Initialization Port I/O initialization consists of the following steps: 1. Select the input mode (analog or digital) for all port pins, using the Port Input Mode register (PnMDIN). 2. Select the output mode (open-drain or push-pull) for all port pins, using the Port Output Mode register (PnMDOUT). 3. Select any pins to be skipped by the I/O crossbar using the Port Skip registers (PnSKIP). 4. Assign port pins to desired peripherals. 5. Enable the crossbar (XBARE = ‘1’). All port pins must be configured as either analog or digital inputs. Any pins to be used as Comparator or ADC inputs should be configured as an analog inputs. When a pin is configured as an analog input, its weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver are disabled. This process saves power and reduces noise on the analog input. Pins configured as digital inputs may still be used by analog peripherals; however this practice is not recommended. Additionally, all analog input pins should be configured to be skipped by the crossbar (accomplished by setting the associated bits in PnSKIP). Port input mode is set in the PnMDIN register, where a ‘1’ indicates a digital input, and a ‘0’ indicates an analog input. All pins default to digital inputs on reset. The output driver characteristics of the I/O pins are defined using the Port Output Mode registers (PnMDOUT). Each port output driver can be configured as either open drain or push-pull. This selection is required even for the digital resources selected in the XBRn registers, and is not automatic. The only exception to this is the SMBus (SDA, SCL) pins, which are configured as open-drain regardless of the PnMDOUT settings. When the WEAKPUD bit in XBR1 is ‘0’, a weak pullup is enabled for all Port I/O configured as open-drain. WEAKPUD does not affect the push-pull Port I/O. Furthermore, the weak pullup is turned off on an output that is driving a ‘0’ to avoid unnecessary power dissipation. Registers XBR0 and XBR1 must be loaded with the appropriate values to select the digital I/O functions required by the design. Setting the XBARE bit in XBR2 to ‘1’ enables the crossbar. Until the crossbar is enabled, the external pins remain as standard port I/O (in input mode), regardless of the XBRn Register settings. For given XBRn Register settings, one can determine the I/O pin-out using the Priority Decode Table; as an alternative, Silicon Labs provides configuration utility software to determine the port I/O pin- assignments based on the crossbar register settings. The crossbar must be enabled to use port pins as standard port I/O in output mode. Port output drivers of all crossbar pins are disabled whenever the crossbar is disabled. Rev. 1.1 185

C8051F85x/86x 21.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog and Digital Functions Port I/O pins can be assigned to various analog, digital, and external interrupt functions. The port pins assigned to analog functions should be configured for analog I/O, and port pins assigned to digital or external interrupt functions should be configured for digital I/O. 21.2.1. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog Functions Table 21.1 shows all available analog functions that require port I/O assignments. Table 21.1 shows the potential mapping of port I/O to each analog function. Table 21.1. Port I/O Assignment for Analog Functions Analog Function Potentially Assignable SFR(s) used for Port Pins Assignment ADC Input P0.0 - P1.7 ADC0MX, PnSKIP, PnMDIN Comparator0 Input P0.0 - P1.7 CPT0MX, PnSKIP, PnMDIN Comparator1 Input P0.0 - P1.7 CPT1MX, PnSKIP, PnMDIN Voltage Reference (VREF) P0.0 REF0CN, PnSKIP, PnMDIN Reference Ground (AGND) P0.1 REF0CN, PnSKIP, PnMDIN 21.2.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Digital Functions Any port pins not assigned to analog functions may be assigned to digital functions or used as GPIO. Most digital functions rely on the crossbar for pin assignment; however, some digital functions bypass the crossbar in a manner similar to the analog functions listed above. Table 21.2 shows all digital functions available through the crossbar and the potential mapping of port I/O to each function. Table 21.2. Port I/O Assignment for Digital Functions Digital Function Potentially Assignable Port Pins SFR(s) Used for Assignment UART0, SPI0, SMBus0, CP0, CP0A, Any port pin available for assignment by the XBR0, XBR1, XBR2 CP1, CP1A, SYSCLK, PCA0 (CEX0- crossbar. This includes P0.0 - P1.7 pins which 2 and ECI), T0, T1 or T2. have their PnSKIP bit set to ‘0’. Note: The crossbar will always assign UART0 pins to P0.4 and P0.5. Any pin used for GPIO P0.0 - P2.1 P0SKIP, P1SKIP, P2SKIP 186 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 21.2.3. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Fixed Digital Functions Fixed digital functions include external clock input as well as external event trigger functions, which can be used to trigger events such as an ADC conversion, fire an interrupt or wake the device from idle mode when a transition occurs on a digital I/O pin. The fixed digital functions do not require dedicated pins and will function on both GPIO pins and pins in use by the crossbar. Fixed digital functions cannot be used on pins configured for analog I/O. Table 21.3 shows all available fixed digital functions and the potential mapping of port I/O to each function. Table 21.3. Port I/O Assignment for Fixed Digital Functions Function Potentially Assignable Port Pins SFR(s) used for Assignment External Interrupt 0 P0.0 - P0.7 IT01CF External Interrupt 1 P0.0 - P0.7 IT01CF Conversion Start (CNVSTR) P0.6 ADC0CN External Clock Input (EXTCLK) P0.3 OSCXCN Port Match P0.0 - P1.7 P0MASK, P0MAT P1MASK, P1MAT Rev. 1.1 187

C8051F85x/86x 21.3. Priority Crossbar Decoder The priority crossbar decoder assigns a priority to each I/O function, starting at the top with UART0. When a digital resource is selected, the least-significant unassigned port pin is assigned to that resource (excluding UART0, which is always at pins P0.4 and P0.5). If a port pin is assigned, the crossbar skips that pin when assigning the next selected resource. Additionally, the crossbar will skip port pins whose associated bits in the PnSKIP registers are set. The PnSKIP registers allow software to skip port pins that are to be used for analog input, dedicated functions, or GPIO. Important Note on Crossbar Configuration: If a port pin is claimed by a peripheral without use of the crossbar, its corresponding PnSKIP bit should be set. This applies to P0.0 if VREF is used, P0.1 if AGND is used, P0.3 if the EXTCLK input is enabled, P0.6 if the ADC is configured to use the external conversion start signal (CNVSTR), and any selected ADC or comparator inputs. The crossbar skips selected pins as if they were already assigned, and moves to the next unassigned pin. Figure 21.2 shows all of the potential peripheral-to-pin assignments available to the crossbar. Note that this does not mean any peripheral can always be assigned to the highlighted pins. The actual pin assignments are determined by the priority of the enabled peripherals. Port P0 P1 P2 Pin Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 SQOFINC--2106 PPaacckkaaggee VREF XTCLK NVSTR N/A N/A N/A N/A C2D N/A E C QSOP-24 Package UART0-TX UART0-RX SPI0-SCK SPI0-MISO SPI0-MOSI SPI0-NSS* SMB0-SDA ar SMB0-SCL sb s CMP0-CP0 Cro CMP0-CP0A n o CMP1-CP1 e bl CMP1-CP1A aila SYSCLK Av PCA0-CEX0 ot N PCA0-CEX1 s n PCA0-CEX2 Pi PCA0-ECI Timer0-T0 Timer1-T1 Timer2-T2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pin Skip Settings P0SKIP P1SKIP The crossbar peripherals are assigned in priority order from top to bottom. These boxes represent Port pins which can potentially be assigned to a peripheral. Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar. When these signals are enabled, the Crossbar should be manually configured to skip the corresponding port pins. Pins can be “skipped” by setting the corresponding bit in PnSKIP to 1. * NSS is only pinned out when the SPI is in 4-wire mode. Figure 21.2. Crossbar Priority Decoder - Possible Pin Assignments 188 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Registers XBR0, XBR1 and XBR2 are used to assign the digital I/O resources to the physical I/O port pins. Note that when the SMBus is selected, the crossbar assigns both pins associated with the SMBus (SDA and SCL); when UART0 is selected, the crossbar assigns both pins associated with UART0 (TX and RX). UART0 pin assignments are fixed for bootloading purposes: UART0 TX is always assigned to P0.4; UART0 RX is always assigned to P0.5. Standard port I/Os appear contiguously after the prioritized functions have been assigned. Figure 21.3 shows an example of the resulting pin assignments of the device with UART0 and SPI0 enabled and the EXTCLK (P0.3) pin skipped (P0SKIP = 0x08). UART0 is the highest priority and it will be assigned first. The UART0 pins can only appear on P0.4 and P0.5, so that is where it is assigned. The next-highest enabled peripheral is SPI0. P0.0, P0.1 and P0.2 are free, so SPI0 takes these three pins. The fourth pin, NSS, is routed to P0.6 because P0.3 is skipped and P0.4 and P0.5 are already occupied by the UART. The other pins on the device are available for use as general-purpose digital I/O or analog functions. Port P0 P1 P2 Pin Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 SQOFINC--2106 PPaacckkaaggee VREF XTCLK NVSTR N/A N/A N/A N/A C2D N/A E C QSOP-24 Package UART0-TX UART0-RX SPI0-SCK SPI0-MISO SPI0-MOSI SPI0-NSS* SMB0-SDA ar SMB0-SCL sb s CMP0-CP0 Cro CMP0-CP0A n o CMP1-CP1 e bl CMP1-CP1A aila SYSCLK Av PCA0-CEX0 ot N PCA0-CEX1 s n PCA0-CEX2 Pi PCA0-ECI Timer0-T0 Timer1-T1 Timer2-T2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pin Skip Settings P0SKIP P1SKIP The crossbar peripherals are assigned in priority order from top to bottom. These boxes represent Port pins which can potentially be assigned to a peripheral. Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar. When these signals are enabled, the Crossbar should be manually configured to skip the corresponding port pins. Pins can be “skipped” by setting the corresponding bit in PnSKIP to 1. * NSS is only pinned out when the SPI is in 4-wire mode. Figure 21.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder Example Rev. 1.1 189

C8051F85x/86x Note: The SPI can be operated in either 3-wire or 4-wire modes, pending the state of the NSSMD1– NSSMD0 bits in register SPI0CN. According to the SPI mode, the NSS signal may or may not be routed to a port pin. The order in which SMBus pins are assigned is defined by the SWAP bit in the SMB0TC register. 190 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 21.4. Port I/O Modes of Operation Port pins are configured by firmware as digital or analog I/O using the PnMDIN registers. On reset, all port I/O cells default to a high impedance state with weak pull-ups enabled. Until the crossbar is enabled, both the high and low port I/O drive circuits are explicitly disabled on all crossbar pins. Port pins configured as digital I/O may still be used by analog peripherals; however, this practice is not recommended and may result in measurement errors. 21.4.1. Configuring Port Pins For Analog Modes Any pins to be used for analog functions should be configured for analog mode. When a pin is configured for analog I/O, its weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver are disabled. Port pins configured for analog functions will always read back a value of ‘0’ in the corresponding Pn Port Latch register. To configure a pin as analog, the following steps should be taken: 1. Clear the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDIN register to ‘0’. This selects analog mode for the pin. 2. Set the bit associated with the pin in the Pn register to ‘1’. 3. Skip the bit associated with the pin in the PnSKIP register to ensure the crossbar does not attempt to assign a function to the pin. 21.4.2. Configuring Port Pins For Digital Modes Any pins to be used by digital peripherals or as GPIO should be configured as digital I/O (PnMDIN.n = ‘1’). For digital I/O pins, one of two output modes (push-pull or open-drain) must be selected using the PnMDOUT registers. Push-pull outputs (PnMDOUT.n = ‘1’) drive the port pad to the supply rails based on the output logic value of the port pin. Open-drain outputs have the high side driver disabled; therefore, they only drive the port pad to the low-side rail when the output logic value is ‘0’ and become high impedance inputs (both high low drivers turned off) when the output logic value is ‘1’. When a digital I/O cell is placed in the high impedance state, a weak pull-up transistor pulls the port pad to the high-side rail to ensure the digital input is at a defined logic state. Weak pull-ups are disabled when the I/O cell is driven low to minimize power consumption, and they may be globally disabled by setting WEAKPUD to ‘1’. The user should ensure that digital I/O are always internally or externally pulled or driven to a valid logic state to minimize power consumption. Port pins configured for digital I/O always read back the logic state of the port pad, regardless of the output logic value of the port pin. To configure a pin as digital input: 1. Set the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDIN register to ‘1’. This selects digital mode for the pin. 2. Clear the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDOUT register to ‘0’. This configures the pin as open-drain. 3. Set the bit associated with the pin in the Pn register to ‘1’. This tells the output driver to “drive” logic high. Because the pin is configured as open-drain, the high-side driver is not active, and the pin may be used as an input. Open-drain outputs are configured exactly as digital inputs. However, the pin may be driven low by an assigned peripheral, or by writing ‘0’ to the associated bit in the Pn register if the signal is a GPIO. To configure a pin as a digital, push-pull output: 1. Set the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDIN register to ‘1’. This selects digital mode for the pin. 2. Set the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDOUT register to ‘1’. This configures the pin as push- pull. If a digital pin is to be used as a general-purpose I/O, or with a digital function that is not part of the crossbar, the bit associated with the pin in the PnSKIP register can be set to ‘1’ to ensure the crossbar does not attempt to assign a function to the pin. Rev. 1.1 191

C8051F85x/86x 21.4.3. Port Drive Strength Port drive strength can be controlled on a port-by-port basis using the PRTDRV register. Each port has a bit in PRTDRV to select the high or low drive strength setting for all pins on that port. By default, all ports are configured for high drive strength. WEAKPUD (Weak Pull-Up Disable) PxMDOUT.x (1 for push-pull) VDD VDD (0 for open-drain) XBARE (WEAK) (Crossbar Enable) PORT Px.x – Output PAD Logic Value (Port Latch or Crossbar) PxMDIN.x GND (1 for digital) (0 for analog) To/From Analog Peripheral Px.x – Input Logic Value (Reads 0 when pin is configured as an analog I/O) Figure 21.4. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram 21.5. Port Match Port match functionality allows system events to be triggered by a logic value change on one or more port I/O pins. A software controlled value stored in the PnMATCH registers specifies the expected or normal logic values of the associated port pins (for example, P0MATCH.0 would correspond to P0.0). A port mismatch event occurs if the logic levels of the port’s input pins no longer match the software controlled value. This allows software to be notified if a certain change or pattern occurs on the input pins regardless of the XBRn settings. The PnMASK registers can be used to individually select which pins should be compared against the PnMATCH registers. A port mismatch event is generated if (Pn & PnMASK) does not equal (PnMATCH & PnMASK) for all ports with a PnMAT and PnMASK register. A port mismatch event may be used to generate an interrupt or wake the device from idle mode. See the interrupts and power options chapters for more details on interrupt and wake-up sources. 21.6. Direct Read/Write Access to Port I/O Pins All port I/O are accessed through corresponding special function registers (SFRs) that are both byte addressable and bit addressable. When writing to a port, the value written to the SFR is latched to maintain the output data value at each pin. When reading, the logic levels of the port's input pins are returned regardless of the XBRn settings (i.e., even when the pin is assigned to another signal by the crossbar, the port register can always read its corresponding port I/O pin). The exception to this is the execution of the read-modify-write instructions that target a Port Latch register as the destination. The read-modify-write instructions when operating on a port SFR are the following: ANL, ORL, XRL, JBC, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ and MOV, CLR or SETB, when the destination is an individual bit in a port SFR. For these instructions, the value of the latch register (not the pin) is read, modified, and written back to the SFR. 192 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 21.7. Port I/O and Pin Configuration Control Registers Register 21.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SYSCKE CP1AE CP1E CP0AE CP0E SMB0E SPI0E URT0E Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xE1 Table 21.4. XBR0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 SYSCKE SYSCLK Output Enable. 0: SYSCLK unavailable at Port pin. 1: SYSCLK output routed to Port pin. 6 CP1AE Comparator1 Asynchronous Output Enable. 0: Asynchronous CP1 unavailable at Port pin. 1: Asynchronous CP1 routed to Port pin. 5 CP1E Comparator1 Output Enable. 0: CP1 unavailable at Port pin. 1: CP1 routed to Port pin. 4 CP0AE Comparator0 Asynchronous Output Enable. 0: Asynchronous CP0 unavailable at Port pin. 1: Asynchronous CP0 routed to Port pin. 3 CP0E Comparator0 Output Enable. 0: CP0 unavailable at Port pin. 1: CP0 routed to Port pin. 2 SMB0E SMBus0 I/O Enable. 0: SMBus0 I/O unavailable at Port pins. 1: SMBus0 I/O routed to Port pins. 1 SPI0E SPI I/O Enable. 0: SPI I/O unavailable at Port pins. 1: SPI I/O routed to Port pins. The SPI can be assigned either 3 or 4 GPIO pins. 0 URT0E UART I/O Output Enable. 0: UART I/O unavailable at Port pin. 1: UART TX, RX routed to Port pins P0.4 and P0.5. Rev. 1.1 193

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved T2E T1E T0E ECIE PCA0ME Type R RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xE2 Table 21.5. XBR1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:6 Reserved Must write reset value. 5 T2E T2 Enable. 0: T2 unavailable at Port pin. 1: T2 routed to Port pin. 4 T1E T1 Enable. 0: T1 unavailable at Port pin. 1: T1 routed to Port pin. 3 T0E T0 Enable. 0: T0 unavailable at Port pin. 1: T0 routed to Port pin. 2 ECIE PCA0 External Counter Input Enable. 0: ECI unavailable at Port pin. 1: ECI routed to Port pin. 1:0 PCA0ME PCA Module I/O Enable Bits. 00: All PCA I/O unavailable at Port pins. 01: CEX0 routed to Port pin. 10: CEX0, CEX1 routed to Port pins. 11: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2 routed to Port pins. 194 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name WEAKPUD XBARE Reserved Type RW RW R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xE3 Table 21.6. XBR2 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 WEAKPUD Port I/O Weak Pullup Disable. 0: Weak Pullups enabled (except for Ports whose I/O are configured for analog mode). 1: Weak Pullups disabled. 6 XBARE Crossbar Enable. 0: Crossbar disabled. 1: Crossbar enabled. 5:0 Reserved Must write reset value. Rev. 1.1 195

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.4. PRTDRV: Port Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved P2DRV P1DRV P0DRV Type R RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xF6 Table 21.7. PRTDRV Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:3 Reserved Must write reset value. 2 P2DRV Port 2 Drive Strength. 0: All pins on P2 use low drive strength. 1: All pins on P2 use high drive strength. 1 P1DRV Port 1 Drive Strength. 0: All pins on P1 use low drive strength. 1: All pins on P1 use high drive strength. 0 P0DRV Port 0 Drive Strength. 0: All pins on P0 use low drive strength. 1: All pins on P0 use high drive strength. 196 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.5. P0MASK: Port 0 Mask Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0MASK Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xFE Table 21.8. P0MASK Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P0MASK Port 0 Mask Value. Selects P0 pins to be compared to the corresponding bits in P0MAT. 0: P0.x pin logic value is ignored and will cause a port mismatch event. 1: P0.x pin logic value is compared to P0MAT.x. Rev. 1.1 197

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.6. P0MAT: Port 0 Match Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0MAT Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xFD Table 21.9. P0MAT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P0MAT Port 0 Match Value. Match comparison value used on P0 pins for bits in P0MASK which are set to 1. 0: P0.x pin logic value is compared with logic LOW. 1: P0.x pin logic value is compared with logic HIGH. 198 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.7. P0: Port 0 Pin Latch Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0 Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0x80 (bit-addressable) Table 21.10. P0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P0 Port 0 Data. Writing this register sets the port latch logic value for the associated I/O pins configured as digital I/O. Reading this register returns the logic value at the pin, regardless if it is configured as output or input. Rev. 1.1 199

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.8. P0MDIN: Port 0 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0MDIN Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xF1 Table 21.11. P0MDIN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P0MDIN Port 0 Input Mode. Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver disabled. 0: Corresponding P0.x pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P0.x pin is configured for digital mode. 200 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.9. P0MDOUT: Port 0 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0MDOUT Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xA4 Table 21.12. P0MDOUT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P0MDOUT Port 0 Output Mode. These bits are only applicable when the pin is configured for digital mode using the P0MDIN register. 0: Corresponding P0.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P0.n Output is push-pull. Rev. 1.1 201

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.10. P0SKIP: Port 0 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0SKIP Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD4 Table 21.13. P0SKIP Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P0SKIP Port 0 Skip. These bits select port pins to be skipped by the crossbar decoder. Port pins used for ana- log, special functions or GPIO should be skipped. 0: Corresponding P0.x pin is not skipped by the crossbar. 1: Corresponding P0.x pin is skipped by the crossbar. 202 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.11. P1MASK: Port 1 Mask Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1MASK Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xEE Table 21.14. P1MASK Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P1MASK Port 1 Mask Value. Selects P1 pins to be compared to the corresponding bits in P1MAT. 0: P1.x pin logic value is ignored and will cause a port mismatch event. 1: P1.x pin logic value is compared to P1MAT.x. Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits (P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages. Rev. 1.1 203

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.12. P1MAT: Port 1 Match Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1MAT Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xED Table 21.15. P1MAT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P1MAT Port 1 Match Value. Match comparison value used on P1 pins for bits in P1MASK which are set to 1. 0: P1.x pin logic value is compared with logic LOW. 1: P1.x pin logic value is compared with logic HIGH. Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits (P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages. 204 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.13. P1: Port 1 Pin Latch Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1 Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0x90 (bit-addressable) Table 21.16. P1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P1 Port 1 Data. Writing this register sets the port latch logic value for the associated I/O pins configured as digital I/O. Reading this register returns the logic value at the pin, regardless if it is configured as output or input. Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits (P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages. Rev. 1.1 205

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.14. P1MDIN: Port 1 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1MDIN Type RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xF2 Table 21.17. P1MDIN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P1MDIN Port 1 Input Mode. Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver disabled. 0: Corresponding P1.x pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P1.x pin is configured for digital mode. Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits (P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages. 206 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.15. P1MDOUT: Port 1 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1MDOUT Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xA5 Table 21.18. P1MDOUT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P1MDOUT Port 1 Output Mode. These bits are only applicable when the pin is configured for digital mode using the P1MDIN register. 0: Corresponding P1.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P1.n Output is push-pull. Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits (P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages. Rev. 1.1 207

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.16. P1SKIP: Port 1 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1SKIP Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD5 Table 21.19. P1SKIP Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 P1SKIP Port 1 Skip. These bits select port pins to be skipped by the crossbar decoder. Port pins used for ana- log, special functions or GPIO should be skipped. 0: Corresponding P1.x pin is not skipped by the crossbar. 1: Corresponding P1.x pin is skipped by the crossbar. Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits (P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages. 208 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.17. P2: Port 2 Pin Latch Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved P2 Type R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 SFR Address: 0xA0 (bit-addressable) Table 21.20. P2 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:2 Reserved Must write reset value. 1:0 P2 Port 2 Data. Writing this register sets the port latch logic value for the associated I/O pins configured as digital I/O. Reading this register returns the logic value at the pin, regardless if it is configured as output or input. Note: Port 2 consists of 2 bits (P2.0-P2.1) on QSOP24 devices and 1 bit (P2.0) on QFN20 and SOIC16 packages. Rev. 1.1 209

C8051F85x/86x Register 21.18. P2MDOUT: Port 2 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved P2MDOUT Type R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xA6 Table 21.21. P2MDOUT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:2 Reserved Must write reset value. 1:0 P2MDOUT Port 2 Output Mode. 0: Corresponding P2.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P2.n Output is push-pull. Note: Port 2 consists of 2 bits (P2.0-P2.1) on QSOP24 devices and 1 bit (P2.0) on QFN20 and SOIC16 packages. 210 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 22. Reset Sources and Supply Monitor Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. Upon entering this reset state, the following events occur: CIP-51 halts program execution Special Function Registers (SFRs) are initialized to their defined reset values External port pins are placed in a known state Interrupts and timers are disabled. All SFRs are reset to the predefined values noted in the SFR detailed descriptions. The contents of internal data memory are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is preserved. However, since the stack pointer SFR is reset, the stack is effectively lost, even though the data on the stack is not altered. The Port I/O latches are reset to 0xFF (all logic ones) in open-drain, low-drive mode. Weak pullups are enabled during and after the reset. For V Monitor and power-on resets, the RST pin is driven low until DD the device exits the reset state. Note that during a power-on event, there may be a short delay before the POR circuitry fires and the RST pin is driven low. During that time, the RST pin will be weakly pulled to the V supply pin. DD On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, the Watchdog Timer is enabled and the system clock defaults to the internal oscillator. Program execution begins at location 0x0000. Reset Sources RST Supply Monitor or Power-up Missing Clock Detector Watchdog Timer system reset Software Reset Comparator 0 Flash Error Figure 22.1. Reset Sources Rev. 1.1 211

C8051F85x/86x 22.1. Power-On Reset During power-up, the POR circuit will fire. When POR fires, the device is held in a reset state and the RST pin is driven low until V settles above V . Two delays are present during the supply ramp time. First, a DD RST delay will occur before the POR circuitry fires and pulls the RST pin low. A second delay occurs before the device is released from reset; the delay decreases as the V ramp time increases (V ramp time is DD DD defined as how fast V ramps from 0 V to V ). Figure 22.2. plots the power-on reset timing. For ramp DD RST times less than 1 ms, the power-on reset time (T ) is typically less than 0.3 ms. Additionally, the power POR supply must reach V before the POR circuit will release the device from reset. RST On exit from a power-on reset, the PORSF flag (RSTSRC.1) is set by hardware to logic 1. When PORSF is set, all of the other reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate (PORSF is cleared by all other resets). Since all resets cause program execution to begin at the same location (0x0000) software can read the PORSF flag to determine if a power-up was the cause of reset. The content of internal data memory should be assumed to be undefined after a power-on reset. The V monitor is enabled following DD a power-on reset. s olt v D D V t RST Logic HIGH T POR Logic LOW Power-On Reset Figure 22.2. Power-on Reset Timing 212 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 22.2. Power-Fail Reset / Supply Monitor C8051F85x/86x devices have a supply monitor that is enabled and selected as a reset source after each power-on. The supply monitor senses the voltage on the device VDD supply and can generate a reset if the supply drops below the corresponding threshold. This monitor is enabled and enabled as a reset source after initial power-on to protect the device until VDD is an adequate and stable voltage. When enabled and selected as a reset source, any power down transition or power irregularity that causes VDD to drop below the reset threshold will drive the RST pin low and hold the core in a reset state. When VDD returns to a level above the reset threshold, the monitor will release the core from the reset state. The reset status can then be read using the device reset sources module. After a power-fail reset, the PORF flag reads 1 and all of the other reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate. The power-on reset delay (t ) is not incurred after a supply monitor reset. The contents of RAM should be presumed invalid POR after a VDD monitor reset. The enable state of the VDD supply monitor and its selection as a reset source is not altered by device resets. For example, if the VDD supply monitor is de-selected as a reset source and disabled by software, and then firmware performs a software reset, the VDD supply monitor will remain disabled and de-selected after the reset. To protect the integrity of flash contents, the VDD supply monitor must be enabled and selected as a reset source if software contains routines that erase or write flash memory. If the VDD supply monitor is not enabled, any erase or write performed on flash memory will be ignored. s olt VDD v Reset Threshold (VRST) t RST VDD Monitor Reset Figure 22.3. VDD Supply Monitor Threshold 22.3. Enabling the VDD Monitor The VDD supply monitor is enabled by default. However, in systems which disable the supply monitor, it must be enabled before selecting it as a reset source. Selecting the VDD supply monitor as a reset source before it has stabilized may generate a system reset. In systems where this reset would be undesirable, a delay should be introduced between enabling the VDD supply monitor and selecting it as a reset source. No delay should be introduced in systems where software contains routines that erase or write flash memory. The procedure for enabling the VDD supply monitor and selecting it as a reset source is: Rev. 1.1 213

C8051F85x/86x 1. Enable the VDD supply monitor (VMONEN = 1). 2. Wait for the VDD supply monitor to stabilize (optional). 3. Enable the VDD monitor as a reset source in the RSTSRC register. 22.4. External Reset The external RST pin provides a means for external circuitry to force the device into a reset state. Asserting an active-low signal on the RST pin generates a reset; an external pullup and/or decoupling of the RST pin may be necessary to avoid erroneous noise-induced resets. The PINRSF flag is set on exit from an external reset. 22.5. Missing Clock Detector Reset The Missing Clock Detector (MCD) is a one-shot circuit that is triggered by the system clock. If the system clock remains high or low for more than the MCD time window, the one-shot will time out and generate a reset. After a MCD reset, the MCDRSF flag will read 1, signifying the MCD as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads 0. Writing a 1 to the MCDRSF bit enables the Missing Clock Detector; writing a 0 disables it. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 22.6. Comparator0 Reset Comparator0 can be configured as a reset source by writing a 1 to the C0RSEF flag. Comparator0 should be enabled and allowed to settle prior to writing to C0RSEF to prevent any turn-on chatter on the output from generating an unwanted reset. The Comparator0 reset is active-low: if the non-inverting input voltage (on CP0+) is less than the inverting input voltage (on CP0-), the device is put into the reset state. After a Comparator0 reset, the C0RSEF flag will read 1 signifying Comparator0 as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads ‘0’. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 22.7. Watchdog Timer Reset The programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) can be used to prevent software from running out of control during a system malfunction. The WDT function can be enabled or disabled by software as described in the watchdog timer section. If a system malfunction prevents user software from updating the WDT, a reset is generated and the WDTRSF bit is set to ‘1’. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 22.8. Flash Error Reset If a flash read/write/erase or program read targets an illegal address, a system reset is generated. This may occur due to any of the following: A flash write or erase is attempted above user code space. A flash read is attempted above user code space. A program read is attempted above user code space (i.e. a branch instruction to the reserved area). A flash read, write or erase attempt is restricted due to a flash security setting. The FERROR bit is set following a flash error reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 22.9. Software Reset Software may force a reset by writing a 1 to the SWRSF bit. The SWRSF bit will read 1 following a software forced reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 214 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 22.10. Reset Sources Control Registers Register 22.1. RSTSRC: Reset Source Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name Reserved FERROR C0RSEF SWRSF WDTRSF MCDRSF PORSF PINRSF Type R R RW RW R RW RW R Reset 0 X X X X X X X SFR Address: 0xEF Table 22.1. RSTSRC Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 Reserved Must write reset value. 6 FERROR Flash Error Reset Flag. This read-only bit is set to 1 if a flash read/write/erase error caused the last reset. 5 C0RSEF Comparator0 Reset Enable and Flag. Read: This bit reads 1 if Comparator0 caused the last reset. Write: Writing a 1 to this bit enables Comparator0 (active-low) as a reset source. 4 SWRSF Software Reset Force and Flag. Read: This bit reads 1 if last reset was caused by a write to SWRSF. Write: Writing a 1 to this bit forces a system reset. 3 WDTRSF Watchdog Timer Reset Flag. This read-only bit is set to 1 if a watchdog timer overflow caused the last reset. 2 MCDRSF Missing Clock Detector Enable and Flag. Read: This bit reads 1 if a missing clock detector timeout caused the last reset. Write: Writing a 1 to this bit enables the missing clock detector. The MCD triggers a reset if a missing clock condition is detected. 1 PORSF Power-On / Supply Monitor Reset Flag, and Supply Monitor Reset Enable. Read: This bit reads 1 anytime a power-on or supply monitor reset has occurred. Write: Writing a 1 to this bit enables the supply monitor as a reset source. 0 PINRSF HW Pin Reset Flag. This read-only bit is set to 1 if the RST pin caused the last reset. Notes: 1. Reads and writes of the RSTSRC register access different logic in the device. Reading the register always returns status information to indicate the source of the most recent reset. Writing to the register activates certain options as reset sources. It is recommended to not use any kind of read-modify-write operation on this register. 2. When the PORSF bit reads back 1 all other RSTSRC flags are indeterminate. 3. Writing 1 to the PORSF bit when the supply monitor is not enabled and stabilized may cause a system reset. Rev. 1.1 215

C8051F85x/86x 22.11. Supply Monitor Control Registers Register 22.2. VDM0CN: Supply Monitor Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name VDMEN VDDSTAT Reserved Type RW R R Reset X X X X X X X X SFR Address: 0xFF Table 22.2. VDM0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 VDMEN Supply Monitor Enable. This bit turns the supply monitor circuit on/off. The supply monitor cannot generate sys- tem resets until it is also selected as a reset source in register RSTSRC. Selecting the supply monitor as a reset source before it has stabilized may generate a system reset. In systems where this reset would be undesirable, a delay should be introduced between enabling the supply monitor and selecting it as a reset source. 0: Supply Monitor Disabled. 1: Supply Monitor Enabled. 6 VDDSTAT Supply Status. This bit indicates the current power supply status (supply monitor output). 0: V is at or below the supply monitor threshold. DD 1: V is above the supply monitor threshold. DD 5:0 Reserved Must write reset value. 216 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 23. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) The serial peripheral interface (SPI0) provides access to a flexible, full-duplex synchronous serial bus. SPI0 can operate as a master or slave device in both 3-wire or 4-wire modes, and supports multiple masters and slaves on a single SPI bus. The slave-select (NSS) signal can be configured as an input to select SPI0 in slave mode, or to disable Master Mode operation in a multi-master environment, avoiding contention on the SPI bus when more than one master attempts simultaneous data transfers. NSS can also be configured as a chip-select output in master mode, or disabled for 3-wire operation. Additional general purpose port I/O pins can be used to select multiple slave devices in master mode. SPI0 SCK Phase Master or Slave SCK Polarity NSS Control NSS Clock Rate SYSCLK Bus Control Generator SCK MISO Shift Register MOSI TX Buffer RX Buffer SPI0DAT Figure 23.1. SPI0 Block Diagram Rev. 1.1 217

C8051F85x/86x 23.1. Signal Descriptions The four signals used by SPI0 (MOSI, MISO, SCK, NSS) are described below. 23.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI) The master-out, slave-in (MOSI) signal is an output from a master device and an input to slave devices. It is used to serially transfer data from the master to the slave. This signal is an output when SPI0 is operating as a master and an input when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant bit first. When configured as a master, MOSI is driven by the MSB of the shift register in both 3- and 4-wire mode. 23.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO) The master-in, slave-out (MISO) signal is an output from a slave device and an input to the master device. It is used to serially transfer data from the slave to the master. This signal is an input when SPI0 is operating as a master and an output when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most- significant bit first. The MISO pin is placed in a high-impedance state when the SPI module is disabled and when the SPI operates in 4-wire mode as a slave that is not selected. When acting as a slave in 3-wire mode, MISO is always driven by the MSB of the shift register. 23.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK) The serial clock (SCK) signal is an output from the master device and an input to slave devices. It is used to synchronize the transfer of data between the master and slave on the MOSI and MISO lines. SPI0 generates this signal when operating as a master. The SCK signal is ignored by a SPI slave when the slave is not selected (NSS = 1) in 4-wire slave mode. 23.1.4. Slave Select (NSS) The function of the slave-select (NSS) signal is dependent on the setting of the NSSMD1 and NSSMD0 bits in the SPI0CN register. There are three possible modes that can be selected with these bits: 1. NSSMD[1:0] = 00: 3-Wire Master or 3-Wire Slave Mode: SPI0 operates in 3-wire mode, and NSS is disabled. When operating as a slave device, SPI0 is always selected in 3-wire mode. Since no select signal is present, SPI0 must be the only slave on the bus in 3-wire mode. This is intended for point-to-point communication between a master and one slave. 2. NSSMD[1:0] = 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as an input. When operating as a slave, NSS selects the SPI0 device. When operating as a master, a 1-to-0 transition of the NSS signal disables the master function of SPI0 so that multiple master devices can be used on the same SPI bus. 3. NSSMD[1:0] = 1x: 4-Wire Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as an output. The setting of NSSMD0 determines what logic level the NSS pin will output. This configuration should only be used when operating SPI0 as a master device. See Figure 23.2, Figure 23.3, and Figure 23.4 for typical connection diagrams of the various operational modes. Note that the setting of NSSMD bits affects the pinout of the device. When in 3-wire master or 3-wire slave mode, the NSS pin will not be mapped by the crossbar. In all other modes, the NSS signal will be mapped to a pin on the device. 218 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 23.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation A SPI master device initiates all data transfers on a SPI bus. SPI0 is placed in master mode by setting the Master Enable flag (MSTEN, SPI0CN.6). Writing a byte of data to the SPI0 data register (SPI0DAT) when in master mode writes to the transmit buffer. If the SPI shift register is empty, the byte in the transmit buffer is moved to the shift register, and a data transfer begins. The SPI0 master immediately shifts out the data serially on the MOSI line while providing the serial clock on SCK. The SPIF (SPI0CN.7) flag is set to logic 1 at the end of the transfer. If interrupts are enabled, an interrupt request is generated when the SPIF flag is set. While the SPI0 master transfers data to a slave on the MOSI line, the addressed SPI slave device simultaneously transfers the contents of its shift register to the SPI master on the MISO line in a full-duplex operation. Therefore, the SPIF flag serves as both a transmit-complete and receive-data-ready flag. The data byte received from the slave is transferred MSB-first into the master's shift register. When a byte is fully shifted into the register, it is moved to the receive buffer where it can be read by the processor by reading SPI0DAT. When configured as a master, SPI0 can operate in one of three different modes: multi-master mode, 3-wire single-master mode, and 4-wire single-master mode. The default, multi-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In this mode, NSS is an input to the device, and is used to disable the master SPI0 when another master is accessing the bus. When NSS is pulled low in this mode, MSTEN (SPI0CN.6) and SPIEN (SPI0CN.0) are set to 0 to disable the SPI master device, and a Mode Fault is generated (MODF, SPI0CN.5 = 1). Mode Fault will generate an interrupt if enabled. SPI0 must be manually re-enabled in software under these circumstances. In multi-master systems, devices will typically default to being slave devices while they are not acting as the system master device. In multi- master mode, slave devices can be addressed individually (if needed) using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 23.2 shows a connection diagram between two master devices and a single slave in multiple- master mode. 3-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. In this mode, NSS is not used, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Any slave devices that must be addressed in this mode should be selected using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 23.3 shows a connection diagram between a master device in 3-wire master mode and a slave device. 4-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 1. In this mode, NSS is configured as an output pin, and can be used as a slave-select signal for a single SPI device. In this mode, the output value of NSS is controlled (in software) with the bit NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2). Additional slave devices can be addressed using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 23.4 shows a connection diagram for a master device and a slave device in 4-wire mode. Rev. 1.1 219

C8051F85x/86x Master Device 1 Slave Device SCK SCK MISO MISO MOSI MOSI NSS NSS port pin Master Device 2 NSS MOSI MISO SCK port pin Figure 23.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram Master Device Slave Device SCK SCK MISO MISO MOSI MOSI Figure 23.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram Master Device Slave Device SCK SCK MISO MISO MOSI MOSI NSS NSS Figure 23.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram 220 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 23.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation When SPI0 is enabled and not configured as a master, it will operate as a SPI slave. As a slave, bytes are shifted in through the MOSI pin and out through the MISO pin by a master device controlling the SCK signal. A bit counter in the SPI0 logic counts SCK edges. When 8 bits have been shifted through the shift register, the SPIF flag is set to logic 1, and the byte is copied into the receive buffer. Data is read from the receive buffer by reading SPI0DAT. A slave device cannot initiate transfers. Data to be transferred to the master device is pre-loaded into the shift register by writing to SPI0DAT. Writes to SPI0DAT are double- buffered, and are placed in the transmit buffer first. If the shift register is empty, the contents of the transmit buffer will immediately be transferred into the shift register. When the shift register already contains data, the SPI will load the shift register with the transmit buffer’s contents after the last SCK edge of the next (or current) SPI transfer. When configured as a slave, SPI0 can be configured for 4-wire or 3-wire operation. The default, 4-wire slave mode, is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In 4-wire mode, the NSS signal is routed to a port pin and configured as a digital input. SPI0 is enabled when NSS is logic 0, and disabled when NSS is logic 1. The bit counter is reset on a falling edge of NSS. Note that the NSS signal must be driven low at least 2 system clocks before the first active edge of SCK for each byte transfer. Figure 23.4 shows a connection diagram between two slave devices in 4-wire slave mode and a master device. The 3-wire slave mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. NSS is not used in this mode, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Since there is no way of uniquely addressing the device in 3-wire slave mode, SPI0 must be the only slave device present on the bus. It is important to note that in 3-wire slave mode there is no external means of resetting the bit counter that determines when a full byte has been received. The bit counter can only be reset by disabling and re- enabling SPI0 with the SPIEN bit. Figure 23.3 shows a connection diagram between a slave device in 3- wire slave mode and a master device. 23.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources When SPI0 interrupts are enabled, the following four flags will generate an interrupt when they are set to logic 1: All of the following bits must be cleared by software. The SPI Interrupt Flag, SPIF (SPI0CN.7) is set to logic 1 at the end of each byte transfer. This flag can occur in all SPI0 modes. The Write Collision Flag, WCOL (SPI0CN.6) is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted when the transmit buffer has not been emptied to the SPI shift register. When this occurs, the write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written.This flag can occur in all SPI0 modes. The Mode Fault Flag MODF (SPI0CN.5) is set to logic 1 when SPI0 is configured as a master, and for multi-master mode and the NSS pin is pulled low. When a Mode Fault occurs, the MSTEN and SPIEN bits in SPI0CN are set to logic 0 to disable SPI0 and allow another master device to access the bus. The Receive Overrun Flag RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4) is set to logic 1 when configured as a slave, and a transfer is completed and the receive buffer still holds an unread byte from a previous transfer. The new byte is not transferred to the receive buffer, allowing the previously received data byte to be read. The data byte which caused the overrun is lost. 23.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity Four combinations of serial clock phase and polarity can be selected using the clock control bits in the SPI0 Configuration Register (SPI0CFG). The CKPHA bit (SPI0CFG.5) selects one of two clock phases (edge used to latch the data). The CKPOL bit (SPI0CFG.4) selects between an active-high or active-low clock. Both master and slave devices must be configured to use the same clock phase and polarity. SPI0 Rev. 1.1 221

C8051F85x/86x should be disabled (by clearing the SPIEN bit, SPI0CN.0) when changing the clock phase or polarity. The clock and data line relationships for master mode are shown in Figure 23.5. For slave mode, the clock and data relationships are shown in Figure 23.6 and Figure 23.7. Note that CKPHA should be set to 0 on both the master and slave SPI when communicating between two Silicon Labs C8051 devices. The SPI0 Clock Rate Register (SPI0CKR) controls the master mode serial clock frequency. This register is ignored when operating in slave mode. When the SPI is configured as a master, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) is one-half the system clock frequency or 12.5 MHz, whichever is slower. When the SPI is configured as a slave, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) for full-duplex operation is 1/10 the system clock frequency, provided that the master issues SCK, NSS (in 4-wire slave mode), and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. If the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input data asynchronously, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) must be less than 1/10 the system clock frequency. In the special case where the master only wants to transmit data to the slave and does not need to receive data from the slave (i.e. half-duplex operation), the SPI slave can receive data at a maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) of 1/4 the system clock frequency. This is provided that the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0) SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1) MISO/MOSI MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 NSS (Must Remain High in Multi-Master Mode) Figure 23.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing 222 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0) MOSI MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 MISO MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 NSS (4-Wire Mode) Figure 23.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0) SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1) MOSI MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 MISO MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 NSS (4-Wire Mode) Figure 23.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1) 23.6. SPI Special Function Registers SPI0 is accessed and controlled through four special function registers in the system controller: SPI0CN Control Register, SPI0DAT Data Register, SPI0CFG Configuration Register, and SPI0CKR Clock Rate Register. The four special function registers related to the operation of the SPI0 Bus are described in the following figures. Rev. 1.1 223

C8051F85x/86x SCK* T T MCKH MCKL T T MIS MIH MISO MOSI * SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1. Figure 23.8. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 0) SCK* T T MCKH MCKL T T MIS MIH MISO MOSI * SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1. Figure 23.9. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 1) 224 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x NSS T T T SE CKL SD SCK* T CKH T T SIS SIH MOSI T T T SEZ SOH SDZ MISO * SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1. Figure 23.10. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 0) NSS T T T SE CKL SD SCK* T CKH T T SIS SIH MOSI T T T T SEZ SOH SLH SDZ MISO * SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1. Figure 23.11. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 1) Rev. 1.1 225

C8051F85x/86x Table 23.1. SPI Slave Timing Parameters Parameter Description Min Max Units Master Mode Timing (See Figure 23.8 and Figure 23.9) T SCK High Time 1 x T — ns MCKH SYSCLK T SCK Low Time 1 x T — ns MCKL SYSCLK T MISO Valid to SCK Shift Edge 1 x T + 20 — ns MIS SYSCLK T SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change 0 — ns MIH Slave Mode Timing (See Figure 23.10 and Figure 23.11) T NSS Falling to First SCK Edge 2 x T — ns SE SYSCLK T Last SCK Edge to NSS Rising 2 x T — ns SD SYSCLK T NSS Falling to MISO Valid — 4 x T ns SEZ SYSCLK T NSS Rising to MISO High-Z — 4 x T ns SDZ SYSCLK T SCK High Time 5 x T — ns CKH SYSCLK T SCK Low Time 5 x T — ns CKL SYSCLK T MOSI Valid to SCK Sample Edge 2 x T — ns SIS SYSCLK T SCK Sample Edge to MOSI Change 2 x T — ns SIH SYSCLK T SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change — 4 x T ns SOH SYSCLK T Last SCK Edge to MISO Change  6 x T 8 x T ns SLH SYSCLK SYSCLK (CKPHA = 1 ONLY) Note: T is equal to one period of the device system clock (SYSCLK). SYSCLK 226 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 23.7. SPI Control Registers Register 23.1. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPIBSY MSTEN CKPHA CKPOL SLVSEL NSSIN SRMT RXBMT Type R RW RW RW R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0xA1 Table 23.2. SPI0CFG Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 SPIBSY SPI Busy. This bit is set to logic 1 when a SPI transfer is in progress (master or slave mode). 6 MSTEN Master Mode Enable. 0: Disable master mode. Operate in slave mode. 1: Enable master mode. Operate as a master. 5 CKPHA SPI0 Clock Phase. 0: Data centered on first edge of SCK period. 1: Data centered on second edge of SCK period. 4 CKPOL SPI0 Clock Polarity. 0: SCK line low in idle state. 1: SCK line high in idle state. 3 SLVSEL Slave Selected Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 whenever the NSS pin is low indicating SPI0 is the selected slave. It is cleared to logic 0 when NSS is high (slave not selected). This bit does not indi- cate the instantaneous value at the NSS pin, but rather a de-glitched version of the pin input. 2 NSSIN NSS Instantaneous Pin Input. This bit mimics the instantaneous value that is present on the NSS port pin at the time that the register is read. This input is not de-glitched. 1 SRMT Shift Register Empty (valid in slave mode only). This bit will be set to logic 1 when all data has been transferred in/out of the shift register, and there is no new information available to read from the transmit buffer or write to the receive buffer. It returns to logic 0 when a data byte is transferred to the shift register from the transmit buffer or by a transition on SCK. SRMT = 1 when in Master Mode. Note: In slave mode, data on MOSI is sampled in the center of each data bit. In master mode, data on MISO is sampled one SYSCLK before the end of each data bit, to provide maximum settling time for the slave device. Rev. 1.1 227

C8051F85x/86x Table 23.2. SPI0CFG Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 RXBMT Receive Buffer Empty (valid in slave mode only). This bit will be set to logic 1 when the receive buffer has been read and contains no new information. If there is new information available in the receive buffer that has not been read, this bit will return to logic 0. RXBMT = 1 when in Master Mode. Note: In slave mode, data on MOSI is sampled in the center of each data bit. In master mode, data on MISO is sampled one SYSCLK before the end of each data bit, to provide maximum settling time for the slave device. 228 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 23.2. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPIF WCOL MODF RXOVRN NSSMD TXBMT SPIEN Type RW RW RW RW RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 SFR Address: 0xF8 (bit-addressable) Table 23.3. SPI0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 SPIF SPI0 Interrupt Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware at the end of a data transfer. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 6 WCOL Write Collision Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted when TXBMT is 0. When this occurs, the write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 5 MODF Mode Fault Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a master mode collision is detected (NSS is low, MSTEN = 1, and NSSMD = 01). If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 4 RXOVRN Receive Overrun Flag (valid in slave mode only). This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when the receive buffer still holds unread data from a previous transfer and the last bit of the current transfer is shifted into the SPI0 shift reg- ister. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automat- ically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 3:2 NSSMD Slave Select Mode. Selects between the following NSS operation modes: 00: 3-Wire Slave or 3-Wire Master Mode. NSS signal is not routed to a port pin. 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode (Default). NSS is an input to the device. 10: 4-Wire Single-Master Mode. NSS is an output and logic low. 11: 4-Wire Single-Master Mode. NSS is an output and logic high. 1 TXBMT Transmit Buffer Empty. This bit will be set to logic 0 when new data has been written to the transmit buffer. When data in the transmit buffer is transferred to the SPI shift register, this bit will be set to logic 1, indicating that it is safe to write a new byte to the transmit buffer. Rev. 1.1 229

C8051F85x/86x Table 23.3. SPI0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 SPIEN SPI0 Enable. 0: SPI disabled. 1: SPI enabled. 230 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 23.3. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPI0CKR Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xA2 Table 23.4. SPI0CKR Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 SPI0CKR SPI0 Clock Rate. These bits determine the frequency of the SCK output when the SPI0 module is config- ured for master mode operation. The SCK clock frequency is a divided version of the system clock, and is given in the following equation, where SYSCLK is the system clock frequency and SPI0CKR is the 8-bit value held in the SPI0CKR register. SYSCLK f = ----------------------------------------------- SCK 2SPI0CKR+1 for 0 <= SPI0CKR <= 255 Rev. 1.1 231

C8051F85x/86x Register 23.4. SPI0DAT: SPI0 Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPI0DAT Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xA3 Table 23.5. SPI0DAT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 SPI0DAT SPI0 Transmit and Receive Data. The SPI0DAT register is used to transmit and receive SPI0 data. Writing data to SPI0- DAT places the data into the transmit buffer and initiates a transfer when in master mode. A read of SPI0DAT returns the contents of the receive buffer. 232 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 2 24. System Management Bus / I C (SMBus0) The SMBus I/O interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus. The SMBus is compliant with the System Management Bus Specification, version 1.1, and compatible with the I2C serial bus. Reads and writes to the SMBus by the system controller are byte oriented with the SMBus interface autonomously controlling the serial transfer of the data. Data can be transferred at up to 1/20th of the system clock as a master or slave (this can be faster than allowed by the SMBus specification, depending on the system clock used). A method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate devices with different speed capabilities on the same bus. The SMBus may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple masters. The SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization, arbitration logic, and START/STOP control and generation. The SMBus peripherals can be fully driven by software (i.e., software accepts/rejects slave addresses, and generates ACKs), or hardware slave address recognition and automatic ACK generation can be enabled to minimize software overhead. A block diagram of the SMBus0 peripheral is shown in Figure 24.1. SMBus0 Data / SMB0DAT Shift Register SDA Address State Control Slave Address SI SCL Logic Recognition Timers 0, Master SCL Clock 1 or 2 Generation Timer 3 SCL Low Figure 24.1. SMBus0 Block Diagram Rev. 1.1 233

C8051F85x/86x 24.1. Supporting Documents It is assumed the reader is familiar with or has access to the following supporting documents: 1. The I2C-Bus and How to Use It (including specifications), Philips Semiconductor. 2. The I2C-Bus Specification—Version 2.0, Philips Semiconductor. 3. System Management Bus Specification—Version 1.1, SBS Implementers Forum. 24.2. SMBus Configuration Figure 24.2 shows a typical SMBus configuration. The SMBus specification allows any recessive voltage between 3.0 V and 5.0 V; different devices on the bus may operate at different voltage levels. However, the maximum voltage on any port pin must conform to the electrical characteristics specifications. The bi- directional SCL (serial clock) and SDA (serial data) lines must be connected to a positive power supply voltage through a pullup resistor or similar circuit. Every device connected to the bus must have an open- drain or open-collector output for both the SCL and SDA lines, so that both are pulled high (recessive state) when the bus is free. The maximum number of devices on the bus is limited only by the requirement that the rise and fall times on the bus not exceed 300 ns and 1000 ns, respectively. VDD = 5V VDD = 3V VDD = 5V VDD = 3V Master Slave Slave Device Device 1 Device 2 SDA SCL Figure 24.2. Typical SMBus Configuration 24.3. SMBus Operation Two types of data transfers are possible: data transfers from a master transmitter to an addressed slave receiver (WRITE), and data transfers from an addressed slave transmitter to a master receiver (READ). The master device initiates both types of data transfers and provides the serial clock pulses on SCL. The SMBus interface may operate as a master or a slave, and multiple master devices on the same bus are supported. If two or more masters attempt to initiate a data transfer simultaneously, an arbitration scheme is employed with a single master always winning the arbitration. It is not necessary to specify one device as the Master in a system; any device who transmits a START and a slave address becomes the master for the duration of that transfer. A typical SMBus transaction consists of a START condition followed by an address byte (Bits7–1: 7-bit slave address; Bit0: R/W direction bit), one or more bytes of data, and a STOP condition. Bytes that are received (by a master or slave) are acknowledged (ACK) with a low SDA during a high SCL (see Figure 24.3). If the receiving device does not ACK, the transmitting device will read a NACK (not acknowledge), which is a high SDA during a high SCL. The direction bit (R/W) occupies the least-significant bit position of the address byte. The direction bit is set to logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation and cleared to logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation. 234 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x All transactions are initiated by a master, with one or more addressed slave devices as the target. The master generates the START condition and then transmits the slave address and direction bit. If the transaction is a WRITE operation from the master to the slave, the master transmits the data a byte at a time waiting for an ACK from the slave at the end of each byte. For READ operations, the slave transmits the data waiting for an ACK from the master at the end of each byte. At the end of the data transfer, the master generates a STOP condition to terminate the transaction and free the bus. Figure 24.3 illustrates a typical SMBus transaction. SCL SDA SLA6 SLA5-0 R/W D7 D6-0 START Slave Address + R/W ACK Data Byte NACK STOP Figure 24.3. SMBus Transaction 24.3.1. Transmitter vs. Receiver On the SMBus communications interface, a device is the “transmitter” when it is sending an address or data byte to another device on the bus. A device is a “receiver” when an address or data byte is being sent to it from another device on the bus. The transmitter controls the SDA line during the address or data byte. After each byte of address or data information is sent by the transmitter, the receiver sends an ACK or NACK bit during the ACK phase of the transfer, during which time the receiver controls the SDA line. 24.3.2. Arbitration A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. The bus is free after a STOP condition or after the SCL and SDA lines remain high for a specified time (see Section “24.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout” on page 236). In the event that two or more devices attempt to begin a transfer at the same time, an arbitration scheme is employed to force one master to give up the bus. The master devices continue transmitting until one attempts a HIGH while the other transmits a LOW. Since the bus is open-drain, the bus will be pulled LOW. The master attempting the HIGH will detect a LOW SDA and lose the arbitration. The winning master continues its transmission without interruption; the losing master becomes a slave and receives the rest of the transfer if addressed. This arbitration scheme is non-destructive: one device always wins, and no data is lost. 24.3.3. Clock Low Extension SMBus provides a clock synchronization mechanism, similar to I2C, which allows devices with different speed capabilities to coexist on the bus. A clock-low extension is used during a transfer in order to allow slower slave devices to communicate with faster masters. The slave may temporarily hold the SCL line LOW to extend the clock low period, effectively decreasing the serial clock frequency. 24.3.4. SCL Low Timeout If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is possible. Furthermore, the master cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus protocol specifies that devices participating in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than 25 ms as a “timeout” condition. Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the communication no later than 10 ms after detecting the timeout condition. Rev. 1.1 235

C8051F85x/86x For the SMBus0 interface, Timer 3 is used to implement SCL low timeouts. The SCL low timeout feature is enabled by setting the SMB0TOE bit in SMB0CF. The associated timer is forced to reload when SCL is high, and allowed to count when SCL is low. With the associated timer enabled and configured to overflow after 25 ms (and SMB0TOE set), the timer interrupt service routine can be used to reset (disable and re- enable) the SMBus in the event of an SCL low timeout. 24.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout The SMBus specification stipulates that if the SCL and SDA lines remain high for more that 50 µs, the bus is designated as free. When the SMB0FTE bit in SMB0CF is set, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (as defined by the timer configured for the SMBus clock source). If the SMBus is waiting to generate a Master START, the START will be generated following this timeout. A clock source is required for free timeout detection, even in a slave-only implementation. 24.4. Using the SMBus The SMBus can operate in both Master and Slave modes. The interface provides timing and shifting control for serial transfers; higher level protocol is determined by user software. The SMBus interface provides the following application-independent features: Byte-wise serial data transfers Clock signal generation on SCL (Master Mode only) and SDA data synchronization Timeout/bus error recognition, as defined by the SMB0CF configuration register START/STOP timing, detection, and generation Bus arbitration Interrupt generation Status information Optional hardware recognition of slave address and automatic acknowledgement of address/data SMBus interrupts are generated for each data byte or slave address that is transferred. When hardware acknowledgement is disabled, the point at which the interrupt is generated depends on whether the hardware is acting as a data transmitter or receiver. When a transmitter (i.e., sending address/data, receiving an ACK), this interrupt is generated after the ACK cycle so that software may read the received ACK value; when receiving data (i.e., receiving address/data, sending an ACK), this interrupt is generated before the ACK cycle so that software may define the outgoing ACK value. If hardware acknowledgement is enabled, these interrupts are always generated after the ACK cycle. See Section 24.5 for more details on transmission sequences. Interrupts are also generated to indicate the beginning of a transfer when a master (START generated), or the end of a transfer when a slave (STOP detected). Software should read the SMB0CN (SMBus Control register) to find the cause of the SMBus interrupt. Table 24.5 provides a quick SMB0CN decoding reference. 24.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register The SMBus Configuration register (SMB0CF) is used to enable the SMBus Master and/or Slave modes, select the SMBus clock source, and select the SMBus timing and timeout options. When the ENSMB bit is set, the SMBus is enabled for all master and slave events. Slave events may be disabled by setting the INH bit. With slave events inhibited, the SMBus interface will still monitor the SCL and SDA pins; however, the interface will NACK all received addresses and will not generate any slave interrupts. When the INH bit is set, all slave events will be inhibited following the next START (interrupts will continue for the duration of the current transfer). 236 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection SMBCS SMBus0 Clock Source 00 Timer 0 Overflow 01 Timer 1 Overflow 10 Timer 2 High Byte Overflow 11 Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow The SMBCS bit field selects the SMBus clock source, which is used only when operating as a master or when the Free Timeout detection is enabled. When operating as a master, overflows from the selected source determine the absolute minimum SCL low and high times as defined in Equation 24.1.The selected clock source may be shared by other peripherals so long as the timer is left running at all times. 1 T = T = ---------------------------------------------- HighMin LowMin f ClockSourceOverflow Equation 24.1. Minimum SCL High and Low Times The selected clock source should be configured to establish the minimum SCL High and Low times as per Equation 24.1. When the interface is operating as a master (and SCL is not driven or extended by any other devices on the bus), the typical SMBus bit rate is approximated by Equation 24.2. f BitRate = --C----l-o---c--k--S---o--u---r--c--e--O----v--e--r--f--l-o---w-- 3 Equation 24.2. Typical SMBus Bit Rate Figure 24.4 shows the typical SCL generation described by Equation 24.2. Notice that T is typically HIGH twice as large as T . The actual SCL output may vary due to other devices on the bus (SCL may be LOW extended low by slower slave devices, or driven low by contending master devices). The bit rate when operating as a master will never exceed the limits defined by equation Equation 24.1. Timer Source Overflows SCL T T SCL High Timeout Low High Figure 24.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation Rev. 1.1 237

C8051F85x/86x Setting the EXTHOLD bit extends the minimum setup and hold times for the SDA line. The minimum SDA setup time defines the absolute minimum time that SDA is stable before SCL transitions from low-to-high. The minimum SDA hold time defines the absolute minimum time that the current SDA value remains stable after SCL transitions from high-to-low. EXTHOLD should be set so that the minimum setup and hold times meet the SMBus Specification requirements of 250 ns and 300 ns, respectively. Table 24.2 shows the minimum setup and hold times for the two EXTHOLD settings. Setup and hold time extensions are typically necessary for SMBus compliance when SYSCLK is above 10 MHz. Table 24.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times EXTHOLD Minimum SDA Setup Time Minimum SDA Hold Time T – 4 system clocks low 0 or 3 system clocks 1 system clock + s/w delay* 1 11 system clocks 12 system clocks Note: Setup Time for ACK bit transmissions and the MSB of all data transfers. When using software acknowledgment, the s/ w delay occurs between the time SMB0DAT or ACK is written and when SI0 is cleared. Note that if SI is cleared in the same write that defines the outgoing ACK value, s/w delay is zero. With the SMBTOE bit set, Timer 3 should be configured to overflow after 25 ms in order to detect SCL low timeouts (see Section “24.3.4. SCL Low Timeout” on page 235). The SMBus interface will force the associated timer to reload while SCL is high, and allow the timer to count when SCL is low. The timer interrupt service routine should be used to reset SMBus communication by disabling and re-enabling the SMBus. SMBus Free Timeout detection can be enabled by setting the SMBFTE bit. When this bit is set, the bus will be considered free if SDA and SCL remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (see Figure 24.4). 24.4.2. SMBus Pin Swap The SMBus peripheral is assigned to pins using the priority crossbar decoder. By default, the SMBus signals are assigned to port pins starting with SDA on the lower-numbered pin, and SCL on the next available pin. The SWAP bit in the SMBTC register can be set to 1 to reverse the order in which the SMBus signals are assigned. 24.4.3. SMBus Timing Control The SDD field in the SMBTC register is used to restrict the detection of a START condition under certain circumstances. In some systems where there is significant mismatch between the impedance or the capacitance on the SDA and SCL lines, it may be possible for SCL to fall after SDA during an address or data transfer. Such an event can cause a false START detection on the bus. These kind of events are not expected in a standard SMBus or I2C-compliant system. In most systems this parameter should not be adjusted, and it is recommended that it be left at its default value. By default, if the SCL falling edge is detected after the falling edge of SDA (i.e. one SYSCLK cycle or more), the device will detect this as a START condition. The SDD field is used to increase the amount of hold time that is required between SDA and SCL falling before a START is recognized. An additional 2, 4, or 8 SYSCLKs can be added to prevent false START detection in systems where the bus conditions warrant this. 238 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 24.4.4. SMB0CN Control Register SMB0CN is used to control the interface and to provide status information. The higher four bits of SMB0CN (MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO) form a status vector that can be used to jump to service routines. MASTER indicates whether a device is the master or slave during the current transfer. TXMODE indicates whether the device is transmitting or receiving data for the current byte. STA and STO indicate that a START and/or STOP has been detected or generated since the last SMBus interrupt. STA and STO are also used to generate START and STOP conditions when operating as a master. Writing a 1 to STA will cause the SMBus interface to enter Master Mode and generate a START when the bus becomes free (STA is not cleared by hardware after the START is generated). Writing a 1 to STO while in Master Mode will cause the interface to generate a STOP and end the current transfer after the next ACK cycle. If STO and STA are both set (while in Master Mode), a STOP followed by a START will be generated. The ARBLOST bit indicates that the interface has lost an arbitration. This may occur anytime the interface is transmitting (master or slave). A lost arbitration while operating as a slave indicates a bus error condition. ARBLOST is cleared by hardware each time SI is cleared. The SI bit (SMBus Interrupt Flag) is set at the beginning and end of each transfer, after each byte frame, or when an arbitration is lost; see Table 24.3 for more details. Important Note About the SI Bit: The SMBus interface is stalled while SI is set; thus SCL is held low, and the bus is stalled until software clears SI. 24.4.4.1. Software ACK Generation When the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM is cleared to 0, the firmware on the device must detect incoming slave addresses and ACK or NACK the slave address and incoming data bytes. As a receiver, writing the ACK bit defines the outgoing ACK value; as a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the value received during the last ACK cycle. ACKRQ is set each time a byte is received, indicating that an outgoing ACK value is needed. When ACKRQ is set, software should write the desired outgoing value to the ACK bit before clearing SI. A NACK will be generated if software does not write the ACK bit before clearing SI. SDA will reflect the defined ACK value immediately following a write to the ACK bit; however SCL will remain low until SI is cleared. If a received slave address is not acknowledged, further slave events will be ignored until the next START is detected. 24.4.4.2. Hardware ACK Generation When the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM is set to 1, automatic slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled. More detail about automatic slave address recognition can be found in Section 24.4.5. As a receiver, the value currently specified by the ACK bit will be automatically sent on the bus during the ACK cycle of an incoming data byte. As a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the value received on the last ACK cycle. The ACKRQ bit is not used when hardware ACK generation is enabled. If a received slave address is NACKed by hardware, further slave events will be ignored until the next START is detected, and no interrupt will be generated. Table 24.3 lists all sources for hardware changes to the SMB0CN bits. Refer to Table 24.5 for SMBus status decoding using the SMB0CN register. Table 24.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN Bit Set by Hardware When: Cleared by Hardware When: A START is generated. A STOP is generated. MASTER Arbitration is lost. START is generated. A START is detected. SMB0DAT is written before the start of an Arbitration is lost. TXMODE SMBus frame. SMB0DAT is not written before the start of an SMBus frame. Rev. 1.1 239

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN (Continued) Bit Set by Hardware When: Cleared by Hardware When: A START followed by an address byte is Must be cleared by software. STA received. A STOP is detected while addressed as a A pending STOP is generated. STO slave. Arbitration is lost due to a detected STOP. A byte has been received and an ACK After each ACK cycle. ACKRQ response value is needed (only when hardware ACK is not enabled). A repeated START is detected as a Each time SIn is cleared. MASTER when STA is low (unwanted repeated START). SCL is sensed low while attempting to ARBLOST generate a STOP or repeated START condition. SDA is sensed low while transmitting a 1 (excluding ACK bits). The incoming ACK value is low  The incoming ACK value is high ACK (ACKNOWLEDGE). (NOT ACKNOWLEDGE). A START has been generated. Must be cleared by software. Lost arbitration. A byte has been transmitted and an ACK/ NACK received. SI A byte has been received. A START or repeated START followed by a slave address + R/W has been received. A STOP has been received. 24.4.5. Hardware Slave Address Recognition The SMBus hardware has the capability to automatically recognize incoming slave addresses and send an ACK without software intervention. Automatic slave address recognition is enabled by setting the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM to 1. This will enable both automatic slave address recognition and automatic hardware ACK generation for received bytes (as a master or slave). More detail on automatic hardware ACK generation can be found in Section 24.4.4.2. The registers used to define which address(es) are recognized by the hardware are the SMBus Slave Address register and the SMBus Slave Address Mask register. A single address or range of addresses (including the General Call Address 0x00) can be specified using these two registers. The most-significant seven bits of the two registers are used to define which addresses will be ACKed. A 1 in a bit of the slave address mask SLVM enables a comparison between the received slave address and the hardware’s slave address SLV for that bit. A 0 in a bit of the slave address mask means that bit will be treated as a “don’t care” for comparison purposes. In this case, either a 1 or a 0 value are acceptable on the incoming slave address. Additionally, if the GC bit in register SMB0ADR is set to 1, hardware will recognize the General Call Address (0x00). Table 24.4 shows some example parameter settings and the slave addresses that will be recognized by hardware under those conditions. 240 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.4. Hardware Address Recognition Examples (EHACK = 1) Hardware Slave Address Slave Address Mask GC bit Slave Addresses Recognized by SLV SLVM Hardware 0x34 0x7F 0 0x34 0x34 0x7F 1 0x34, 0x00 (General Call) 0x34 0x7E 0 0x34, 0x35 0x34 0x7E 1 0x34, 0x35, 0x00 (General Call) 0x70 0x73 0 0x70, 0x74, 0x78, 0x7C 24.4.6. Data Register The SMBus Data register SMB0DAT holds a byte of serial data to be transmitted or one that has just been received. Software may safely read or write to the data register when the SI flag is set. Software should not attempt to access the SMB0DAT register when the SMBus is enabled and the SI flag is cleared to logic 0, as the interface may be in the process of shifting a byte of data into or out of the register. Data in SMB0DAT is always shifted out MSB first. After a byte has been received, the first bit of received data is located at the MSB of SMB0DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously being shifted in. SMB0DAT always contains the last data byte present on the bus. In the event of lost arbitration, the transition from master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data or address in SMB0DAT. Rev. 1.1 241

C8051F85x/86x 24.5. SMBus Transfer Modes The SMBus interface may be configured to operate as master and/or slave. At any particular time, it will be operating in one of the following four modes: Master Transmitter, Master Receiver, Slave Transmitter, or Slave Receiver. The SMBus interface enters Master Mode any time a START is generated, and remains in Master Mode until it loses an arbitration or generates a STOP. An SMBus interrupt is generated at the end of all SMBus byte frames. The position of the ACK interrupt when operating as a receiver depends on whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. As a receiver, the interrupt for an ACK occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. As a transmitter, interrupts occur after the ACK, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled or not. 24.5.1. Write Sequence (Master) During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The master in this transfer will be a transmitter during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. The SMBus interface generates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 (WRITE). The master then transmits one or more bytes of serial data. After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is generated by the slave. The transfer is ended when the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. The interface will switch to Master Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Master Transmitter interrupt. Figure 24.5 shows a typical master write sequence. Two transmit data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that all of the “data byte transferred” interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA W A Data Byte A Data Byte A P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) Received by SMBus S = START Interface P = STOP A = ACK Transmitted by W = WRITE SMBus Interface SLA = Slave Address Figure 24.5. Typical Master Write Sequence 242 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 24.5.2. Read Sequence (Master) During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The master in this transfer will be a transmitter during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. The SMBus interface generates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 (READ). Serial data is then received from the slave on SDA while the SMBus outputs the serial clock. The slave transmits one or more bytes of serial data. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte. With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK, and then post the interrupt. It is important to note that the appropriate ACK or NACK value should be set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Writing a 1 to the ACK bit generates an ACK; writing a 0 generates a NACK. Software should write a 0 to the ACK bit for the last data transfer, to transmit a NACK. The interface exits Master Receiver Mode after the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. The interface will switch to Master Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Master Receiver. Figure 24.6 shows a typical master read sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interrupt occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA R A Data Byte A Data Byte N P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) Received by SMBus S = START Interface P = STOP A = ACK N = NACK Transmitted by R = READ SMBus Interface SLA = Slave Address Figure 24.6. Typical Master Read Sequence Rev. 1.1 243

C8051F85x/86x 24.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave) During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The slave in this transfer will be a receiver during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode when a START followed by a slave address and direction bit (WRITE in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The software must respond to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address with a NACK. If hardware ACK generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address which matches the criteria set up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK cycle. If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte. With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK, and then post the interrupt. It is important to note that the appropriate ACK or NACK value should be set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interface exits Slave Receiver Mode after receiving a STOP. The interface will switch to Slave Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Slave Receiver. Figure 24.7 shows a typical slave write sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interrupt occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA W A Data Byte A Data Byte A P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) Received by SMBus S = START Interface P = STOP A = ACK W = WRITE Transmitted by SLA = Slave Address SMBus Interface Figure 24.7. Typical Slave Write Sequence 244 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 24.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave) During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The slave in this transfer will be a receiver during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode (to receive the slave address) when a START followed by a slave address and direction bit (READ in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The software must respond to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address with a NACK. If hardware ACK generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address which matches the criteria set up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK cycle. If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are transmitted. If the received slave address is acknowledged, data should be written to SMB0DAT to be transmitted. The interface enters slave transmitter mode, and transmits one or more bytes of data. After each byte is transmitted, the master sends an acknowledge bit; if the acknowledge bit is an ACK, SMB0DAT should be written with the next data byte. If the acknowledge bit is a NACK, SMB0DAT should not be written to before SI is cleared (an error condition may be generated if SMB0DAT is written following a received NACK while in slave transmitter mode). The interface exits slave transmitter mode after receiving a STOP. The interface will switch to slave receiver mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Slave Transmitter interrupt. Figure 24.8 shows a typical slave read sequence. Two transmitted data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that all of the “data byte transferred” interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA R A Data Byte A Data Byte N P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) Received by SMBus S = START Interface P = STOP N = NACK R = READ Transmitted by SLA = Slave Address SMBus Interface Figure 24.8. Typical Slave Read Sequence 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding The current SMBus status can be easily decoded using the SMB0CN register. The appropriate actions to take in response to an SMBus event depend on whether hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled or disabled. Table 24.5 describes the typical actions when hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is disabled. Table 24.6 describes the typical actions when hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled. In the tables, STATUS VECTOR refers to the four upper bits of SMB0CN: MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO. The shown response options are only the typical responses; application-specific procedures are allowed as long as they conform to the SMBus specification. Highlighted responses are allowed by hardware but do not conform to the SMBus specification. Rev. 1.1 245

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V Load slave address + R/W into 0 0 X 1100 1110 0 0 X A master START was generated. SMB0DAT. A master data or address byte was Set STA to restart transfer. 1 0 X 1110 0 0 0 transmitted; NACK received. Abort transfer. 0 1 X — r e tt Load next data byte into SMB0- 0 0 X 1100 mi DAT. s n a End transfer with STOP. 0 1 X — r T er 1100 End transfer with STOP and start 1 1 X — t A master data or address byte was s 0 0 1 another transfer. a transmitted; ACK received. M Send repeated START. 1 0 X 1110 Switch to Master Receiver Mode 0 0 X 1000 (clear SI without writing new data to SMB0DAT). Acknowledge received byte; 0 0 1 1000 Read SMB0DAT. Send NACK to indicate last byte, 0 1 0 — and send STOP. Send NACK to indicate last byte, 1 1 0 1110 and send STOP followed by er START. v ei Send ACK followed by repeated 1 0 1 1110 ec A master data byte was received; ACK R 1000 1 0 X START. requested. r e Send NACK to indicate last byte, 1 0 0 1110 t s a and send repeated START. M Send ACK and switch to Master 0 0 1 1100 Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). Send NACK and switch to Mas- 0 0 0 1100 ter Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). 246 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V A slave byte was transmitted; NACK No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 0 0 0 received. STOP condition). r e t A slave byte was transmitted; ACK Load SMB0DAT with next data 0 0 X 0100 mit 0100 0 0 1 received. byte to transmit. s n a A Slave byte was transmitted; error No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 r 0 1 X T detected. Master to end transfer). e v a An illegal STOP or bus error was 0 0 X — Sl 0101 0 X X detected while a Slave Transmission Clear STO. was in progress. If Write, Acknowledge received 0 0 1 0000 address A slave address + R/W was received; 1 0 X If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 1 0100 ACK requested. data byte; ACK received address NACK received address. 0 0 0 — If Write, Acknowledge received 0 0 1 0000 0010 address Lost arbitration as master; slave If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 1 0100 r ve 1 1 X address + R/W received; ACK data byte; ACK received address cei requested. NACK received address. 0 0 0 — e R e Reschedule failed transfer; 1 0 0 1110 v a NACK received address. Sl A STOP was detected while addressed 0 0 X — 0 0 X as a Slave Transmitter or Slave Clear STO. 0001 Receiver. Lost arbitration while attempting a No action required (transfer 0 0 0 — 1 1 X STOP. complete/aborted). Acknowledge received byte; 0 0 1 0000 A slave byte was received; ACK 0000 1 0 X Read SMB0DAT. requested. NACK received byte. 0 0 0 — Rev. 1.1 247

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V n Lost arbitration while attempting a Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — o 0010 0 1 X ti repeated START. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 di n o Lost arbitration due to a detected Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — C 0001 0 1 X or STOP. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 r r s E 0000 1 1 X Lost arbitration while transmitting a Abort failed transfer. 0 0 0 — Bu data byte as master. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 0 1110 Table 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V Load slave address + R/W into 0 0 X 1100 1110 0 0 X A master START was generated. SMB0DAT. Set STA to restart transfer. 1 0 X 1110 A master data or address byte was 0 0 0 transmitted; NACK received. Abort transfer. 0 1 X — r te Load next data byte into SMB0- 0 0 X 1100 t mi DAT. s n a End transfer with STOP. 0 1 X — r T r 1100 End transfer with STOP and start 1 1 X — e t A master data or address byte was another transfer. s 0 0 1 Ma transmitted; ACK received. Send repeated START. 1 0 X 1110 Switch to Master Receiver Mode 0 0 1 1000 (clear SI without writing new data to SMB0DAT). Set ACK for initial data byte. 248 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V Set ACK for next data byte; 0 0 1 1000 Read SMB0DAT. Set NACK to indicate next data 0 0 0 1000 byte as the last data byte; 0 0 1 A master data byte was received; ACK Read SMB0DAT. sent. Initiate repeated START. 1 0 0 1110 r e eiv Switch to Master Transmitter 0 0 X 1100 c Mode (write to SMB0DAT before e R 1000 clearing SI). r e t Read SMB0DAT; send STOP. 0 1 0 — s a M Read SMB0DAT; Send STOP 1 1 0 1110 followed by START. A master data byte was received; 0 0 0 NACK sent (last byte). Initiate repeated START. 1 0 0 1110 Switch to Master Transmitter 0 0 X 1100 Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). A slave byte was transmitted; NACK No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 0 0 0 received. STOP condition). r e mitt 0100 0 0 1 Are cselaivveed b.yte was transmitted; ACK Lboytaed t oS MtraBn0sDmAiTt. with next data 0 0 X 0100 s n a A Slave byte was transmitted; error No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 r 0 1 X T detected. Master to end transfer). e av An illegal STOP or bus error was 0 0 X — Sl 0101 0 X X detected while a Slave Transmission Clear STO. was in progress. Rev. 1.1 249

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V If Write, Set ACK for first data 0 0 1 0000 A slave address + R/W was received; byte. 0 0 X ACK sent. If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 X 0100 data byte 0010 If Write, Set ACK for first data 0 0 1 0000 byte. Lost arbitration as master; slave 0 1 X If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 X 0100 r address + R/W received; ACK sent. e data byte v ei c Reschedule failed transfer 1 0 X 1110 e R e A STOP was detected while 0 0 X — v 0 0 X addressed as a Slave Transmitter or Clear STO. a Sl 0001 Slave Receiver. Lost arbitration while attempting a No action required (transfer 0 0 0 — 0 1 X STOP. complete/aborted). Set ACK for next data byte; 0 0 1 0000 Read SMB0DAT. 0000 0 0 X A slave byte was received. Set NACK for next data byte; 0 0 0 0000 Read SMB0DAT. Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — Lost arbitration while attempting a n 0010 0 1 X o repeated START. ti Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 di n o Lost arbitration due to a detected Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — C 0001 0 1 X or STOP. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 r r E s Lost arbitration while transmitting a Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — u 0000 0 1 X B data byte as master. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 250 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 24.7. I2C / SMBus Control Registers Register 24.1. SMB0CF: SMBus0 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ENSMB INH BUSY EXTHOLD SMBTOE SMBFTE SMBCS Type RW RW R RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xC1 Table 24.7. SMB0CF Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 ENSMB SMBus0 Enable. This bit enables the SMBus0 interface when set to 1. When enabled, the interface con- stantly monitors the SDA and SCL pins. 6 INH SMBus0 Slave Inhibit. When this bit is set to logic 1, the SMBus0 does not generate an interrupt when slave events occur. This effectively removes the SMBus0 slave from the bus. Master Mode interrupts are not affected. 5 BUSY SMBus0 Busy Indicator. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a transfer is in progress. It is cleared to logic 0 when a STOP or free-timeout is sensed. 4 EXTHOLD SMBus0 Setup and Hold Time Extension Enable. This bit controls the SDA setup and hold times. 0: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times disabled. 1: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times enabled. 3 SMBTOE SMBus0 SCL Timeout Detection Enable. This bit enables SCL low timeout detection. If set to logic 1, the SMBus0 forces Timer 3 to reload while SCL is high and allows Timer 3 to count when SCL goes low. If Timer 3 is configured to Split Mode, only the High Byte of the timer is held in reload while SCL is high. Timer 3 should be programmed to generate interrupts at 25 ms, and the Timer 3 interrupt service routine should reset SMBus0 communication. 2 SMBFTE SMBus0 Free Timeout Detection Enable. When this bit is set to logic 1, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods. Rev. 1.1 251

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.7. SMB0CF Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 1:0 SMBCS SMBus0 Clock Source Selection. These two bits select the SMBus0 clock source, which is used to generate the SMBus0 bit rate. See the SMBus clock timing section for additional details. 00: Timer 0 Overflow 01: Timer 1 Overflow 10: Timer 2 High Byte Overflow 11: Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow 252 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 24.2. SMB0TC: SMBus0 Timing and Pin Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SWAP Reserved SDD Type RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xAC Table 24.8. SMB0TC Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 SWAP SMBus0 Swap Pins. This bit swaps the order of the SMBus0 pins on the crossbar. 0: SDA is mapped to the lower-numbered port pin, and SCL is mapped to the higher- numbered port pin. 1: SCL is mapped to the lower-numbered port pin, and SDA is mapped to the higher- numbered port pin. 6:2 Reserved Must write reset value. 1:0 SDD SMBus0 Start Detection Window. These bits increase the hold time requirement between SDA falling and SCL falling for START detection. 00: No additional hold time window (0-1 SYSCLK). 01: Increase hold time window to 2-3 SYSCLKs. 10: Increase hold time window to 4-5 SYSCLKs. 11: Increase hold time window to 8-9 SYSCLKs. Rev. 1.1 253

C8051F85x/86x Register 24.3. SMB0CN: SMBus0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MASTER TXMODE STA STO ACKRQ ARBLOST ACK SI Type R R RW RW R R RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xC0 (bit-addressable) Table 24.9. SMB0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 MASTER SMBus0 Master/Slave Indicator. This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus0 is operating as a master. 0: SMBus0 operating in slave mode. 1: SMBus0 operating in master mode. 6 TXMODE SMBus0 Transmit Mode Indicator. This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus0 is operating as a transmitter. 0: SMBus0 in Receiver Mode. 1: SMBus0 in Transmitter Mode. 5 STA SMBus0 Start Flag. When reading STA, a 1 indicates that a start or repeated start condition was detected on the bus. Writing a 1 to the STA bit initiates a start or repeated start on the bus. 4 STO SMBus0 Stop Flag. When reading STO, a 1 indicates that a stop condition was detected on the bus (in slave mode) or is pending (in master mode). When acting as a master, writing a 1 to the STO bit initiates a stop condition on the bus. This bit is cleared by hardware. 3 ACKRQ SMBus0 Acknowledge Request. 0: No ACK requested. 1: ACK requested. 2 ARBLOST SMBus0 Arbitration Lost Indicator. 0: No arbitration error. 1: Arbitration error occurred. 1 ACK SMBus0 Acknowledge. When read as a master, the ACK bit indicates whether an ACK (1) or NACK (0) is received during the most recent byte transfer. As a slave, this bit should be written to send an ACK (1) or NACK (0) to a master request. Note that the logic level of the ACK bit on the SMBus interface is inverted from the logic of the register ACK bit. 254 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Table 24.9. SMB0CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 SI SMBus0 Interrupt Flag. This bit is set by hardware to indicate that the current SMBus0 state machine operation (such as writing a data or address byte) is complete. While SI is set, SCL0 is held low and SMBus0 is stalled. SI0 must be cleared by software. Clearing SI0 initiates the next SMBus0 state machine operation. Rev. 1.1 255

C8051F85x/86x Register 24.4. SMB0ADR: SMBus0 Slave Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLV GC Type RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xD7 Table 24.10. SMB0ADR Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:1 SLV SMBus Hardware Slave Address. Defines the SMBus0 Slave Address(es) for automatic hardware acknowledgement. Only address bits which have a 1 in the corresponding bit position in SLVM are checked against the incoming address. This allows multiple addresses to be recognized. 0 GC General Call Address Enable. When hardware address recognition is enabled (EHACK = 1), this bit will determine whether the General Call Address (0x00) is also recognized by hardware. 0: General Call Address is ignored. 1: General Call Address is recognized. 256 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 24.5. SMB0ADM: SMBus0 Slave Address Mask Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLVM EHACK Type RW RW Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 SFR Address: 0xD6 Table 24.11. SMB0ADM Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:1 SLVM SMBus0 Slave Address Mask. Defines which bits of register SMB0ADR are compared with an incoming address byte, and which bits are ignored. Any bit set to 1 in SLVM enables comparisons with the corre- sponding bit in SLV. Bits set to 0 are ignored (can be either 0 or 1 in the incoming address). 0 EHACK Hardware Acknowledge Enable. Enables hardware acknowledgement of slave address and received data bytes. 0: Firmware must manually acknowledge all incoming address and data bytes. 1: Automatic slave address recognition and hardware acknowledge is enabled. Rev. 1.1 257

C8051F85x/86x Register 24.6. SMB0DAT: SMBus0 Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SMB0DAT Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xC2 Table 24.12. SMB0DAT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 SMB0DAT SMBus0 Data. The SMB0DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus0 serial interface or a byte that has just been received on the SMBus0 serial interface. The CPU can safely read from or write to this register whenever the SI serial interrupt flag is set to logic 1. The serial data in the register remains stable as long as the SI flag is set. When the SI flag is not set, the system may be in the process of shifting data in/out and the CPU should not attempt to access this register. 258 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 25. Timers (Timer0, Timer1, Timer2 and Timer3) Each MCU in the C8051F85x/86x family includes four counter/timers: two are 16-bit counter/timers compatible with those found in the standard 8051, and two are 16-bit auto-reload timers for timing peripherals or for general purpose use. These timers can be used to measure time intervals, count external events and generate periodic interrupt requests. Timer 0 and Timer 1 are nearly identical and have four primary modes of operation. Timer 2 and Timer 3 are also identical and offer both 16-bit and split 8-bit timer functionality with auto-reload capabilities. Timer 2 and Timer 3 both offer a capture function, but are different in their system-level connections. Timer 2 is capable of performing a capture function on an external signal input routed through the crossbar, while the Timer 3 capture is dedicated to the low- frequency oscillator output. Table 25.1 summarizes the modes available to each timer. Table 25.1. Timer Modes Timer 0 and Timer 1 Modes Timer 2 Modes Timer 3 Modes 13-bit counter/timer 16-bit timer with auto-reload 16-bit timer with auto-reload 16-bit counter/timer Two 8-bit timers with auto-reload Two 8-bit timers with auto-reload 8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload Input pin capture Low-frequency oscillator capture Two 8-bit counter/timers (Timer 0 only) Timers 0 and 1 may be clocked by one of five sources, determined by the Timer Mode Select bits (T1M– T0M) and the Clock Scale bits (SCA1–SCA0). The Clock Scale bits define a pre-scaled clock from which Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 may be clocked. Timer 0/1 may then be configured to use this pre-scaled clock signal or the system clock. Timer 2 and Timer 3 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. Timer 0 and Timer 1 may also be operated as counters. When functioning as a counter, a counter/timer register is incremented on each high-to-low transition at the selected input pin (T0 or T1). Events with a frequency of up to one-fourth the system clock frequency can be counted. The input signal need not be periodic, but it must be held at a given level for at least two full system clock cycles to ensure the level is properly sampled. All four timers are capable of clocking other peripherals and triggering events in the system. The individual peripherals select which timer to use for their respective functions. Table 25.2 summarizes the peripheral connections for each timer. Note that the Timer 2 and Timer 3 high overflows apply to the full timer when operating in 16-bit mode or the high-byte timer when operating in 8-bit split mode. Table 25.2. Timer Peripheral Clocking / Event Triggering Function T0 T1 T2 High T2 Low T3 High T3 Low Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow UART0 Baud Rate X SMBus0 Clock Rate X X X X SMBus0 SCL Low Timeout X PCA0 Clock X Rev. 1.1 259

C8051F85x/86x Table 25.2. Timer Peripheral Clocking / Event Triggering Function T0 T1 T2 High T2 Low T3 High T3 Low Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow ADC0 Conversion Start X X* X* X* X* *Note: The high-side overflow is used when the timer is in16-bit mode. The low-side overflow is used in 8-bit mode. 260 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 25.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1 Timer 0 and Timer 1 are each implemented as a16-bit register accessed as two separate bytes: a low byte (TL0 or TL1) and a high byte (TH0 or TH1). The Counter/Timer Control register (TCON) is used to enable Timer 0 and Timer 1 as well as indicate status. Timer 0 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET0 bit in the IE register. Timer 1 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET1 bit in the IE register. Both counter/ timers operate in one of four primary modes selected by setting the Mode Select bits T1M1–T0M0 in the Counter/Timer Mode register (TMOD). Each timer can be configured independently for the operating modes described below. Rev. 1.1 261

C8051F85x/86x 25.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer Timer 0 and Timer 1 operate as 13-bit counter/timers in Mode 0. The following describes the configuration and operation of Timer 0. However, both timers operate identically, and Timer 1 is configured in the same manner as described for Timer 0. The TH0 register holds the eight MSBs of the 13-bit counter/timer. TL0 holds the five LSBs in bit positions TL0.4–TL0.0. The three upper bits of TL0 (TL0.7–TL0.5) are indeterminate and should be masked out or ignored when reading. As the 13-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0x1FFF (all ones) to 0x0000, the timer overflow flag TF0 in TCON is set and an interrupt will occur if Timer 0 interrupts are enabled. The CT0 bit in the TMOD register selects the counter/timer's clock source. When CT0 is set to logic 1, high-to-low transitions at the selected Timer 0 input pin (T0) increment the timer register. Clearing CT selects the clock defined by the T0M bit in register CKCON. When T0M is set, Timer 0 is clocked by the system clock. When T0M is cleared, Timer 0 is clocked by the source selected by the Clock Scale bits in CKCON. Setting the TR0 bit enables the timer when either GATE0 in the TMOD register is logic 0 or the input signal INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF. Setting GATE0 to 1 allows the timer to be controlled by the external input signal INT0, facilitating pulse width measurements. TR0 GATE0 INT0 Counter/Timer 0 X X Disabled 1 0 X Enabled 1 1 0 Disabled 1 1 1 Enabled Note: X = Don't Care Setting TR0 does not force the timer to reset. The timer registers should be loaded with the desired initial value before the timer is enabled. TL1 and TH1 form the 13-bit register for Timer 1 in the same manner as described above for TL0 and TH0. Timer 1 is configured and controlled using the relevant TCON and TMOD bits just as with Timer 0. The input signal INT1 is used with Timer 1; the /INT1 polarity is defined by bit IN1PL in register IT01CF. T0M CT0 Pre-scaled Clock 0 0 SYSCLK 1 1 T0 TCLK TL0 TH0 TR0 TF0 (5 bits) (8 bits) (Interrupt Flag) GATE0 IN0PL INT0 XOR Figure 25.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram 262 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 25.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer Mode 1 operation is the same as Mode 0, except that the counter/timer registers use all 16 bits. The counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 1 in the same manner as for Mode 0. Rev. 1.1 263

C8051F85x/86x 25.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload Mode 2 configures Timer 0 and Timer 1 to operate as 8-bit counter/timers with automatic reload of the start value. TL0 holds the count and TH0 holds the reload value. When the counter in TL0 overflows from all ones to 0x00, the timer overflow flag TF0 in the TCON register is set and the counter in TL0 is reloaded from TH0. If Timer 0 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will occur when the TF0 flag is set. The reload value in TH0 is not changed. TL0 must be initialized to the desired value before enabling the timer for the first count to be correct. When in Mode 2, Timer 1 operates identically to Timer 0. Both counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 2 in the same manner as Mode 0. Setting the TR0 bit enables the timer when either GATE0 in the TMOD register is logic 0 or when the input signal INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF. T0M CT0 Pre-scaled Clock 0 0 SYSCLK 1 1 T0 TCLK TL0 TR0 TF0 (8 bits) (Interrupt Flag) GATE0 TH0 IN0PL (8 bits) Reload INT0 XOR Figure 25.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram 264 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 25.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only) In Mode 3, Timer 0 is configured as two separate 8-bit counter/timers held in TL0 and TH0. The counter/ timer in TL0 is controlled using the Timer 0 control/status bits in TCON and TMOD: TR0, CT0, GATE0 and TF0. TL0 can use either the system clock or an external input signal as its timebase. The TH0 register is restricted to a timer function sourced by the system clock or prescaled clock. TH0 is enabled using the Timer 1 run control bit TR1. TH0 sets the Timer 1 overflow flag TF1 on overflow and thus controls the Timer 1 interrupt. Timer 1 is inactive in Mode 3. When Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be operated in Modes 0, 1 or 2, but cannot be clocked by external signals nor set the TF1 flag and generate an interrupt. However, the Timer 1 overflow can be used to generate baud rates for the SMBus and/or UART, and/or initiate ADC conversions. While Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 run control is handled through its mode settings. To run Timer 1 while Timer 0 is in Mode 3, set the Timer 1 Mode as 0, 1, or 2. To disable Timer 1, configure it for Mode 3. T0M CT0 Pre-scaled Clock 0 TR1 TH0 TF1 (8 bits) (Interrupt Flag) SYSCLK 1 0 1 T0 TCLK TL0 TR0 TF0 (8 bits) (Interrupt Flag) GATE0 IN0PL INT0 XOR Figure 25.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram Rev. 1.1 265

C8051F85x/86x 25.2. Timer 2 and Timer 3 Timer 2 and Timer 3 are functionally equivalent, with the only differences being the top-level connections to other parts of the system, as detailed in Table 25.1 and Table 25.2. The timers are 16 bits wide, formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMRnL (low byte) and TMRnH (high byte). Each timer may operate in 16-bit auto-reload mode or (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TnSPLIT bit in TMRnCN defines the timer operation mode. The timers may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator source divided by 8. Note that the external oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock. 25.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload When TnSPLIT is zero, the timer operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. In this mode, the timer may be configured to clock from SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. As the 16-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit value in the timer reload registers (TMRnRLH and TMRnRLL) is loaded into the main timer count register as shown in Figure 25.4, and the High Byte Overflow Flag (TFnH) is set. If the timer interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated on each timer overflow. Additionally, if the timer interrupts are enabled and the TFnLEN bit is set, an interrupt will be generated each time the lower 8 bits (TMRnL) overflow from 0xFF to 0x00. TnXCLK TnML TFnL Overflow YSCLK / 12 0 0 TFnH TRn TCLK TMRnL TMRnH Overflow Inter TCLK / 8 1 SYSCLK 1 TFnLEN TMRnRLL TMRnRLH Reload Figure 25.4. 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram 266 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 25.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload When TnSPLIT is set, the timer operates as two 8-bit timers (TMRnH and TMRnL). Both 8-bit timers operate in auto-reload mode as shown in Figure 25.5. TMRnRLL holds the reload value for TMRnL; TMRnRLH holds the reload value for TMRnH. The TRn bit in TMRnCN handles the run control for TMRnH. TMRnL is always running when configured for 8-bit auto-reload mode. Each 8-bit timer may be configured to clock from SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. The Clock Select bits (TnMH and TnML in CKCON) select either SYSCLK or the clock defined by the External Clock Select bit (TnXCLK in TMRnCN), as follows: TnMH TnXCLK TMRnH Clock Source TnML TnXCLK TMRnL Clock Source 0 0 SYSCLK / 12 0 0 SYSCLK / 12 0 1 External Clock / 8 0 1 External Clock / 8 1 X SYSCLK 1 X SYSCLK The TFnH bit is set when TMRnH overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TFnL bit is set when TMRnL overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. When timer interrupts are enabled, an interrupt is generated each time TMRnH overflows. If timer interrupts are enabled and TFnLEN is set, an interrupt is generated each time either TMRnL or TMRnH overflows. When TFnLEN is enabled, software must check the TFnH and TFnL flags to determine the source of the timer interrupt. The TFnH and TFnL interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware and must be manually cleared by software. TnXCLK Reload TnMH TMRnRLH SYSCLK / 12 0 0 TFnH xternal Clock / 8 1 TCLK Overflow TMRnH TRn Interrupt 1 TFnLEN Reload TMRnRLL SYSCLK TnML 1 TCLK TMRnL TFnL Overflow 0 Figure 25.5. 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram Rev. 1.1 267

C8051F85x/86x 25.2.3. Capture Mode Capture mode allows an external input (Timer 2) or the low-frequency oscillator clock (Timer 3) to be measured against the system clock or an external oscillator source. The timer can be clocked from the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator divided by 8, depending on the TnML, and TnXCLK settings. Setting TFnCEN to 1 enables Capture Mode. In this mode, TnSPLIT should be set to 0, as the full 16-bit timer is used. Upon a falling edge of the input capture signal, the contents of the timer register (TMRnH:TMRnL) are loaded into the reload registers (TMRnRLH:TMRnRLL) and the TFnH flag is set. By recording the difference between two successive timer capture values, the period of the captured signal can be determined with respect to the selected timer clock. TnXCLK TnML SYSCLK / 12 0 0 TRn TCLK TMRnL TMRnH External Clock / 8 1 SYSCLK 1 Capture T2 Pin (Timer 2) TFnCEN TMRnRLL TMRnRLH TFnH L-F Oscillator (Timer 3) (Interrupt) Figure 25.6. Capture Mode Block Diagram 268 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 25.3. Timer Control Registers Register 25.1. CKCON: Clock Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T3MH T3ML T2MH T2ML T1M T0M SCA Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x8E Table 25.3. CKCON Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 T3MH Timer 3 High Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 3 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only). 0: Timer 3 high byte uses the clock defined by the T3XCLK bit in TMR3CN. 1: Timer 3 high byte uses the system clock. 6 T3ML Timer 3 Low Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to Timer 3. Selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer in split 8-bit timer mode. 0: Timer 3 low byte uses the clock defined by the T3XCLK bit in TMR3CN. 1: Timer 3 low byte uses the system clock. 5 T2MH Timer 2 High Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 2 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only). 0: Timer 2 high byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN. 1: Timer 2 high byte uses the system clock. 4 T2ML Timer 2 Low Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to Timer 2. If Timer 2 is configured in split 8-bit timer mode, this bit selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer. 0: Timer 2 low byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN. 1: Timer 2 low byte uses the system clock. 3 T1M Timer 1 Clock Select. Selects the clock source supplied to Timer 1. Ignored when C/T1 is set to 1. 0: Timer 1 uses the clock defined by the prescale field, SCA. 1: Timer 1 uses the system clock. 2 T0M Timer 0 Clock Select. Selects the clock source supplied to Timer 0. Ignored when C/T0 is set to 1. 0: Counter/Timer 0 uses the clock defined by the prescale field, SCA. 1: Counter/Timer 0 uses the system clock. Rev. 1.1 269

C8051F85x/86x Table 25.3. CKCON Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 1:0 SCA Timer 0/1 Prescale Bits. These bits control the Timer 0/1 Clock Prescaler: 00: System clock divided by 12 01: System clock divided by 4 10: System clock divided by 48 11: External clock divided by 8 (synchronized with the system clock) 270 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.2. TCON: Timer 0/1 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF1 TR1 TF0 TR0 IE1 IT1 IE0 IT0 Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x88 (bit-addressable) Table 25.4. TCON Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 TF1 Timer 1 Overflow Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when Timer 1 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 1 interrupt service routine. 6 TR1 Timer 1 Run Control. Timer 1 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. 5 TF0 Timer 0 Overflow Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when Timer 0 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 0 interrupt service routine. 4 TR0 Timer 0 Run Control. Timer 0 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. 3 IE1 External Interrupt 1. This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is detected. It can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 1 service routine in edge-triggered mode. 2 IT1 Interrupt 1 Type Select. This bit selects whether the configured INT1 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. INT1 is configured active low or high by the IN1PL bit in register IT01CF. 0: INT1 is level triggered. 1: INT1 is edge triggered. 1 IE0 External Interrupt 0. This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT0 is detected. It can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 0 service routine in edge-triggered mode. 0 IT0 Interrupt 0 Type Select. This bit selects whether the configured INT0 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. INT0 is configured active low or high by the IN0PL bit in register IT01CF. 0: INT0 is level triggered. 1: INT0 is edge triggered. Rev. 1.1 271

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.3. TMOD: Timer 0/1 Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name GATE1 CT1 T1M GATE0 CT0 T0M Type RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x89 Table 25.5. TMOD Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 GATE1 Timer 1 Gate Control. 0: Timer 1 enabled when TR1 = 1 irrespective of INT1 logic level. 1: Timer 1 enabled only when TR1 = 1 and INT1 is active as defined by bit IN1PL in reg- ister IT01CF. 6 CT1 Counter/Timer 1 Select. 0: Timer Mode. Timer 1 increments on the clock defined by T1M in the CKCON register. 1: Counter Mode. Timer 1 increments on high-to-low transitions of an external pin (T1). 5:4 T1M Timer 1 Mode Select. These bits select the Timer 1 operation mode. 00: Mode 0, 13-bit Counter/Timer 01: Mode 1, 16-bit Counter/Timer 10: Mode 2, 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload 11: Mode 3, Timer 1 Inactive 3 GATE0 Timer 0 Gate Control. 0: Timer 0 enabled when TR0 = 1 irrespective of INT0 logic level. 1: Timer 0 enabled only when TR0 = 1 and INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in reg- ister IT01CF. 2 CT0 Counter/Timer 0 Select. 0: Timer Mode. Timer 0 increments on the clock defined by T0M in the CKCON register. 1: Counter Mode. Timer 0 increments on high-to-low transitions of an external pin (T0). 1:0 T0M Timer 0 Mode Select. These bits select the Timer 0 operation mode. 00: Mode 0, 13-bit Counter/Timer 01: Mode 1, 16-bit Counter/Timer 10: Mode 2, 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload 11: Mode 3, Two 8-bit Counter/Timers 272 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.4. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TL0 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x8A Table 25.6. TL0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TL0 Timer 0 Low Byte. The TL0 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 0. Rev. 1.1 273

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.5. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TL1 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x8B Table 25.7. TL1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TL1 Timer 1 Low Byte. The TL1 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 1. 274 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.6. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TH0 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x8C Table 25.8. TH0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TH0 Timer 0 High Byte. The TH0 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 0. Rev. 1.1 275

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.7. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TH1 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x8D Table 25.9. TH1 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TH1 Timer 1 High Byte. The TH1 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 1. 276 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.8. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF2H TF2L TF2LEN TF2CEN T2SPLIT TR2 Reserved T2XCLK Type RW RW RW RW RW RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xC8 (bit-addressable) Table 25.10. TMR2CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 TF2H Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 2 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit mode, this will occur when Timer 2 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 2 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 2 interrupt ser- vice routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 6 TF2L Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 2 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF2L will be set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 2 mode. This bit is not automat- ically cleared by hardware. 5 TF2LEN Timer 2 Low Byte Interrupt Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 2 interrupts are also enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 2 overflows. 4 TF2CEN Timer 2 Capture Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 2 Capture Mode. If TF2CEN is set and Timer 2 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated on a falling edge of the selected T2 input pin, and the current 16-bit timer value in TMR2H:TMR2L will be copied to TMR2RLH:TMR2RLL. 3 T2SPLIT Timer 2 Split Mode Enable. When this bit is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload. 0: Timer 2 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode. 1: Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers. 2 TR2 Timer 2 Run Control. Timer 2 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR2H only; TMR2L is always enabled in split mode. 1 Reserved Must write reset value. Rev. 1.1 277

C8051F85x/86x Table 25.10. TMR2CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 T2XCLK Timer 2 External Clock Select. This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 2. If Timer 2 is in 8-bit mode, this bit selects the external oscillator clock source for both timer bytes. However, the Timer 2 Clock Select bits (T2MH and T2ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select between the external clock and the system clock for either timer. 0: Timer 2 clock is the system clock divided by 12. 1: Timer 2 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK). 278 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.9. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2RLL Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xCA Table 25.11. TMR2RLL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2RLL Timer 2 Reload Low Byte. When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR2RLL holds the reload value for the low byte of Timer 2 (TMR2L). When operating in capture mode, TMR2RLL is the cap- tured value of TMR2L. Rev. 1.1 279

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.10. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2RLH Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xCB Table 25.12. TMR2RLH Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2RLH Timer 2 Reload High Byte. When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR2RLH holds the reload value for the high byte of Timer 2 (TMR2H). When oeprating in capture mode, TMR2RLH is the captured value of TMR2H. 280 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.11. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2L Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xCC Table 25.13. TMR2L Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2L Timer 2 Low Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR2L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit mode, TMR2L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value. Rev. 1.1 281

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.12. TMR2H: Timer 2 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2H Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0xCD Table 25.14. TMR2H Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR2H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit mode, TMR2H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value. 282 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.13. TMR3CN: Timer 3 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF3H TF3L TF3LEN TF3CEN T3SPLIT TR3 Reserved T3XCLK Type RW RW RW RW RW RW R RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x91 Table 25.15. TMR3CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 TF3H Timer 3 High Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 3 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16-bit mode, this will occur when Timer 3 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 3 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 3 interrupt ser- vice routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 6 TF3L Timer 3 Low Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 3 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF3L will be set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 3 mode. This bit is not automat- ically cleared by hardware. 5 TF3LEN Timer 3 Low Byte Interrupt Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 3 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 3 interrupts are also enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 3 overflows. 4 TF3CEN Timer 3 Capture Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 3 Capture Mode. If TF3CEN is set and Timer 3 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated on a falling edge of the low-fre- quency oscillator output, and the current 16-bit timer value in TMR3H:TMR3L will be cop- ied to TMR3RLH:TMR3RLL. 3 T3SPLIT Timer 3 Split Mode Enable. When this bit is set, Timer 3 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload. 0: Timer 3 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode. 1: Timer 3 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers. 2 TR3 Timer 3 Run Control. Timer 3 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR3H only; TMR3L is always enabled in split mode. 1 Reserved Must write reset value. Rev. 1.1 283

C8051F85x/86x Table 25.15. TMR3CN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 T3XCLK Timer 3 External Clock Select. This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 3. If Timer 3 is in 8-bit mode, this bit selects the external oscillator clock source for both timer bytes. However, the Timer 3 Clock Select bits (T3MH and T3ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select between the external clock and the system clock for either timer. 0: Timer 3 clock is the system clock divided by 12. 1: Timer 3 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK). 284 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.14. TMR3RLL: Timer 3 Reload Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3RLL Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x92 Table 25.16. TMR3RLL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3RLL Timer 3 Reload Low Byte. When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR3RLL holds the reload value for the low byte of Timer 3 (TMR3L). When operating in capture mode, TMR3RLL is the cap- tured value of TMR3L. Rev. 1.1 285

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.15. TMR3RLH: Timer 3 Reload High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3RLH Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x93 Table 25.17. TMR3RLH Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3RLH Timer 3 Reload High Byte. When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR3RLH holds the reload value for the high byte of Timer 3 (TMR3H). When oeprating in capture mode, TMR3RLH is the captured value of TMR3H. 286 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.16. TMR3L: Timer 3 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3L Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x94 Table 25.18. TMR3L Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3L Timer 3 Low Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR3L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 3. In 8-bit mode, TMR3L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value. Rev. 1.1 287

C8051F85x/86x Register 25.17. TMR3H: Timer 3 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3H Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x95 Table 25.19. TMR3H Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3H Timer 3 High Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR3H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 3. In 8-bit mode, TMR3H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value. 288 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 26. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0) UART0 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering modes 1 and 3 of the standard 8051 UART. Enhanced baud rate support allows a wide range of clock sources to generate standard baud rates (details in Section “26.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation” on page 289). Received data buffering allows UART0 to start reception of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous data byte. UART0 has two associated SFRs: Serial Control Register 0 (SCON0) and Serial Data Buffer 0 (SBUF0). The single SBUF0 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Writes to SBUF0 always access the transmit register. Reads of SBUF0 always access the buffered receive register; it is not possible to read data from the transmit register. With UART0 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI is set in SCON0), or a data byte has been received (RI is set in SCON0). The UART0 interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually by soft- ware, allowing software to determine the cause of the UART0 interrupt (transmit complete or receive com- plete). UART0 TB8 TI, RI (9th bit) Interrupts Output Shift TX Register Control / Configuration SBUF (8 LSBs) Baud Rate TX Clk Input Shift Generator RX RX Clk Register (Timer 1) RB8 (9th bit) START Detection Figure 26.1. UART0 Block Diagram 26.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation The UART0 baud rate is generated by Timer 1 in 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TX clock is generated by TL1; the RX clock is generated by a copy of TL1 (shown as RX Timer in Figure 26.2), which is not user- accessible. Both TX and RX Timer overflows are divided by two to generate the TX and RX baud rates. The RX Timer runs when Timer 1 is enabled, and uses the same reload value (TH1). However, an RX Timer reload is forced when a START condition is detected on the RX pin. This allows a receive to begin any time a START is detected, independent of the TX Timer state. Rev. 1.1 289

C8051F85x/86x Baud Rate Generator (In Timer 1) TL1 2 TX Clock TH1 START Detection RX Timer 2 RX Clock Figure 26.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic Timer 1 should be configured for Mode 2, 8-bit auto-reload. The Timer 1 reload value should be set so that overflows will occur at two times the desired UART baud rate frequency. Note that Timer 1 may be clocked by one of six sources: SYSCLK, SYSCLK/4, SYSCLK/12, SYSCLK/48, the external oscillator clock/8, or an external input T1. For any given Timer 1 overflow rate, the UART0 baud rate is determined by Equation 26.1. 1 UartBaudRate = --- T1_Overflow_Rate 2 Equation 26.1. UART0 Baud Rate Timer 1 overflow rate is selected as described in the Timer section. A quick reference for typical baud rates and system clock frequencies is given in Table 26.1. 290 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 26.2. Operational Modes UART0 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. The UART mode (8-bit or 9-bit) is selected by the S0MODE bit in register SCON. 26.2.1. 8-Bit UART 8-Bit UART mode uses a total of 10 bits per data byte: one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop bit. Data are transmitted LSB first from the TX pin and received at the RX pin. On receive, the eight data bits are stored in SBUF0 and the stop bit goes into RB8 in the SCON register. Data transmission begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI Transmit Interrupt Flag is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin any time after the REN Receive Enable bit is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: RI must be logic 0, and if MCE is logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1. In the event of a receive data overrun, the first received 8 bits are latched into the SBUF0 receive register and the following overrun data bits are lost. If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF0, the stop bit is stored in RB8 and the RI flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB8 will not be loaded and the RI flag will not be set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI or RI is set. MARK START BIT D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 STOP SPACE BIT BIT TIMES BIT SAMPLING Figure 26.3. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram Rev. 1.1 291

C8051F85x/86x 26.2.2. 9-Bit UART 9-bit UART mode uses a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable ninth data bit, and a stop bit. The state of the ninth transmit data bit is determined by the value in TB8, which is assigned by user software. It can be assigned the value of the parity flag (bit P in register PSW) for error detection, or used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit goes into RB8 and the stop bit is ignored. Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI Transmit Interrupt Flag is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin any time after the REN Receive Enable bit is set to 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: (1) RI must be logic 0, and (2) if MCE is logic 1, the 9th bit must be logic 1 (when MCE is logic 0, the state of the ninth data bit is unimportant). If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data are stored in SBUF0, the ninth bit is stored in RB8, and the RI flag is set to 1. If the above conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB8 will not be loaded and the RI flag will not be set to 1. A UART0 interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI or RI is set to 1. MARK START BIT D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 STOP SPACE BIT BIT TIMES BIT SAMPLING Figure 26.4. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram 292 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 26.3. Multiprocessor Communications 9-Bit UART mode supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more slave processors by special use of the ninth data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the ninth bit is always set to logic 0. Setting the MCE bit of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is received, the UART will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic 1 (RB8 = 1) signifying an address byte has been received. In the UART interrupt handler, software will compare the received address with the slave's own assigned 8-bit address. If the addresses match, the slave will clear its MCE bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the following data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed leave their MCE bits set and do not generate interrupts on the reception of the following data bytes, thereby ignoring the data. Once the entire message is received, the addressed slave resets its MCE bit to ignore all transmissions until it receives the next address byte. Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master and slave(s). Master Slave Slave Slave Device Device Device Device V+ RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX Figure 26.5. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram Rev. 1.1 293

C8051F85x/86x Table 26.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using the Internal 24.5 MHz Oscillator Frequency: 49 MHz Target Baud Rate Oscillator Timer Clock SCA1–SCA0 T1M1 Timer 1 Baud Rate % Error Divide Source (pre-scale Reload (bps) Factor select)1 Value (hex) 230400 –0.32% 106 SYSCLK XX2 1 0xCB 115200 –0.32% 212 SYSCLK XX 1 0x96 m c. 57600 0.15% 426 SYSCLK XX 1 0x2B o s fr O 28800 –0.32% 848 SYSCLK/4 01 0 0x96 LK al C n 14400 0.15% 1704 SYSCLK/12 00 0 0xB9 r S e Y nt 9600 –0.32% 2544 SYSCLK/12 00 0 0x96 S I 2400 –0.32% 10176 SYSCLK/48 10 0 0x96 1200 0.15% 20448 SYSCLK/48 10 0 0x2B Notes: 1. SCA1–SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Timer1 chapter. 2. X = Don’t care. 294 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 26.4. UART Control Registers Register 26.1. SCON0: UART0 Serial Port Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SMODE Reserved MCE REN TB8 RB8 TI RI Type RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW Reset 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x98 (bit-addressable) Table 26.2. SCON0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7 SMODE Serial Port 0 Operation Mode. Selects the UART0 Operation Mode. 0: 8-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate (Mode 0). 1: 9-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate (Mode 1). 6 Reserved Must write reset value. 5 MCE Multiprocessor Communication Enable. This bit enables checking of the stop bit or the 9th bit in multi-drop communication buses. The function of this bit is dependent on the UART0 operation mode selected by the SMODE bit. In Mode 0 (8-bits), the peripheral will check that the stop bit is logic 1. In Mode 1 (9-bits) the peripheral will check for a logic 1 on the 9th bit. 0: Ignore level of 9th bit / Stop bit. 1: RI is set and an interrupt is generated only when the stop bit is logic 1 (Mode 0) or when the 9th bit is logic 1 (Mode 1). 4 REN Receive Enable. 0: UART0 reception disabled. 1: UART0 reception enabled. 3 TB8 Ninth Transmission Bit. The logic level of this bit will be sent as the ninth transmission bit in 9-bit UART Mode (Mode 1). Unused in 8-bit mode (Mode 0). 2 RB8 Ninth Receive Bit. RB8 is assigned the value of the STOP bit in Mode 0; it is assigned the value of the 9th data bit in Mode 1. 1 TI Transmit Interrupt Flag. Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART0 (after the 8th bit in 8-bit UART Mode, or at the beginning of the STOP bit in 9-bit UART Mode). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 inter- rupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. Rev. 1.1 295

C8051F85x/86x Table 26.2. SCON0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 0 RI Receive Interrupt Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART0 (set at the STOP bit sampling time). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to 1 causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. 296 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 26.2. SBUF0: UART0 Serial Port Data Buffer Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SBUF0 Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address: 0x99 Table 26.3. SBUF0 Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 SBUF0 Serial Data Buffer Bits. This SFR accesses two registers: a transmit shift register and a receive latch register. When data is written to SBUF0, it goes to the transmit shift register and is held for serial transmission. Writing a byte to SBUF0 initiates the transmission. A read of SBUF0 returns the contents of the receive latch. Rev. 1.1 297

C8051F85x/86x 27. Watchdog Timer (WDT0) The C8051F85x/86x family includes a programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) running off the low- frequency oscillator. A WDT overflow will force the MCU into the reset state. To prevent the reset, the WDT must be restarted by application software before overflow. If the system experiences a software or hardware malfunction preventing the software from restarting the WDT, the WDT will overflow and cause a reset. Following a reset the WDT is automatically enabled and running with the default maximum time interval. If desired the WDT can be disabled by system software or locked on to prevent accidental disabling. Once locked, the WDT cannot be disabled until the next system reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. The WDT consists of an internal timer running from the low-frequency oscillator. The timer measures the period between specific writes to its control register. If this period exceeds the programmed limit, a WDT reset is generated. The WDT can be enabled and disabled as needed in software, or can be permanently enabled if desired. When the WDT is active, the low-frequency oscillator is forced on. All watchdog features are controlled via the Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCN). Watchdog Timer Counter Timeout Interval Comparator WDT Flag (Always Active) Watchdog Reset Lock Disable Enable/Reset Counter Divided LFOSC0 Figure 27.1. Watchdog Timer Block Diagram 27.1. Features The watchdog timer includes a 16-bit timer with a programmable reset period. The registers are protected from inadvertent access by an independent lock and key interface. The Watchdog Timer has the following features: Programmable timeout interval Runs from the low-frequency oscillator Lock-out feature to prevent any modification until a system reset 298 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 27.2. Enabling / Resetting the WDT The watchdog timer is both enabled and reset when writing 0xA5 to the WDTCN register. The user's application software should include periodic writes of 0xA5 to WDTCN as needed to prevent a watchdog timer overflow. The counter is incremented on every divided LFOSC0 when the WDT is enabled. The WDT is enabled and reset as a result of any system reset. 27.3. Disabling the WDT Writing 0xDE followed by 0xAD to the WDTCN register disables the WDT. The following code segment illustrates disabling the WDT: CLR EA ; disable all interrupts MOV WDTCN,#0DEh ; disable software watchdog timer MOV WDTCN,#0ADh ; insert wait for 3 divided LFOSCO0 clock periods SETB EA ; re-enable interrupts Note: Code that implements the wait must be inserted. Code that implements the wait is not explicitly implemented in the above sequence because it depends on the divided LFOSC0 clock and the SYSCLK clock selected. The writes of 0xDE and 0xAD must occur within 4 clock cycles of each other, or the disable operation is ignored. Interrupts should be disabled during this procedure to avoid delay between the two writes. The counter retains its value when the WDT is disabled. The counter comparator is always active and can generate a watchdog timer reset even if the watchdog timer is disabled. For example, a watchdog timer reset can be generated when changing from a higher to a lower interval as the counter is not cleared when the WDT is disabled. To avoid this always clear the counter by resetting the WDT before disabling and changing the timeout interval to a lower interval i.e., follow the code sequence shown below in “27.5. Setting the WDT Interval” . 27.4. Disabling the WDT Lockout Writing 0xFF to WDTCN locks out the disable feature. Once locked out, the disable operation is ignored until the next system reset. Writing 0xFF does not enable or reset the watchdog timer. Applications always intending to use the watchdog should write 0xFF to WDTCN in the initialization code. 27.5. Setting the WDT Interval WDTCN.[2:0] controls the watchdog timeout interval. The interval is given by the following equation, where Tlfosc is the low-frequency oscillator clock period: T 4WDTCN[2:0]+3 LFOSC Rev. 1.1 299

C8051F85x/86x This provides a nominal interval range of 0.8 ms to 13.1 s. WDTCN.7 must be logic 0 when setting this interval. Reading WDTCN returns the programmed interval. WDTCN.[2:0] reads 111b after a system reset. The following code segment illustrates changing the WDT interval to a lower interval: MOV WDTCN,#0A5h ; reset watchdog timer ; insert wait for 2 divided LFOSC0 clock periods CLR EA ; disable all interrupts MOV WDTCN,#0DEh ; disable software watchdog timer MOV WDTCN,#0ADh ; insert wait for 3 divided LFOSC0 clock periods SETB EA ; re-enable interrupts MOV WDTCN,WDT_interval ; change the current WDT interval to a lower interval with MSB cleared to 0 ; insert wait for 1 SYSCLK periods Note: Code that implements the wait must be inserted. Code that implements the wait is not explicitly implemented in the above sequence because it depends on the divided LFOSC0 clock and the SYSCLK clock selected. 27.6. Synchronization The watchdog timer is controlled via the WDTCN control register using commands. Commands require synchronization between the system clock and WDT clock source, the divided LFOSC0 clock. The table below lists each WDT command and the number of clock periods from the specified clock source for the command to take effect. Table 27.1. Synchronization Delay Command Clock Delay Required to Apply Enabling/Resetting the WDT 2 divided LFOSC0 clock periods Setting the WDT Interval 1 SYSCLK clock period Disabling the WDT 3 divided LFOSC0 clock periods Due to the WDT command synchronization delay, observe the following guidelines while operating the WDT: Only issue one command to WDTCN register within one divided LFOSC0 clock period. Change the LFOSC0 divider or disable the LFOSC0 only while the WDT is disabled. Change the WDT interval only while the WDT is disabled. 300 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 27.7. Watchdog Timer Control Registers Register 27.1. WDTCN: Watchdog Timer Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name WDTCN Type RW Reset 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 SFR Address: 0x97 Table 27.2. WDTCN Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 WDTCN WDT Control. The WDT control field has different behavior for reads and writes. Read: When reading the WDTCN register, the lower three bits (WDTCN[2:0]) indicate the cur- rent timeout interval. Bit WDTCN.4 indicates whether the WDT is active (logic 1) or inac- tive (logic 0). Write: Writing the WDTCN register can set the timeout interval, enable the WDT, disable the WDT, reset the WDT, or lock the WDT to prevent disabling. Writing to WDTCN with the MSB (WDTCN.7) cleared to 0 will set the timeout interval to the value in bits WDTCN[2:0]. Writing 0xA5 both enables and reloads the WDT. Writing 0xDE followed within 4 system clocks by 0xAD disables the WDT. Writing 0xFF locks out the disable feature until the next device reset. Rev. 1.1 301

C8051F85x/86x 28. Revision-Specific Behavior C8051F85x/86x Revision B devices have differences from Revision C devices: Temperature Sensor offset and slope Flash endurance Latch-up performance Unique Identifier 28.1. Revision Identification The Lot ID Code on the top side of the device package can be used for decoding device revision information. Figure 28.1, Figure 28.2, and Figure 28.3 show how to find the Lot ID Code on the top side of the device package. Firmware can distinguish between a Revision B and Revision C device using the value of the REVID register described in “Device Identification and Unique Identifier” on page 68. C8051F850 e3 1342C00000 This character identifies the device revision Figure 28.1. QSOP-24 Package Revision Marking Rev. 1.1 303

C8051F85x/86x F850 C000 342+ This first character identifies the device revision Figure 28.2. QFN-20 Package Revision Marking C8051F860 e3 1342C00000 This character identifies the device revision Figure 28.3. SOIC-16 Package Revision Marking 304 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 28.2. Temperature Sensor Offset and Slope The temperature sensor slope and offset characteristics of Revision B devices are different than the slope and offset characteristics of Revision C devices. The differences are: Table 28.1. Temperature Sensor Revision Differences Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Revision B Offset V T = 0 °C — 713 — mV OFF A Slope M — 2.67 — mV/°C Revision C Offset V T = 0 °C — 757 — mV OFF A Slope M — 2.85 — mV/°C Firmware that uses the slope and offset of the temperature sensor to calculate the temperature from the sensor ADC reading can detect the revision of the device by reading the REVID register and adjust the slope and offset calculations based on the result. A REVID value of 0x01 indicates a Revision B device, and a REVID value of 0x02 indicates a Revision C device. 28.3. Flash Endurance The flash endurance, or number of times the flash may be written and erased, on some Revision B devices may be lower than expected. Table 1.4 specifies a minimum Endurance (Write/Erase Cycles) as 20000, but some Revision B devices may support a minimum of ~5000 cycles. 28.4. Latch-Up Performance Pulling the device pins below ground and drawing significant current (~3.5 mA) can cause a Power-On Reset event with Revision B devices. Some pins, like P0.0 and P0.1, are more susceptible to this behavior than others. This behavior is outside normal operating parameters and would typically be seen during latch-up or ESD performance testing. 28.5. Unique Identifier Revision B devices do not implement the unique identifier described in “Device Identification and Unique Identifier” on page 68. Rev. 1.1 305

C8051F85x/86x 29. C2 Interface C8051F85x/86x devices include an on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) debug interface to allow flash programming and in-system debugging with the production part installed in the end application. The C2 interface uses a clock signal (C2CK) and a bi-directional C2 data signal (C2D) to transfer information between the device and a host system. Details on the C2 protocol can be found in the C2 Interface Specification. 29.1. C2 Pin Sharing The C2 protocol allows the C2 pins to be shared with user functions so that in-system debugging and flash programming may be performed. C2CK is shared with the RST pin, while the C2D signal is shared with a port I/O pin. This is possible because C2 communication is typically performed when the device is in the halt state, where all on-chip peripherals and user software are stalled. In this halted state, the C2 interface can safely ‘borrow’ the C2CK and C2D pins. In most applications, external resistors are required to isolate C2 interface traffic from the user application. A typical isolation configuration is shown in Figure 29.1. C8051Fxxx /Reset (a) C2CK Input (b) C2D Output (c) C2 Interface Master Figure 29.1. Typical C2 Pin Sharing The configuration in Figure 29.1 assumes the following: 1. The user input (b) cannot change state while the target device is halted. 2. The RST pin on the target device is used as an input only. Additional resistors may be necessary depending on the specific application. 306 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x 29.2. C2 Interface Registers The following describes the C2 registers necessary to perform flash programming through the C2 interface. All C2 registers are accessed through the C2 interface, and are not available in the SFR map for firmware access. Register 29.1. C2ADD: C2 Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name C2ADD Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 This register is part of the C2 protocol. Table 29.1. C2ADD Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 C2ADD C2 Address. The C2ADD register is accessed via the C2 interface. The value written to C2ADD selects the target data register for C2 Data Read and Data Write commands. 0x00: C2DEVID 0x01: C2REVID 0x02: C2FPCTL 0xB4: C2FPDAT Rev. 1.1 307

C8051F85x/86x Register 29.2. C2DEVID: C2 Device ID Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name C2DEVID Type R Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 C2 Address: 0x00 Table 29.2. C2DEVID Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 C2DEVID Device ID. This read-only register returns the 8-bit device ID: 0x30 (C8051F85x/86x). 308 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 29.3. C2REVID: C2 Revision ID Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name C2REVID Type R Reset X X X X X X X X C2 Address: 0x01 Table 29.3. C2REVID Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 C2REVID Revision ID. This read-only register returns the 8-bit revision ID. For example: 0x00 = Revision A, 0x01 = Revision B and 0x02 = Revision C. Rev. 1.1 309

C8051F85x/86x Register 29.4. C2FPCTL: C2 Flash Programming Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name C2FPCTL Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C2 Address: 0x02 Table 29.4. C2FPCTL Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 C2FPCTL Flash Programming Control Register. This register is used to enable flash programming via the C2 interface. To enable C2 flash programming, the following codes must be written in order: 0x02, 0x01. Note that once C2 flash programming is enabled, a system reset must be issued to resume normal operation. 310 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Register 29.5. C2FPDAT: C2 Flash Programming Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name C2FPDAT Type RW Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C2 Address: 0xB4 Table 29.5. C2FPDAT Register Bit Descriptions Bit Name Function 7:0 C2FPDAT C2 Flash Programming Data Register. This register is used to pass flash commands, addresses, and data during C2 flash accesses. Valid commands are listed below. 0x03: Device Erase 0x06: Flash Block Read 0x07: Flash Block Write 0x08: Flash Page Erase Rev. 1.1 311

C8051F85x/86x DOCUMENT CHANGE LIST Revision 0.5 to Revision 0.6  Updated front page block diagram.  Updated ADC supply current parameters in Table 1.2, “Power Consumption,” on page 8.  Corrected flash programming voltage range in "Table 1.4. Flash Memory" on page 11.  Added ADC Power-On Time specification in Table 1.7, “ADC,” on page 13.  Added section "1.2. Typical Performance Curves" on page 19.  Corrected DERIVID Information in Table 11.3, “DERIVID Register Bit Descriptions,” on page 70.  Updated ADC chapter ("14. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0)" on page 85) and expanded section "14.5. Power Considerations" on page 85 with recommended power configuration settings.  Updated Figure 21.1, “Port I/O Functional Block Diagram,” on page 184.  Corrected reset value in Register 24.5, “SMB0ADM: SMBus0 Slave Address Mask,” on page 257.  Corrected description of IE0 in "Table 25.4. TCON Register Bit Descriptions" on page 259. Revision 0.6 to Revision 0.7  Added mention of the UID to the front page.  Updated some TBD values in the "1. Electrical Specifications" on page 8 section.  Updated Power-On Reset (POR) Threshold maximum Falling Voltage on VDD specification in Table 1.3.  Updated Reset Delay from non-POR source typical specification in Table 1.3.  Removed VDD Ramp Time maximum specification in Table 1.3.  Updated Flash Memory Erase Time specification and added Note 2 to Table 1.4.  Updated maximum ADC DC performance specifications in Table 1.7.  Updated minimum and maximum ADC offset error and slope error specifications in Table 1.7.  Updated conditions on Internal Fast Settling Reference Output Voltage (Full Temperature and Supply Range) in Table 1.8.  Added a new section "1.2.3. Port I/O Output Drive" on page 21.  Updated pinout Figure 3.1, Figure 3.2, Figure 3.3, Table 3.1, Table 3.2, and Table 3.3 titles to the correct part numbers.  Updated the Ordering Information ("4. Ordering Information" on page 42.) for Revision C devices.  Added mention of the unique identifier to "8. Memory Organization" on page 52.  Added unique identifier information to "11. Device Identification and Unique Identifier" on page 68.  Updated device part numbers listed in Table 11.3, “DERIVID Register Bit Descriptions,” on page 70 to include the revision.  Added "28. Revision-Specific Behavior" on page 303. Revision 0.7 to Revision 1.0  Updated Digital Core, ADC, and Temperature Sensor electrical specifications information for -I devices.  Updated -I part number information in "4. Ordering Information" on page 42.  Replaced reference to AMX0P and AMX0N with ADC0MX in Table 21.1, “Port I/O Assignment for Analog Functions,” on page 186.  Added a note to Table 1.13, “Absolute Maximum Ratings,” on page 22 and added a link to the Quality and Reliability Monitor Report.  Added Operating Junction Temperature to Table 1.13, “Absolute Maximum Ratings,” on page 22.  Updated all TBDs in "1. Electrical Specifications" on page 8. 312 Rev. 1.1

C8051F85x/86x Revision 1.0 to Revision 1.1  Updated Figure 27.1, “Watchdog Timer Block Diagram,” on page 298.  Added section “27.1. Features” to the Watchdog Timer (WDT0) on page 298.  Updated WDT behavior for all WDT commands.  Added section “27.6. Synchronization” to the Watchdog Timer (WDT0) on page 300. Rev. 1.1 313

Simplicity Studio One-click access to MCU and wireless tools, documentation, software, source code libraries & more. Available for Windows, Mac and Linux! IoT Portfolio SW/HW Quality Support and Community www.silabs.com/IoT www.silabs.com/simplicity www.silabs.com/quality community.silabs.com Disclaimer Silicon Labs intends to provide customers with the latest, accurate, and in-depth documentation of all peripherals and modules available for system and software implementers using or intending to use the Silicon Labs products. Characterization data, available modules and peripherals, memory sizes and memory addresses refer to each specific device, and "Typical" parameters provided can and do vary in different applications. Application examples described herein are for illustrative purposes only. Silicon Labs reserves the right to make changes without further notice and limitation to product information, specifications, and descriptions herein, and does not give warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of the included information. Silicon Labs shall have no liability for the consequences of use of the information supplied herein. This document does not imply or express copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits. The products are not designed or authorized to be used within any Life Support System without the specific written consent of Silicon Labs. A "Life Support System" is any product or system intended to support or sustain life and/or health, which, if it fails, can be reasonably expected to result in significant personal injury or death. Silicon Labs products are not designed or authorized for military applications. Silicon Labs products shall under no circumstances be used in weapons of mass destruction including (but not limited to) nuclear, biological or chemical weapons, or missiles capable of delivering such weapons. Trademark Information Silicon Laboratories Inc.® , Silicon Laboratories®, Silicon Labs®, SiLabs® and the Silicon Labs logo®, Bluegiga®, Bluegiga Logo®, Clockbuilder®, CMEMS®, DSPLL®, EFM®, EFM32®, EFR, Ember®, Energy Micro, Energy Micro logo and combinations thereof, "the world’s most energy friendly microcontrollers", Ember®, EZLink®, EZRadio®, EZRadioPRO®, Gecko®, ISOmodem®, Micrium, Precision32®, ProSLIC®, Simplicity Studio®, SiPHY®, Telegesis, the Telegesis Logo®, USBXpress®, Zentri, Z-Wave, and others are trademarks or registered trademarks of Silicon Labs. ARM, CORTEX, Cortex-M3 and THUMB are trademarks or registered trademarks of ARM Holdings. Keil is a registered trademark of ARM Limited. All other products or brand names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective holders. Silicon Laboratories Inc. 400 West Cesar Chavez Austin, TX 78701 USA http://www.silabs.com

Mouser Electronics Authorized Distributor Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery & Lifecycle Information: S ilicon Laboratories: C8051F853-C-GM C8051F855-C-GM C8051F852-C-GM C8051F855-C-GU C8051F853-C-GU C8051F854-C-GU C8051F850-C-GM C8051F854-C-GM C8051F850-C-GU C8051F864-C-GS C8051F852-C-GU C8051F851-C-GU C8051F860-C-GS C8051F861-C-GS C8051F865-C-GS C8051F863-C-GS C8051F862-C-GS C8051F851-C-GM